Anda di halaman 1dari 617

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION TO MICROCELLULAR

CHAPTER 2 DEPLOYMENT OF MICROCELLULAR

CHAPTER 3 PLANNING OF MICROCELLS AND PICOCELLS

CHAPTER 4 MICROCELLULAR DATABASE

CHAPTER 5 MICRO/PICOCELLULAR OPTIMIZATION PROCEDURE

CHAPTER 6 HARDWARE FOR MULTILAYERED SYSTEMS

APPENDIX A

APPENDIX B

APPENDIX C

GLOSSARY OF TERMS

ANSWERS

Cellular Infrastructure Group

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

SYS12 CAPACITY ENHANCING TECHNIQUES AND MULTILAYER SYSTEMS


FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

SYS12 CAPACITY ENHANCING TECHNIQUES AND MULTILAYER SYSTEMS

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

SYS12 CAPACITY ENHANCING TECHNIQUES AND MULTILAYER SYSTEMS

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

SYS12 Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

E Motorola 1993, 1994, 1995, 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 All Rights Reserved Printed in the U.K.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Copyrights, notices and trademarks


Copyrights
The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyright computer programs, including the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyright computer program. Accordingly, any copyright Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the rights that arise by operation of law in the sale of a product.

Restrictions
The software described in this document is the property of Motorola. It is furnished under a license agreement and may be used and/or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. Software and documentation are copyright materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola.

Accuracy
While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from the use of the information obtained herein. Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights of others.

Trademarks

and MOTOROLA are trademarks of Motorola Inc. UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries, licensed exclusively through X/Open Company Limited. Tandem, Integrity, Integrity S2, and Non-Stop-UX are trademarks of Tandem Computers Incorporated. X Window System, X and X11 are trademarks of the Massachusetts Institute of Technology. Looking Glass is a registered trademark of Visix Software Ltd. OSF/Motif is a trademark of the Open Software Foundation. Ethernet is a trademark of the Xerox Corporation. Wingz is a trademark and INFORMIX is a registered trademark of Informix Software Ltd. SUN, SPARC, and SPARCStation are trademarks of Sun Microsystems Computer Corporation. IBM is a registered trademark of International Business Machines Corporation. HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard Inc.

ii

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

General information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Important notice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About this manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cross references . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Text conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First aid in case of electric shock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Artificial respiration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Burns treatment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reporting safety issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warnings and cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specific warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Laser radiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lifting equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Do not ... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Toxic material . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum permitted exposures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum permitted exposure ceilings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power density measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beryllium health and safety precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Health issues . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inhalation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Skin contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Eye contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handling procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Disposal methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product life cycle implications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Caution labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Specific cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fibre optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Static discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

1 1 1 1 2 2 3 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 9 10 10 10 11 11 11 11 12 12 12 12 12 13 13 13 13 13 13

iii

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Devices sensitive to static . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special handling techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Motorola GSM manual set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generic manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tandem OMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scaleable OMC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Related manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Category number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalogue number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ordering manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

14 14 14 15 15 15 15 16 16 16 17 17 17

Chapter 1 Introduction to Microcellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Introduction to Microcellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic capacity and frequency reuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sectorisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saturation point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Present cell architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multipath fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building penetration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended GSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiband environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Concentric cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single BCCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two BCCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directed retry and congestion relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directed retry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Congestion relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to Microcellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What are microcells? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The street canyon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microcell applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical microcells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Microcellular Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combined cell architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layered cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Layered System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combined cell architecture structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic capacity enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
11 11 12 12 12 14 14 18 18 110 112 114 116 118 120 122 122 122 124 124 124 126 126 126 126 128 130 130 130 132 134 138 142

Chapter 2 Deployment of Microcellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Deployment of Microcellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv

i
21 21

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multipath fading in microcells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comparison of DCS 1800 and GSM 900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency hopping in microcellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combined cell architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combined cell handovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotspots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotspots handovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handovers to/from hotspot cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handovers to the hotspot cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling handovers in hotspots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast moving MSs entering a hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSs leaving a hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Idle Mobile Behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Association of mobiles to micro/macro layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Methods of controlling reselection into a cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effects of increasing cell_reselect_hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell reselection C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selective cell-bar on microcells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effects of Broadcasting Separate BA Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Broadcasting separate BA lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Method 1: (see table opposite) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Method 2: (see table opposite) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotspots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detection of Hotspot cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-building Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Propagation from outside to inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-building coverage using internal mounted microcells / picocells . . . . . . . . . . . . Distributed antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radiating cable (leaky feeder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microcell re-distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wideband enhancer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channelised enhancer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Gain Control (AGC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Propagation within Buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The In-Building Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to picocellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is picocellular? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The picocellular solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

22 22 24 26 26 210 212 214 214 216 216 218 218 218 220 220 222 224 226 230 232 232 232 232 236 238 238 242 242 244 246 246 248 248 248 248 248 250 252 252 254 258

Chapter 3 Planning of Microcells and Picocells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Planning of Microcells and Picocells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steps in Planning Microcellular Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identification of requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

i
31 31 32 32

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Traffic Handling in Microcellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning of Signalling Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements for Calculating Link Budgets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link Budgets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Close proximity interworking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum Coupling Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factors Effecting Close Proximity Interworking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum Coupling Loss (MCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Designing without Close Proximity Mobiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMC Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink Interference to Foreign Mobiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building Penetration from Externally Mounted Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation from Tall Buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Further Microcell Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection of cell sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microcellular coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combined Cell Frequency Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning a Combined Cell Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning and Measurement Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Motorola Ray Tracer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of simulation tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Motorola Handsim Simulation Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visualiser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Co-channel and Adjacent Channel Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use of planning tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning Tools for In-Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-building capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Micro/Macro Layer Frequency Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handover Scenario for Adjacent Channels (Both BCCH Carriers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directional antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OMNI antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Transient Cell Situation at in this Case a Crossroads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation of Microcell Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation of antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

34 36 38 310 310 312 314 314 316 318 320 322 324 326 326 326 326 328 332 332 334 336 336 338 340 342 342 342 344 344 344 350 352 354 354 356 358 360 360 362 364

Chapter 4 Microcellular Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Microcellular Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
vi

i
41 41

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Handover Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handovers in Hotspots and Combined Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main design criterion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handovers to/from other Vendors Macrocells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Motorola Handover Decision Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microcellular Handovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Seven Motorola Microcellular Handover Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiband operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting of the Candidate List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interference avoidance test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 1 Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PBGT algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink RXLEV only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adapted power Consideration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uplink Consideration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power budget exercise part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power budget exercise part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Criteria 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Criteria 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MicroMicro Quality Handover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 1 Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 2 Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 3 Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 4 Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 5 Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimization of type 5 handovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 6 Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 7 Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration of Handover Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptive Handovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example Application Scenarios for Handover Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Imperative handover from microcell to macrocell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand-down from macrocell to microcell (handover to a type 5 neighbour) . . . . . Handover to a type 3 neighbour (round the corner handover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handover to a line-of-sight neighbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying the algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example Application Scenarios for Handover Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Co-located Mini Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handover Detection and Power Control Process (Microcellular PBGT Ho Evaluation) Microcellular Database Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add_neighbor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prompted parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

42 44 44 46 48 410 412 412 414 414 416 416 418 420 422 428 428 428 430 432 434 436 436 438 440 442 444 448 448 452 456 460 462 466 466 466 466 466 466 468 470 472 478 478 480 492

vii

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directed retry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Congestion relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Congestion handover criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency and EGSM calls in cells using directed retry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microcellular purchasable option and directed retry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCH flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directed retry and congestion relief database parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced congestion relief procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directed Retry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Congestion Relief Type 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Congestion Relief Type 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Concentric Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency re-use advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zone interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zone configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power based handover algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interference based handover algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interference based handover into zone 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guard timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interference based handover into zone 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel allocation rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculated Handover Power Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Range Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timeslot Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF Planning Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximizing Output Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximizing Receiver Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Range Handovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Extended Range Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Extended Range Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Range Cell parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Range Cell parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiband Inter-cell Handover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiband handover database parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiband neighbour measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Band preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classmark of mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coincident Multiband Handover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feature objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Coincident Multiband . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4100 4100 4100 4102 4102 4102 4102 4102 4112 4116 4118 4120 4122 4124 4126 4128 4130 4134 4136 4138 4140 4142 4144 4148 4150 4152 4154 4156 4158 4160 4162 4162 4164 4164 4166 4168 4170 4174 4176 4178 4180 4182 4182 4184

Chapter 5 Microcellular/Picocellular Optimization Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Microcellular/Picocellular Optimization Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
viii

i
51 51

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Optimization Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System benchmarking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Benchmarking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handover benchmarking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All Channels at Full Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Problem Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coverage holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Co-channel Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effects of interference of fast moving mobiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guidelines to reduce interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjacent Channel Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OMC Support for the Microcellular Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microcellular source / neighbour view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Separate SACCH and BCCH neighbours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power budget algorithm per neighbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailed view template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning the In-Building Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning the in-building solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Talk to the customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utilization of existing network connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visit site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agree final plan with customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Order and install equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test and optimize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run and maintain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

52 52 54 54 54 56 58 58 58 510 510 512 512 514 516 516 518 520 522 524 526 526 528 532 534 536 538 540 542 544 548

Chapter 6 Hardware for Multilayered Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


M-Cellarena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cellarena equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cellarena Enclosure Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC-DC power supply module (ac-dc PSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cellarena RF Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cellarena RF equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual Transceiver Module (DTRX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combiner/ isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

i
62 62 64 64 66 66 66 66 68 68 68 68 68 68 68

ix

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellarena Digital Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio Digital Interface System (RDIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver Control Unit, Micro (TCU-m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX output power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Control Unit, Micro (MCU-m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Interface Unit, Micro (NIU-m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Interface modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cellaccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSU shelf layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACU Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACC interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACC line termination modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACC to ACU connection with fibre optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACC to ACU connection with copper wire twisted pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cellaccess RF unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cellaccess cluster controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features of M-Cellaccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Benefits of M-Cellaccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Static sharing of leased line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL within M-Cellaccess and HorizonOffice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use of HDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-Building cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fibre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-Building cable requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External features of CU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal features of CU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital hardware board equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

610 610 612 612 614 614 616 616 616 616 618 618 618 620 620 622 624 626 628 630 632 634 636 636 636 638 638 638 640 642 644 644 644 646 646 648 650 652 652 654 656 656 656

Appendix A (Erlang B Tables) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Appendix B (Hotspot Survey) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Hotspot Survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-requisites (local office) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Equipment loaned by Swindon (less optional items) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Post initial deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Practical deployment of hotspot survey . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CTP analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
x

A1 B1
B2 B4 B4 B5 B5 B5 B7

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Appendix C (In-Building Requirements Questionnaire) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


In-Building Requirements Questionnaire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

C1
C2

Glossary of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A ......................................................................... B ......................................................................... C ......................................................................... D ......................................................................... E ......................................................................... F ......................................................................... G ......................................................................... H ......................................................................... I .......................................................................... K ......................................................................... L ......................................................................... M ......................................................................... N ......................................................................... O ......................................................................... P ......................................................................... Q ......................................................................... R ......................................................................... S ......................................................................... T ......................................................................... U ......................................................................... V ......................................................................... W ........................................................................ X ......................................................................... Z .........................................................................

G1
G2 G2 G4 G6 G9 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 G16 G17 G18 G21 G22 G23 G24 G25 G26 G29 G31 G32 G32 G32 G32

Answers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

xi

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

xii

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

General information

General information
Important notice
If this manual was obtained when you attended a Motorola training course, it will not be updated or amended by Motorola. It is intended for TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY. If it was supplied under normal operational circumstances, to support a major software release, then corrections will be supplied automatically by Motorola in the form of General Manual Revisions (GMRs).

Purpose
Motorola Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) Technical Education manuals are intended to support the delivery of Technical Education only and are not intended to replace the use of Customer Product Documentation. WARNING Failure to comply with Motorolas operation, installation and maintenance instructions may, in exceptional circumstances, lead to serious injury or death. These manuals are not intended to replace the system and equipment training offered by Motorola, although they can be used to supplement and enhance the knowledge gained through such training.

About this manual

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

General information

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Cross references
Throughout this manual, cross references are made to the chapter numbers and section names. The section name cross references are printed bold in text. This manual is divided into uniquely identified and numbered chapters that, in turn, are divided into sections. Sections are not numbered, but are individually named at the top of each page, and are listed in the table of contents.

Text conventions
The following conventions are used in the Motorola GSM manuals to represent keyboard input text, screen output text and special key sequences.

Input
Characters typed in at the keyboard are shown like this.

Output
Messages, prompts, file listings, directories, utilities, and environmental variables that appear on the screen are shown like this.

Special key sequences


Special key sequences are represented as follows: CTRL-c ALT-f | CR or RETURN Press the Control and c keys at the same time. Press the Alt and f keys at the same time. Press the pipe symbol key. Press the Return (Enter) key. The Return key is identified with the symbol on both the X terminal and the SPARCstation keyboards. The SPARCstation keyboard Return key is also identified with the word Return.

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

First aid in case of electric shock

First aid in case of electric shock


Warning
WARNING Do not touch the victim with your bare hands until the electric circuit is broken. Switch off. If this is not possible, protect yourself with dry insulating material and pull or push the victim clear of the conductor.

Artificial respiration
In the event of an electric shock it may be necessary to carry out artificial respiration. Send for medical assistance immediately.

Burns treatment
If the patient is also suffering from burns, then, without hindrance to artificial respiration, carry out the following: 1. 2. 3. Do not attempt to remove clothing adhering to the burn. If help is available, or as soon as artificial respiration is no longer required, cover the wound with a dry dressing. Do not apply oil or grease in any form.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Reporting safety issues

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Reporting safety issues


Introduction
Whenever a safety issue arises, carry out the following procedure in all instances. Ensure that all site personnel are familiar with this procedure.

Procedure
Whenever a safety issue arises: 1. 2. 3. 4. Make the equipment concerned safe, for example, by removing power. Make no further attempt to tamper with the equipment. Report the problem directly to GSM MCSC +44 (0)1793 430040 (telephone) and follow up with a written report by fax +44 (0)1793 430987 (fax). Collect evidence from the equipment under the guidance of the MCSC.

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Warnings and cautions

Warnings and cautions


Introduction
The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this manual and in all manuals of the Motorola GSM manual set.

Warnings
Definition
A warning is used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life, physical injury, or ill health. This includes hazards introduced during maintenance, for example, the use of adhesives and solvents, as well as those inherent in the equipment.

Example and format


WARNING Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors. Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.

Cautions
Definition
A caution means that there is a possibility of damage to systems, or individual items of equipment within a system. However, this presents no danger to personnel.

Example and format


CAUTION Do not use test equipment that is beyond its calibration due date when testing Motorola base stations.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

General warnings

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

General warnings
Introduction
Observe the following warnings during all phases of operation, installation and maintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola GSM manuals. Failure to comply with these warnings, or with specific warnings elsewhere in the Motorola GSM manuals, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these requirements.

Warning labels
Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any warning labels fitted to the equipment. Warning labels must not be removed, painted over or obscured in any way.

Specific warnings
Warnings particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned on the equipment and within the text of this manual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times when working with the equipment, as must any other warnings given in text, on the illustrations and on the equipment.

High voltage
Certain Motorola equipment operates from a dangerous high voltage of 230 V ac single phase or 415 V ac three phase mains which is potentially lethal. Therefore, the areas where the ac mains power is present must not be approached until the warnings and cautions in the text and on the equipment have been complied with. To achieve isolation of the equipment from the ac supply, the mains input isolator must be set to off and locked. Within the United Kingdom (UK) regard must be paid to the requirements of the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989. There may also be specific country legislation which need to be complied with, depending on where the equipment is used.

RF radiation
High RF potentials and electromagnetic fields are present in the base station equipment when in operation. Ensure that all transmitters are switched off when any antenna connections have to be changed. Do not key transmitters connected to unterminated cavities or feeders. Refer to the following standards: S S ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3kHz to 300GHz. CENELEC 95 ENV 50166-2, Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields High Frequency (10kHz to 300GHz).

Laser radiation
Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors. Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.
6

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

General warnings

Lifting equipment
When dismantling heavy assemblies, or removing or replacing equipment, the competent responsible person must ensure that adequate lifting facilities are available. Where provided, lifting frames must be used for these operations. When equipments have to be manhandled, reference must be made to the Manual Handling of Loads Regulations 1992 (UK) or to the relevant manual handling of loads legislation for the country in which the equipment is used.

Do not ...
... substitute parts or modify equipment. Because of the danger of introducing additional hazards, do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment. Contact Motorola if in doubt to ensure that safety features are maintained.

Battery supplies
Do not wear earth straps when working with standby battery supplies.

Toxic material
Certain Motorola equipment incorporates components containing the highly toxic material Beryllium or its oxide Beryllia or both. These materials are especially hazardous if: S S S Beryllium materials are absorbed into the body tissues through the skin, mouth, or a wound. The dust created by breakage of Beryllia is inhaled. Toxic fumes are inhaled from Beryllium or Beryllia involved in a fire.

See the Beryllium health and safety precautions section for further information.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only)

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only)


Introduction
This equipment is designed to generate and radiate radio frequency (RF) energy. It should be installed and maintained only by trained technicians. Licensees of the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) using this equipment are responsible for insuring that its installation and operation comply with FCC regulations designed to limit human exposure to RF radiation in accordance with the American National Standards Institute IEEE Standard C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3kHz to 300GHz.

Definitions
This standard establishes two sets of maximum permitted exposure limits, one for controlled environments and another, that allows less exposure, for uncontrolled environments. These terms are defined by the standard, as follows:

Uncontrolled environment
Uncontrolled environments are locations where there is the exposure of individuals who have no knowledge or control of their exposure. The exposures may occur in living quarters or workplaces where there are no expectations that the exposure levels may exceed those shown for uncontrolled environments in the table of maximum permitted exposure ceilings.

Controlled environment
Controlled environments are locations where there is exposure that may be incurred by persons who are aware of the potential for exposure as a concomitant of employment, by other cognizant persons, or as the incidental result of transient passage through areas where analysis shows the exposure levels may be above those shown for uncontrolled environments but do not exceed the values shown for controlled environments in the table of maximum permitted exposure ceilings.

Maximum permitted exposures


The maximum permitted exposures prescribed by the standard are set in terms of different parameters of effects, depending on the frequency generated by the equipment in question. At the frequency range of this Personal Communication System equipment, 1930-1970MHz, the maximum permitted exposure levels are set in terms of power density, whose definition and relationship to electric field and magnetic field strengths are described by the standard as follows:

Power density (S)


Power per unit area normal to the direction of propagation, usually expressed in units of watts per square metre (W/m2) or, for convenience, units such as milliwatts per square centimetre (mW/cm2). For plane waves, power density, electric field strength (E) and magnetic field strength (H) are related by the impedance of free space, 377 ohms. In particular,
2 S + E + 377 377

H2 where E and H are expressed in units of V/m and A/m, respectively, and S in units of W/m 2. Although many survey instruments indicate power density units, the actual quantities measured are E or E2 or H or H2.

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only)

Maximum permitted exposure ceilings


Within the frequency range, the maximum permitted exposure ceiling for uncontrolled environments is a power density (mW/cm2) that equals f/1500, where f is the frequency expressed in MHz, and measurements are averaged over a period of 30 minutes. The maximum permitted exposure ceiling for controlled environments, also expressed in mW/cm 2, is f/300 where measurements are averaged over 6 minutes. Applying these principles to the minimum and maximum frequencies for which this equipment is intended to be used yields the following maximum permitted exposure levels: Uncontrolled Environment 1930MHz Ceiling 1970MHz Controlled Environment 1930MHz 1970MHz 6.567mW/cm 2

1.287mW/cm 2 1.313mW/cm 2 6.433mW/cm 2

If you plan to operate the equipment at more than one frequency, compliance should be assured at the frequency which produces the lowest exposure ceiling (among the frequencies at which operation will occur). Licensees must be able to certify to the FCC that their facilities meet the above ceilings. Some lower power PCS devices, 100 milliwatts or less, are excluded from demonstrating compliance, but this equipment operates at power levels orders of magnitude higher, and the exclusion is not applicable. Whether a given installation meets the maximum permitted exposure ceilings depends, in part, upon antenna type, antenna placement and the output power to which this equipment is adjusted. The following example sets forth the distances from the antenna to which access should be prevented in order to comply with the uncontrolled and controlled environment exposure limits as set forth in the ANSI IEEE standards and computed above.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Human exposure to radio frequency energy (PCS1900 only)

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Example calculation
For a base station with the following characteristics, what is the minimum distance from the antenna necessary to meet the requirements of an uncontrolled environment? Transmit frequency Base station cabinet output power, P Antenna feeder cable loss, CL Antenna input power Pin Antenna gain, G Using the following relationship: G + 4pr W Pin
2

1930MHz +39.0dBm (8 watts) 2.0dB PCL = +39.02.0 = +37.0dB (5watts) 16.4dBi (43.65)

Where W is the maximum permissible power density in W/m2 and r is the safe distance from the antenna in metres, the desired distance can be calculated as follows: r+ GPin + 4pW 43.65 5 + 1.16m 4p 12.87 where W = 12.87 W/m2 was obtained from table listed above and converting from mW/cm 2 to W/m2. NOTE The above result applies only in the direction of maximum radiation of the antenna. Actual installations may employ antennas that have defined radiation patterns and gains that differ from the example set forth above. The distances calculated can vary depending on the actual antenna pattern and gain.

Power density measurements


While installation calculations such as the above are useful and essential in planning and design, validation that the operating facility using this equipment actually complies will require making power density measurements. For information on measuring RF fields for determining compliance with ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, see IEEE Recommended Practice for the Measure of Potentially Hazardous Electromagnetic Fields - RF and Microwave, IEEE Std C95.3-1991. Copies of IEEE C95.1-1991 and IEEE C95.3-1991 may be purchased from the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers, Inc., Attn: Publication Sales, 445 Hoes Lane, P.O. Box 1331, Piscattaway, NJ 08855-1331, (800) 678-IEEE or from ANSI, (212) 642-4900. Persons responsible for installation of this equipment are urged to consult these standards in determining whether a given installation complies with the applicable limits.

Other equipment
Whether a given installation meets ANSI standards for human exposure to radio frequency radiation may depend not only on this equipment but also on whether the environments being assessed are being affected by radio frequency fields from other equipment, the effects of which may add to the level of exposure. Accordingly, the overall exposure may be affected by radio frequency generating facilities that exist at the time the licensees equipment is being installed or even by equipment installed later. Therefore, the effects of any such facilities must be considered in site selection and in determining whether a particular installation meets the FCC requirements.
10

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Beryllium health and safety precautions

Beryllium health and safety precautions


Introduction
Beryllium (Be), is a hard silver/white metal. It is stable in air, but burns brilliantly in Oxygen. With the exception of the naturally occurring Beryl ore (Beryllium Silicate), all Beryllium compounds and Beryllium metal are potentially highly toxic.

Health issues
Beryllium Oxide is used within some components as an electrical insulator. Captive within the component it presents no health risk whatsoever. However, if the component should be broken open and the Beryllium Oxide, which is in the form of dust, released, there exists the potential for harm.

Inhalation
Inhalation of Beryllium Oxide can lead to a condition known as Berylliosis, the symptoms of Berylliosis are similar to Pneumonia and may be identified by all or any of the following: Mild poisoning causes fever, shortness of breath, and a cough that produces yellow/green sputum, or occasionally bloodstained sputum. Inflammation of the mucous membranes of the nose, throat, and chest with discomfort, possibly pain, and difficulty with swallowing and breathing. Severe poisoning causes chest pain and wheezing which may progress to severe shortness of breath due to congestion of the lungs. Incubation period for lung symptoms is 220 days. Exposure to moderately high concentrations of Beryllium in air may produce a very serious condition of the lungs. The injured person may become blue, feverish with rapid breathing and raised pulse rate. Recovery is usual but may take several months. There have been deaths in the acute stage. Chronic response. This condition is more truly a general one although the lungs are mainly affected. There may be lesions in the kidneys and the skin. Certain features support the view that the condition is allergic. There is no relationship between the degree of exposure and the severity of response and there is usually a time lag of up to 10 years between exposure and the onset of the illness. Both sexes are equally susceptible. The onset of the illness is insidious but only a small number of exposed persons develop this reaction.

First aid
Seek immediate medical assistance. The casualty should be removed immediately from the exposure area and placed in a fresh air environment with breathing supported with Oxygen where required. Any contaminated clothing should be removed. The casualty should be kept warm and at rest until medical aid arrives.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

11

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Beryllium health and safety precautions

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Skin contact
Possible irritation and redness at the contact area. Persistent itching and blister formations can occur which usually resolve on removal from exposure.

First aid
Wash area thoroughly with soap and water. If skin is broken seek immediate medical assistance.

Eye contact
May cause severe irritation, redness and swelling of eyelid(s) and inflammation of the mucous membranes of the eyes.

First aid
Flush eyes with running water for at least 15 minutes. Seek medical assistance as soon as possible.

Handling procedures
Removal of components from printed circuit boards (PCBs) is to take place only at Motorola approved repair centres. The removal station will be equipped with extraction equipment and all other protective equipment necessary for the safe removal of components containing Beryllium Oxide. If during removal a component is accidently opened, the Beryllium Oxide dust is to be wetted into a paste and put into a container with a spatula or similar tool. The spatula/tool used to collect the paste is also to be placed in the container. The container is then to be sealed and labelled. A suitable respirator is to be worn at all times during this operation. Components which are successfully removed are to be placed in a separate bag, sealed and labelled.

Disposal methods
Beryllium Oxide or components containing Beryllium Oxide are to be treated as hazardous waste. All components must be removed where possible from boards and put into sealed bags labelled Beryllium Oxide components. These bags must be given to the safety and environmental adviser for disposal. Under no circumstances are boards or components containing Beryllium Oxide to be put into the general waste skips or incinerated.

Product life cycle implications


Motorola GSM and analogue equipment includes components containing Beryllium Oxide (identified in text as appropriate and indicated by warning labels on the equipment). These components require specific disposal measures as indicated in the preceding (Disposal methods) paragraph. Motorola will arrange for the disposal of all such hazardous waste as part of its Total Customer Satisfaction philosophy and will arrange for the most environmentally friendly disposal available at that time.
12

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

General cautions

General cautions
Introduction
Observe the following cautions during operation, installation and maintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola GSM manuals. Failure to comply with these cautions or with specific cautions elsewhere in the Motorola GSM manuals may result in damage to the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these requirements.

Caution labels
Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any caution labels fitted to the equipment. Caution labels must not be removed, painted over or obscured in any way.

Specific cautions
Cautions particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned within the text of this manual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times when working with the equipment, as must any other cautions given in text, on the illustrations and on the equipment.

Fibre optics
The bending radius of all fibre optic cables must not be less than 30 mm.

Static discharge
Motorola equipment contains CMOS devices that are vulnerable to static discharge. Although the damage caused by static discharge may not be immediately apparent, CMOS devices may be damaged in the long term due to static discharge caused by mishandling. Wear an approved earth strap when adjusting or handling digital boards. See Devices sensitive to static for further information.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

13

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Devices sensitive to static

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Devices sensitive to static


Introduction
Certain metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) devices embody in their design a thin layer of insulation that is susceptible to damage from electrostatic charge. Such a charge applied to the leads of the device could cause irreparable damage. These charges can be built up on nylon overalls, by friction, by pushing the hands into high insulation packing material or by use of unearthed soldering irons. MOS devices are normally despatched from the manufacturers with the leads shorted together, for example, by metal foil eyelets, wire strapping, or by inserting the leads into conductive plastic foam. Provided the leads are shorted it is safe to handle the device.

Special handling techniques


In the event of one of these devices having to be replaced observe the following precautions when handling the replacement: S S S S S S Always wear an earth strap which must be connected to the electrostatic point (ESP) on the equipment. Leave the short circuit on the leads until the last moment. It may be necessary to replace the conductive foam by a piece of wire to enable the device to be fitted. Do not wear outer clothing made of nylon or similar man made material. A cotton overall is preferable. If possible work on an earthed metal surface. Wipe insulated plastic work surfaces with an anti-static cloth before starting the operation. All metal tools should be used and when not in use they should be placed on an earthed surface. Take care when removing components connected to electrostatic sensitive devices. These components may be providing protection to the device.

When mounted onto printed circuit boards (PCBs), MOS devices are normally less susceptible to electrostatic damage. However PCBs should be handled with care, preferably by their edges and not by their tracks and pins, they should be transferred directly from their packing to the equipment (or the other way around) and never left exposed on the workbench.

14

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Motorola GSM manual set

Motorola GSM manual set


Introduction
The following manuals provide the information needed to operate, install and maintain the Motorola GSM equipment.

Generic manuals
The following are the generic manuals in the GSM manual set, these manuals are release dependent:

Category number
GSM-100-101 GSM-100-201 GSM-100-311 GSM-100-313 GSM-100-320 GSM-100-321 GSM-100-403 GSM-100-423 GSM-100-501 GSM-100-521 GSM-100-523 GSM-100-503 GSM-100-721

Name
System Information: General Technical Description: OMC in a GSM System Technical Description: BSS Implementation Technical Description: BSS Command Reference Installation & Configuration: GSM System Configuration Installation & Configuration: BSS Optimization Maintenance Information: Alarm Handling at the OMC Maintenance Information: Device State Transitions Maintenance Information: BSS Field Troubleshooting Maintenance Information: GSM Statistics Application Software Release Notes: BSS/RXCDR

Catalogue number
68P02901W01 68P02901W31 68P02901W36 68P02901W23 68P02901W17 68P02901W43 68P02901W26 68P02901W57 68P02901W51 68P02901W56 68P02901W72

Operating Information: GSM System Operation 68P02901W14 Technical Description: OMC Database Schema 68P02901W34

Tandem OMC
The following Tandem OMC manuals are part of the GSM manual set for systems deploying Tandem S300 and 1475:

Category number
GSM-100-202 GSM-100-712

Name
Operating Information: OMC System Administration Software Release Notes: OMC System

Catalogue number
68P02901W13 68P02901W71

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

15

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Motorola GSM manual set

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Scaleable OMC
The following Scaleable OMC manuals replace the equivalent Tandem OMC manuals in the GSM manual set:

Category number
GSM-100-202 GSM-100-413 GSM-100-712

Name

Catalogue number

Operating Information: Scaleable OMC System 68P02901W19 Administration Installation & Configuration: Scaleable OMC Clean Install Software Release Notes: Scaleable OMC System 68P02901W47 68P02901W74

Related manuals
The following are related Motorola GSM manuals:

Category number
GSM-001-103 GSM-002-103 GSM-005-103 GSM-008-403

Name
System Information: BSS Equipment Planning System Information: DataGen System Information: Advance Operational Impact Installation & Configuration: Expert Adviser

Catalogue number
68P02900W21 68P02900W22 68P02900W25 68P02900W36

Service manuals
The following are the service manuals in the GSM manual set, these manuals are not release dependent. The internal organization and makeup of service manual sets may vary, they may consist of from one to four separate manuals, but they can all be ordered using the overall catalogue number shown below:

Category number
GSM-100-020 GSM-100-030 GSM-105-020 GSM-106-020 GSM-201-020 GSM-202-020 GSM-101-SERIES GSM-103-SERIES GSM-102-SERIES GSM-200-SERIES

Name
Service Manual: BTS Service Manual: BSC/RXCDR Service Manual: M-Cell2 Service Manual: M-Cell6 Service Manual: M-Cellcity Service Manual: M-Cellaccess ExCell4 Documentation Set ExCell6 Documentation Set TopCell Documentation Set M-Cellmicro Documentation Set

Catalogue number
68P02901W37 68P02901W38 68P02901W75 68P02901W85 68P02901W95 68P02901W65 68P02900W50 68P02900W70 68P02901W80 68P02901W90

16

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Motorola GSM manual set

Category number
The category number is used to identify the type and level of a manual. For example, manuals with the category number GSM-100-2xx contain operating information.

Catalogue number
The Motorola 68P catalogue number is used to order manuals.

Ordering manuals
All orders for Motorola manuals must be placed with your Motorola Local Office or Representative. Manuals are ordered using the catalogue number. Remember, specify the manual issue required by quoting the correct suffix letter.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

17

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Motorola GSM manual set

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

18

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Chapter 1

Introduction to Microcellular

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

ii

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Chapter 1 Introduction to Microcellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Introduction to Microcellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic capacity and frequency reuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sectorisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell splitting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Saturation point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Present cell architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multipath fading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building penetration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended GSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiband environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Concentric cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Single BCCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Two BCCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directed retry and congestion relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directed retry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Congestion relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to Microcellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What are microcells? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The street canyon . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microcell applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical microcells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Microcellular Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combined cell architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Layered cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Layered System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combined cell architecture structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic capacity enhancement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
11 11 12 12 12 14 14 18 18 110 112 114 116 118 120 122 122 122 124 124 124 126 126 126 126 128 130 130 130 132 134 138 142

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

iii

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

iv

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Introduction to Microcellular

Introduction to Microcellular
Objectives
On completon of this section the student will be able to: S S S Understand the reasons for implementing microcellular. Understand what a microcell is and how they may be employed. Understand the advantages of microcellular.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

11

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Introduction

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Introduction
There are many reasons for the introduction of microcellular techniques to compliment the existing infrastructure. There are also alternative solutions that may be employed prior to the implementation and consideration of a microcellular solution. These reasons and solutions will be discussed in more detail within the following sections.

Current systems
There are many different capacity limitations placed on a network. These include the limitations of frequency reuse and channel availability.

Traffic capacity and frequency reuse


An established network may have reached close to the capacities which are attainable, without major expensive expansion and replanning. If further channels are required this may mean expensive site expansion, for example, a single BTS may have reached its capacity of 6 TCUs. If this is the case, expansion of the BTSs coverage area to fill a blackspot or increase channel capacity in a given area could mean the use of another large BTS site or cabinet. With the use of a microcell the BSS could be established at relatively low cost. The frequency reuse pattern of your network may be saturated and could make reusing frequencies to cover areas of high traffic density difficult. Macrocells are traditionally high powered, high volume cells, whereas, microcells are relatively low cost for a greater volume of traffic.

12

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Introduction

Traffic Capacity and Frequency Re-use

BTS BTS
600 m

BTS
BSC with 40 BTSs

Shopping arcade requires greater coverage

BTS

BTS

BSC

BTS

BTS BTS BTS BTS

BTS

BTS

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

13

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Current Systems

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Current Systems
Sectorisation
The capacity of any network is a function of the number of RF channels available and the number of times those frequencies can be reused in a given area and the desired blocking probability. One way to increase the capacity of the network is by frequency reuse. Frequency reuse can be achieved by sectorisation of existing cell sites. To increase the coverage and capacity of a network built up of omni-directional cells, the conventional approach is to sectorise the existing cells (i.e. restrict the coverage area of each cell to a sector of 120_ or 60_ of arc thereby allowing increased control of coverage and interference). In this way, it is possible to reuse frequencies over smaller distances, allowing a significant increase in network capacity, whilst maintaining the C/I ratio at an acceptable level. The diagram opposite shows a four site reuse pattern with 120_ sectorised cells. Within the current system this arrangement will be common in the centres of large towns and cities where peak subscriber demand is heavy. If the operator has only 24 carriers allocated for their use, they will be restricted theoretically to 2 carriers per cell. This means only 16 channels, which is not a lot if you consider each cell could contain several office blocks. A solution to this problem could be the introduction of microcells, which can mean a greater frequency reuse pattern.

14

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Current Systems

Four Site Pattern

a1 Reuse a2 b1 b2 a1 a2 a3 d1 d2 d3 c3 b3 c1 c2 a3

120 Sectors

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

15

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Current Systems

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Sectorisation
A further solution to network operators capacity problems may be the introduction of six sector operation. This technique permits six cells to be controlled from a single base site controller. Six sector operation can be used to deliver capacity benefits to EGSM900 operators and coverage benefits to DCS1800 operators. It employs narrow band antennas which utilize higher transmitted power and a narrower beam width coverage than standard antennas. The use of narrow beam antennas results in a reduction in co-channel interference, which in turn allows tighter frequency reuse and greater network capacity. Secondly, it allows a DCS1800 operator to achieve a greater range, due to the high transmit power and therefore achieve coverage with fewer cell sites. Moreover, penetration into buildings is improved for both EGSM900 and DCS1800.

16

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Current Systems

Two-Site Pattern

a1 a6 b1 b6 b5 b4 a1 a6 a5 a4 a2 a3 b2 b3 b6 b5 b4 a5 a4 b1 b2 b3 a2 a3

60 Sectors

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

17

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Current Systems

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Cell splitting
Later, as the subscriber base grows within a confined area, (usually a town or city), it is necessary to provide even more capacity in some areas by sub-dividing the cells of the network to position more cells within the same area. This, in turn, reduces the coverage area of some of the existing cells by introducing antenna tilt techniques. Finally, after the number of cells has increased, and the area of coverage of each cell decreases to the saturation point, another approach to the provision of increased capacity is necessary.

Saturation point
At saturation point investment in expensive rooftop sites has already become considerable, and any ability to increase capacity further or to cover holes that exist in the network in areas of already heavy subscriber demand by conventional macrocellular means is now exhausted. Subscriber access to the network in these areas is likely to become a great deal more problematic, as new subscribers only increase the network difficulties. Time of access to the network in these saturation areas will increase steadily and to aggravate matters further the quality of service as perceived by the subscriber will fall at least as fast. Worse still, there may be small areas at street level where it is difficult or maybe impossible to provide adequate coverage because interference restricts further cell reduction. Call continuity for subscribers moving through such areas is likely to be poor and complaints from disappointed subscribers are likely to increase.

18

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Current Systems

Cell Splitting

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

19

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Current Systems

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Present cell architecture


Cell size
The number of cells in any geographic area is determined by the number of mobile subscribers operating in that area. The maximum cell size is mainly determined by the distance radio waves can travel and the propagation delay this produces.

Large cells
Larger cells are mainly used in remote areas where there are few subscribers, using high transmission power.

Small cells
Smaller cells cover areas of dense subscriber traffic using low transmission power. These are usually used in urban areas. Some networks may have cells as small as two or three hundred meters radius in areas of high traffic.

Trade off large v small


Network operators wish to have their cells as large as possible to keep the cost of equipment down. They must also ensure that all those wishing to use the cell can gain access to it. The smaller the cell radius, the more handovers required and the chances of co- and adjacent channel interference increases. It is harder to find physical locations for cells and antennas as you increase the number of traditional BSSs. All this has to be taken in to consideration when planning a network. The use of microcells may alleviate some of these problems.

110

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Current Systems

Present Cell Architecture Cell Size

35 Km

Large cells

2 Km
1 Km

Small cells
EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

111

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Current Systems

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Multipath fading
Multipath fading results from a signal travelling from a transmitter to a receiver by a variety of routes. This is caused by the signal being reflected from objects, or being influenced by atmospheric effects as it passes, for example, through layers of air of varying temperatures and humidity. The received signals will therefore arrive at different times and not be in phase with each other, they will have experienced time dispersion. On arrival at the receiver, the signals combine either constructively or destructively, the overall effect being to add together or to cancel each other out. If the latter applies there may be hardly any usable signal at all. The frequency band used for GSM transmission means that a good location may be only 15cm from a bad location! When the receive antenna is moving, the exact phase of each path changes and consequently the combined signal-strength is also continually changing. When the antenna is moving rapidly this loss is recovered by interleaving and channel coding. When it is slow moving or stationary however, the receiver may be in a null (point of minimum signal) for several consecutive frames. The diagram opposite shows a few routes by which a pulse of radio energy might propagate from a base station to an MS. Each has suffered varying losses in transmission (path attenuation), hence the variety of amplitudes. A typical urban profile would cause dispersion of up to 5 microseconds, whereas, a hilly terrain would cause dispersion of up to 20 microseconds. Current equalization techniques can deal with delays of up to 16.5 microseconds, which can cope with delays experienced in typical built up areas. This is the environment that microcells will be typically used. The equalizer must be able to cope with a dispersion of up to 16.5 microseconds. GSM offers five techniques which combat multipath fading effects. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Equalization (carried out in the receiver) Diversity space (10 wavelengths min) Frequency hopping (optional) not a security feaure Interleaving Channel coding

Even with all of these techniques some areas may still be in poor or no coverage. Microcells do not suffer from fading to the same degree as macrocells.

112

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Current Systems

Multipath Fading

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

113

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Current Systems

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Building penetration
Radio waves in the GSM frequency range, although being able to penetrate some buildings, cannot always guarantee coverage in buildings and built-up areas. This is due to the reflection and propogation of the GSM radio waves, caused by the buildings structure. Microcells could be used in areas of poor and no coverage.

114

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Current Systems

Building Penetration

GSM Site

Poor coverage to rear of building and varying in building coverage

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

115

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Current Systems

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Extended GSM
The frequency spectrum is very congested with only a narrow bandwidth allocated for cellular telecommunications. This means that the bandwidth we have must be used very efficiently. One possibility for increasing available traffic channels, in GSM900, would be the use of the extended GSM frequency range. The use of the EGSM frequency range would greatly increase a planners flexibility and a networks channel capacity. However, one problem with EGSM is that only certain mobiles can support it, the vast majority, as yet, do not (only phase 2 mobiles support EGSM). One alternative solution to current capacity limitations may be the use of microcells which would provide a greater frequency reuse of existing frequencies, rather than the EGSM frequency range. Another alternative would be to implement a microcellular infrastructure using the EGSM, range of frequencies.

116

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Current Systems

Cellular Radio Frequency Spectrum for UK

Frequency (MHz)

DCS1800
Usage

950
Base Station Transmit Downlink"

935
Channel separation 95MHz

925

1805 1785

20 MHz 917 guard 915 band

905
Base Station Receive Uplink"

890 880 1710 DCS1800

872

GSM

TACS/GSM

EGSM

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

1880

Frequency (MHz)

TACS/GSM
Usage

960

Base Station Transmit Downlink" Channel separation 45MHz 2 MHz guard band

Base Station Receive Uplink"

ETACS

117

Current Systems

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Multiband environment
Network operators now have the ability to utilize both the GSM900 and DCS1800 frequency spectrum. Not only can this environment be supported by dual band telephones, but also by the ability of the Motorola network to support multiband inter-cell handovers. Multiband inter-cell handover will provide the BSS with the ability to support inter-cell handovers where cells are operating in different frequency bands. In addition, the network operator will have the ability to deploy cells of differing frequency bands within the same BTS site(s).

118

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Current Systems

Multiband Environment

RXCDR

BSC

BTS 1 GSM 900

BTS 3 GSM 900/1800

Multiband handovers supported between different layers identified by the frequency

BTS 2 GSM 1800

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

119

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Current Systems

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Dual rate
Dual rate is the term applied to a cellular system capable of using either full rate or half rate speech. Currently, GSM employs transcoding of speech from 64 kbit/s to 13 kbit/s. This is known as full rate speech. It allows four GSM 16 kbit/s full speech channels to be carried on one 64 kbit/s channel of a 2 Mbit/s PCM link. GSM have also specified a half rate speech channel at 6.5 kbit/s. This would allow eight GSM 6.5 k/b half rate speech channels to be carried on one 64 kbit/s channel of a 2 Mbit/s PCM link. Half rate speech is restricted to phase 2 mobiles only. With full rate voice coding, a mobile handset will transmit in very short bursts for one eighth of the time and not transmit during the other seven eighths, thereby, allowing (up to) seven other full rate handsets to be using the same frequency at the same time. Half rate mobiles transmit a burst of the same duration but will stop every other burst, thereby transmitting only one sixteenth of the time. This leaves time available for (up to) fifteen other half rate handsets to use the same frequency at the same time. Dual rate theoretically doubles the number of mobiles which can be supported by a given number of RF channels. Once trunking efficiency is taken into account, dual rate more than doubles the capacity of a given system, provided that all handsets are capable of dual rate operation.

120

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Current Systems

Dual Rate

Full rate transmission


Full rate handset transmitting 1/8 of the time

... and not transmitting 7/8 of the time

Half rate transmission


Half rate handset `misses' every other burst

... hence transmits only 1/16 of the time

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

121

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Current Systems

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Concentric cells
Concentric cells is a term to describe the deployment of a super frequency reuse pattern superimposed upon a regular frequency reuse pattern. The first reuse pattern is a standard macrocellular reuse pattern such as 4x3. The second reuse pattern, known as the super reuse layer uses a more aggressive frequency reuse pattern such as 2x3 or even 1x3. Two concentric cell techniques can be deployed, single BCCH and two BCCH.

Single BCCH
This technique uses interference estimation or measurement to move traffic between the conventional macrocell underlay and super reuse layer. It is a simple technique in which the size of cells on the super reuse layer is self governed by interference. However the use of a single BCCH means that the macrocell is a critical dependency for all call set-ups and inter site handovers and is thus susceptible to congestion.

Two BCCH
This is a more controllable technique which provides a BCCH to both macrocellular and super reuse layer. Again interference governs the size of cells on the super reuse. The two BCCH technique can support cell set up onto either layer and handovers to/from either layer on a quality or receive level basis. Installation of a two BCCH solution requires detailed network planning.

122

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Current Systems

Concentric Cells

Without concentric cells:

With concentric cells:

Macro underlay Super reuse overlay Cell site

Benefits: S Utilizes existing spectrum, handsets, cell sites and hardware;


S S

Suitable for localized or more widespread use; Requires only minor changes to site configuration.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

123

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Current Systems

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Directed retry and congestion relief


Directed retry and congestion relief are software based techniques which can be used to increase capacity in very dense cellular systems where there is significant coverage overlap from neighbouring cells. Calls in the overlap region can be maintained on more than one cell with sufficiently high quality.

Directed retry
Directed retry allows handover of a mobile station from an SDCCH of one cell directly to a TCH of another cell. A directed retry handover procedure may be initated when a mobile station, which is assigned to a SDCCH, requires a traffic channel at a time when all TCHs in the same cell are busy. The system queues the traffic channel request and executes a selection process to determine whether any neighbouring cell is a valid candidate for receiving a directed retry handover.

Congestion relief
This procedure is activated when a mobile station assigned to an SDCCH requires a traffic channel and none are available. Two options are offered for deciding how many handover procedures are actually initiated. One option is that the number of handover procedures initiated is at most the number of outstanding requests for a TCH. The second option allows for initiation of a handover procedure for each mobile station which meets the modified criteria to support the feature.

124

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems 125

MACRO LAYER
MS moved to TFC in macro layer Another MS is moved to a TCF in macro layer A number of MS are moved to a TFC in the macro layer

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MS attempts call in micro layer

MICRO LAYER
A
MS attempts call in micro layer

MS attempts call in micro layer MS is assigned a TFC in the micro layer. Congestion Relief (type 2)

C
DIRECTED RETRY

MS is assigned a TFC in the micro layer. Congestion Relief (type 1)

Note:

To trigger all the above events the TFC utilisation in the inital target cell (i.e. micro layer) must be 100%

Current Systems

Introduction to Microcellular

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Introduction to Microcellular
At present, 80% to 90% of the current GSM subscribers fall into one category, that of slow moving and stationary mobile stations. Microcells address this category of subscriber by providing increased quality of service through reduced blocking and greater coverage in built up areas.

What are microcells?


The microcell is a reduced power cell intended for use in dense traffic environments, such as cities or possibly within public buildings. The microcell has its antenna(s) below rooftop level and usually at least 5m above street level. The main region of operation for the microcell is the street canyon.

The street canyon


Radio signals from a microcell to a handportable unit of street level travel by reflection and diffraction from buildings and other street furniture, but principally by line of sight. Usually the antennas of microcells are so positioned that only negligible amounts of radiation escape over the rooftops. The microcells functions are almost isolated within the street canyon. Propagation loss rises steeply when the handportable moves out of the line of sight (around the street corner). The street canyon is effectively a sealed enclosure, albeit with somewhat different propagation characteristics.

Microcell applications
Microcellular is a system that has applications in: S S S GSM, DCS, PCS, WILL; Dense urban areas; In-building systems.

126

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Introduction to Microcellular

The Street Canyon

Line of sight propagation

Diffraction & scattering

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

127

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Introduction to Microcellular

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Typical microcells
By siting of the antenna and the propagation of the radio path, microcells can be used to cover different areas, as well as, provide solutions for different encountered scenarios. Shown opposite are some typical microcell coverage areas.

128

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Introduction to Microcellular

Typical Microcells Typical Directional Antenna Coverage

Typical OMNI Directional Antenna Coverage

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems


BUILDINGS
ROADWAY


BUILDINGS 300m
BUILDINGS ANTENNA BUILDINGS BUILDINGS BUILDINGS
129

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

The Microcellular Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The Microcellular Solution


The traditional cell architecture means the cell is designed for as near total coverage for all mobile subscribers within its given areas as possible.

Combined cell architecture


Network Operators have probably long recognized the limitations of the macrocellular network as traffic requirement grows. The microcellular network clearly operates in well defined small local urban areas where the street topography allows. However, a combination of the two types of network coverage has much more flexibility than either type by itself. The macrocell acts as a safety net for the microcellular network, whereas the microcell network benefits the macrocellular network in terms of improved coverage at hotspots, as well as in coping with capacity demands of a high level of handportable subscribers moving within a very small area who would otherwise experience blocking on the macrocellular network.

Layered cells
In its simplest implementation, the combined cell architecture consists of two layers of cells: S S Microcells handle most of the traffic from slow moving subscriber units. Macrocells handle faster moving traffic and provide a fallback in the case of degradations to a call in progress on a microcell.

130

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The Microcellular Solution

Combined Cell Coverage

Macrocell coverage

Microcell coverage

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

131

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Multi-Layered System

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Multi-Layered System
When planning for our multi-layered system we have to plan that micro/picocells will cover the large majority of subscriber density. The mobiles will be slow moving. Therefore we could have a three-layered system. Macro: Micro: Supporting fast moving mobiles. Also support for congestion in micro/pico layers and for bad quality in micro/pico layers. Supports slow moving mobiles down at street level (outdoor environment), therefore reducing congestion where large subscriber density is found. For inbuilding coverage using micro cells can give better coverage using external penetration. Where good coverage and good quality of signal is needed within a building containing a large subscriber density, then pico cells can be set up as a third layer to support this.

Pico:

132

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Multi-Layered System

Multi-Layered System

Fast and slow moving mobiles

Macro

Micro

Slow moving mobiles Pico

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

133

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

The Microcellular Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The Microcellular Solution


Combined cell architecture structure
A combined cell architecture employs cells of different sizes overlaid to provide contiguous coverage. This structure is shown in the diagram opposite. Some points to note are: S S S S Macro and microcell networks may be operated as individual systems. The microcell network is more dominant as it handles the greater amount of traffic. Microcells can be underlayed into existing networks. Picocells can be introduced as a third layer or as part of the second layer.

134

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The Microcellular Solution

Combined Cell

Link to implement microcells as a separate system Alternative system (microcells controlled by the same BSC as macrocells)

MSC BSC A

System 2 microcell BSC B


BTS 2 BTS 4 BTS 5

System 1 macrocell BTS 1

BTS 3

Picocell Macrocell coverage

Microcell coverage

System 1= Overlay System System 2= Underlay System

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

135

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

The Microcellular Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

As the GSM Network evolves and matures its traffic loading will increase as the number of subscribers grow. Eventually a network will reach a point of traffic saturation. The use of microcells can provide high traffic capacity in localized areas. The expansion of a BTS site past its original designed capacity can be a costly exercise and the frequency reuse implications need to be planned carefully (co-channel and adjacent channel interference). The use of microcells can alleviate the increase in congestion, the microcells could be standalone cells to cover traffic hotspots or a contiguous coverage of cells in a combined architecture. The increased coverage will give greater customer satisfaction.

136

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The Microcellular Solution

The Microcellular Solution

S Cell size has reached a minimum practical size. S Increased capacity and coverage quality is required. S Microcells will reach places where conventional macrocells cannot. S On street cells will in some cases have better in building penetration than macrocells. S Specific in building cells may even be implemented. S Microcells can be used to supplement channel capacity in areas of rapid traffic growth. S Microcells are a way of effectively covering areas of inhomogenous traffic. S Increased spectrum efficiency - Erlangs/KM2/MHz.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

137

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

The Microcellular Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Traffic capacity enhancement


Traffic capacity is measured in Erlangs. One Erlang equates to one traffic channel permanently utilized for a defined period of 1 hour. On the page opposite is an example scenario for a single macrocell with 3 microcells deployed.

Scenario assumptions;
S S S S S Erlangs supported by the 2 carrier macrocell = 8.20E (2 control channels 14TCH). Single carrier microcell support 2.94E. Dual carrier microcells support 9.01E. 0.025 Erlangs per subscriber. 2% blocking (grade of service).

Note:
For call originations it is dependant on what layer (micro or macro) the MS is in idle mode, as to what capacity is available (unless directed retry or congestion relief is used). The capacity of both layers is available for handovers.

138

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The Microcellular Solution

Traffic Capacity Enhancement

Combined cell scenario

Capacity increase factor

Erlangs

Subscriber

Macro (2 carriers) +3 micro (1 carrier) (1 control channel) +3 micro (2 carrier) (1 control channel)

1 2.08 4.30

8.20

328

* *

17.02 35.23

* *

680.80 1409.20

* *

Macrocell

Buildings

Microcells
* If subscribers are in the microcell coverage area

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

139

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

The Microcellular Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Some advantages of microcells are as follows: S Providing improved and more flexible coverage Within the traditional cell architecture, there are many areas of none or poor coverage (blackspots). Microcells can be used to provide better coverage in these areas, located typically in built up areas. Traffic capacity is also greatly improved. S In-building coverage Increasing the coverage area does not necessarily imply increasing the geographic area of coverage. Improving in-building coverage within the existing coverage area is one of the uses of microcells. A picocell could be designed to cover a specific building internally (e.g. a shopping arcade). S Hotspot coverage A hotspot cell is essentially an isolated microcell implemented under a macrocell. A hotspot cell is implemented to relieve the traffic loading on a macrocell and is also useful when the traffic distribution in the macrocell is inhomogenous.

140

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The Microcellular Solution

Some Advantages of Microcells

Microcells provide:

. Improved and more flexible coverage


Cost effective additional capacity (in some circumstances). Smaller and more flexible. Increased subscriber density. Multivendor environment.

. In building coverage. . Hotspot coverage

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

141

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Exercise

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Exercise
Our urban coverage in the example is maintained by a two-carrier macro cell using two common control channels. The subscriber density has risen to 2500 subscribers. To cover all these subscribers with a GOS of 2% blocking, how many two-carrier microcells would we need? How many one-carrier microcells would we need? The average subscriber makes two calls per hour with each call lasting two minutes. Each one-carrier microcell uses one control channel. Each two-carrier microcell uses 1 control channel.

142

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Exercise

Exercise
First, calculate Erlang/Subscriber No of calls Duration of call = = No of calls x call duration Erlang/Subscriber = 3600 Next work out how many Erlangs of traffic need to be supported in the area. Erlangs needed = = = Remember: The macro will support traffic as well. Therefore: Resultant Erlangs needed = Erlangs needed - Erlangs supplied from the macro layer (on page 1.45) At 2% blocking the number of traffic channels needed to support the resultant Er langs needed are From Erlang B tables = no. of traffic channels Therefore the number of one carrier microcells = 8 no. of control channels no. of traffic channels Therefore the number oftwo carrier microcells = 16 no. of control channels Erlang/Subscriber x no. of subscribers

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

143

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Exercise

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

144

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Chapter 2

Deployment of Microcellular

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

ii

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Chapter 2 Deployment of Microcellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Deployment of Microcellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microcellular Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multipath fading in microcells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Comparison of DCS 1800 and GSM 900 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency hopping in microcellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combined cell architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combined cell handovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotspots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotspots handovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handovers to/from hotspot cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handovers to the hotspot cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling handovers in hotspots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fast moving MSs entering a hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MSs leaving a hotspot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Idle Mobile Behaviour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Association of mobiles to micro/macro layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Methods of controlling reselection into a cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effects of increasing cell_reselect_hysteresis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell reselection C2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selective cell-bar on microcells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effects of Broadcasting Separate BA Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Broadcasting separate BA lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Method 1: (see table opposite) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Method 2: (see table opposite) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hotspots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detection of Hotspot cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-building Coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Propagation from outside to inside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-building coverage using internal mounted microcells / picocells . . . . . . . . . . . . Distributed antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radiating cable (leaky feeder) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microcell re-distribution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wideband enhancer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channelised enhancer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automatic Gain Control (AGC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Propagation within Buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The In-Building Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to picocellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . What is picocellular? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The picocellular solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

i
21 21 22 22 24 26 26 210 212 214 214 216 216 218 218 218 220 220 222 224 226 230 232 232 232 232 236 238 238 242 242 244 246 246 248 248 248 248 248 250 252 252 254 258

iii

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

iv

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Deployment of Microcellular

Deployment of Microcellular
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student will be able to: S S S S Understand the deployment of microcells. Understand idle mobile behaviour in microcells. Understand the techniques employed in microcells. Understand the principles employed in providing in-building coverage.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

21

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Microcellular Techniques

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Techniques
Multipath fading in microcells
The dominant propagation mechanisms in the microcellular environment are scattering from buildings, street corner defraction and line of sight propagation. In the cases where a dominant line of sight path is present, the fading tends towards Rician rather than Rayleigh fading. Rician fades tend to be less deep than those of Rayleigh. Also in microcells there will be a significant propagation of the on street area which has no line of sight path to the microcell antenna, in these areas, deep fading may still occur. In macrocellular systems, frequency hopping is often quoted as a mechanism to assist mobiles which are stationary within deep fade. This may not be so effective in microcells.

22

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Techniques

Multipath Fading in Microcellular

Microcell antenna Line of sight

Diffraction & scattering STREET CANYON

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

23

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Microcellular Techniques

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Multipath fading in microcells


The classical analysis of the multipath environment within a built up area in a macrocell system leads to the conclusion that the signal amplitude at the mobile exhibits fading with a Rayleigh distribution. The assumption of sufficient scatterers from a variety of directions leads to a fading process with deep nulls roughly spaced apart by one half wavelength. In a microcell system, that part of a cells coverage area which is line of sight will tend to have Rician, rather than Rayleigh, distribution. In this case the fading is less severe. If a cells coverage area includes a part for which the propagation in non-line of sight, the deep fading is again seen in this area.

Comparison of DCS 1800 and GSM 900


From a purely frequency point of view it would be true to say that the DCS1800 range of frequencies suffer from more fades than that of EGSM900. However, they are usually less pronounced.

24

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Techniques

Fading in Microcellular Systems

Non line of sight (Rayleigh Distribution)


Signal strength

Threshold Deep nulls


2

1/

wavelength Distance

Line of sight (Rician Distribution)


Signal strength

Threshold

Distance
EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

25

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Microcellular Techniques

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Frequency hopping in microcellular


Frequency hopping as a means to relieve degradation due to a deep fade relies on being able to hop to frequencies sufficiently far away which are not so deeply faded. In other words, the bandwidth over which the hopping takes place must be large compared with the coherence bandwidth of the channel. The coherence bandwidth of a channel is inversely proportional to the delay spread of that channel. In the microcellular environment, the delay spreads are small since all the propagation times themselves are relatively small. This implies a large coherence bandwidth (i.e. the hopping must take place over a wide bandwidth in order to be effective). Given the limited sets of frequencies available to the operators, this is difficult to achieve and hence frequency hopping for this purpose is of limited use over a small number of frequencies. Frequency hopping over more than two frequencies of a suitable coherence bandwidth may be of some value. Careful antenna sitings and control of power settings could have as much if not more advantage in microcellular than frequency hopping. This not to say that frequency hopping in the macrolayer for interference reduction or capacity gains should be disconnected.

Summary
When frequency hopping is introduced good calls get worse but bad calls get better.

26

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Techniques

Frequency Hopping in Microcellular

Coherence bandwidth of channel[

1
Delay spread of the channel

OR
MHz[

1
Micro(Nano) seconds

Due to small propagation times in microcellular the delay spread of the channels is small this implies that wide coherence bandwidth is required to hop over. Note: Coherence bandwidth would typically be between 1 and 10MHz.

A typical delay is 100 nanosec's.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

27

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Microcellular Techniques

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

There are several uses for microcells: S S S Hotspots. In-building coverage. Contiguous coverage.

The first thing to be decided when implementing microcells is to what degree, if at all, to employ each type of defined microcellular coverage method. This will require detailed planning of cell areas to decide the type of coverage (i.e. contiguous or hotspot). The best possible site locations for the best coverage and how the microcells will operate within the macrocells. The aim is to provide the customer with the best possible service. Traffic analysis would also be carried out to determine any areas of high traffic or inhomogenous traffic.

28

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Techniques

Microcell Coverage
MICROCELL COVERAGE FAST MOVING SUBSCRIBERS MACROCELL

MOTORWAY
STATION COULD HAVE IN BUILDING COVERAGE

THRIVING BUSINESS PARK

RAILWAY

AN AREA OF INHOMOGENOUS TRAFFIC COVERAGE

SPORTS STADIUM

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems


RAILWAY STATION BUSY SHOPPING CENTRE
POSSIBLY A BAD USE OF MICROCELL

FOOT PATH

HOUSING ESTATE

MACROCELL MAY CATER FOR THIS

FARM LAND

29

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Microcellular Techniques

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Combined cell architecture


It may be that the deployment of a microcellular system throughout a large area for contiguous coverage is neither a practical or cost effective solution. Traffic demand throughout the suburban areas of a city may be small compared with the city centre. In those areas, wide area radio coverage from conventional macrocells will remain the most effective and appropriate solution. The application of microcells within a combined cell architecture (micro and macro) implies that cells of different sizes, transmit powers and coverage areas are overlaid. The introduction of a combined cell architecture will provide the network operator with the ability to reuse frequencies closer within a smaller area and therefore increase spectrum efficiency. The implementation of a microcell system will provide increased traffic handling capability within a small geographic area and is therefore ideally suited for dense urban environments such as pedestrian shopping areas or commercial centres. The application of a combined cell architecture within a city provides the network operator with the flexibility to allocate capacity where required, for example, microcells can be utilized within dense city centres whilst macrocells can provide coverage for lower traffic density suburban areas. The flexibility of a combined cell architecture will provide the network operator with the ability to minimize infrastructure investment whilst maximizing user capacity.

210

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Techniques

Combined Cell Architecture Provides:

Ability to reuse frequencies closer together, therefore increased spectrum efficiency (Erlangs/Km2/MHz).

Increased traffic handling capability.

Flexibility to allocate capacity without major planning and re optimization of an existing network.

Minimize infrastructure investment whilst maximizing user capacity.

Contiguous coverage.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

211

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Microcellular Techniques

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Combined cell handovers


Within a combined cellular network the microcellular layer is biased to be dominant because the majority of calls will take place on the microcells which offer a much higher quality of service. Only under certain conditions when that normally high level of service cannot be maintained does control pass to the macrocellular part of the combined network. The macrocellular network functions separately from, but in conjunction with, the microcellular network. As long as a handportable moves at relatively low speeds within the area served by the microcellular network, communication is via the microcell offering the best quality of service. As long as a faster moving unit continues to move above a certain speed, communication is via the overlaying macrocell, because in this instance only the macrocellular part of the network can offer the higher quality of service under these conditions. However, when a signal level from a mobile subscriber equipment at a microcell indicates that a better quality of service can be offered by an overlaying macrocell (such as when a subscriber moves towards X in the diagram opposite), and this condition persists, handover to the overlying macrocell occurs. This condition would also occur on emergence from microcellular coverage, at microcellular blackspots and with rapid increase of speed, (such as a car starting from traffic lights at Y and accelerating towards Z. In these cases the macrocell acts as a safety net for the overlaid microcells.

212

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


MACROCELL

Overlay Handover Scenario

MICROCELL

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Microcellular Techniques

213

Hotspots

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Hotspots
Hotspots are easier to implement than contiguous microcell coverage. Hotspots can be implemented in areas of high traffic density where the use of either a microcell or the utilization of existing hardware and software is purely employed to relieve the loading of the macrocell. As the coverage is non-contiguous and the RF hardware employed is effectively a standalone cell, the frequency planning is relatively easy.

Hotspots handovers
As a hotspot is in an area of high traffic density then presumably most of the subscribers would be very slow moving or stationary. It would be unwise to place a microcell as a hotspot if its coverage extends onto a road or railway. Cell location is critical to ensure efficient use of carrier resource.

214

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Hotspots

Hotspots

S Can use existing GSM hardware and software. S Used in areas of localized high traffic density. S Non contiguous. S Relieves the loading on the macrocell. S Frequency planning easier than a combined cell system. S At present, the easiest to identify frequencies for, experimentally. S Cell selection and location are critical to ensure efficient carrier resource.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

215

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Hotspots

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Handovers to/from hotspot cells


There are a number of possibilities open to the planner when configuring hotspot cells. Two basic considerations are whether handovers into the cell are allowed from the macrocells, or they are disabled.

Handovers to the hotspot cell


If desired, it is possible to disable hand-ins to the hotspot cell in order to tailor the cell for optimal handling of local mobiles. Consider the case, for example, where the hotspot cell provides extra coverage (and hence picks up extra traffic) compared to the macrocell (e.g. with an in-building hotspot cell). There is always the danger that the hotspot cell coverage will extend out of the building and maybe onto a busy road. This cell will then pick up traffic from the road that could otherwise have been handled by the macrocell serving that area. This traffic is served at the expense of in-building capacity. The traffic carrying capacity of the cell is therefore not being used optimally. Additionally, if fast moving mobiles successfully hand in to the hotspot cell, there is a danger that due to their speed the hand out may fail causing the call to be dropped. If there is no danger, due to spurious coverage, of the hotspot cell picking up mobiles which should have been handled by the macrocells then hand-ins and hand-outs to the hotspot cell should be enabled. Care should be taken with the use of adjacent channels in the hotspot cell and the overlying macrocell. Potentially, there are situations where this may work, for example, if the area contains only slow moving traffic. Then, handovers may be fast enough to prevent adjacent channel interference from happening (disabling hand-ins would not be allowable in this case).

216

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Hotspots

Handovers to/from Hotspot Cells

Two basic options for planner:

MACRO

HANDOVER"

Hotspot cell (allowed) Hotspot cell (not allowed for fast moving mobiles)

MACRO

HANDOVER"

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

217

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Hotspots

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Controlling handovers in hotspots


The special handover procedures developed for use in the combined cell architecture (see later) can also be used to control handovers to/from hotspot cells. However, there is also scope for using the parameters in the standard algorithms to adjust the handovers as required. Two methods may be: S S Make the hotspot cell difficult to hand into or reselect by fast moving MSs. Ensure that fast handover from MS leaving the hotspot cell is encouraged.

Fast moving MSs entering a hotspot


Fast moving MSs selecting the hotspot cell run the risk of dropped calls should they originate a call. There is also a risk of fast MSs dropping calls should they enter the cell in dedicated mode. To discourage fast moving MSs from handing into the hotspot cell in dedicated mode, there are 2 mechanisms (apart from disabling incoming handovers). These options are to increase the handover margin and/or to increase the averaging time in the macrocell. The handover margin is definable on a per neighbour basis and therefore can be increased for handovers to the hotspot cell, and left as it was for the macrocells other neighbours. The averaging time defined by HREQAVE is now definable on a per cell and per neighbour basis and therefore increasing it will affect handovers into the hotspot cell.

MSs leaving a hotspot


Given the typical environment of a hotspot microcell, MS leaving the cell will often attempt to hand out of the cell after they have turned a corner. There is often a very rapid drop of signal strength (20dB or more) on turning the corner. The system design should be such that; S S this drop is recognized and a handover command generated. the hotspot signal strength should be sufficient for the MS to receive the handover command correctly.

It is highly likely that, at the point where the hotspot cell signal experiences a rapid drop, the macrocell will be significantly stronger after the drop. Therefore a high value of HO_MARGIN can be used. The averaging period, defined by HREQAVE, however, should be set to a short value, allowing a fast handover. Another possibility is to trigger the handover on downlink RXLEV, again with a short averaging period.

218

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Hotspots

Controlling Handovers in Hotspots

Two methods may be: S Make the hotspot cell difficult to hand into or reselect by fast moving MSs. S Ensure that fast handover from MS leaving hotspot cell is encouraged.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

219

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Idle Mobile Behaviour

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Idle Mobile Behaviour


Idle mobiles are constantly listening to the BCCHs of its serving and surrounding cells to enable it to setup a call on the most appropriate cell when required. How a mobile unit behaves in idle mode is more loosely specified by the GSM recommendations. This has the consequence that mobiles from different manufacturers may behave differently.

Association of mobiles to micro/macro layer


A basic philosophy may be to keep all idle mobiles camped onto the macrolayer and then to drop them to the microlayer on call setup. The problems which can occur if this is not done, are caused by the fact that the mobiles cell reselection process may be too slow to avoid loss of service. A fast moving mobile camped on a microcell will, if it does not reselect quick enough, experience downlink interference and loss of the downlink CCCH. Slow reselection and interference on the downlink can result in lost pages. There is also the option of doing nothing. Letting the mobiles originate on their best server, micro or macro, will result in most mobiles originating on the microlayer. This will increase system capacity but will cause problems with fast mobiles. The operator must decide which gives the best overall system performance: Maximizing capacity with freely allowed origination OR Best performance for fast mobiles with restricted originations. Of course the problem of fast moving mobiles may not occur.

220

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Idle Mobile Behaviour

Idle Mobile Behaviour

BCCH

BCCH

Fast moving idle mobile subscribers when leaving microcells for macrocells must carry out a quick reselection or CCCHs could be lost.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


221

Idle Mobile Behaviour

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Methods of controlling reselection into a cell


To discourage fast moving mobiles which are currently camped on a macrocell from reselecting microcells as they pass through, one possibility is to: Make the microcell location areas distinct from those assigned to macrocells and introduce a high value of cell_reselect_hysteresis. When considering BCCH reselection from one cell to another with the same location area the value of C1 for potential cell must be greater than that for the source cell. When the potential cell is in another location area then the value of C1 must be greater than that of the source cell by a database set parameter, the cell_reselect_hysteresis field. C1 is calculated by MS P1 and P2 are broadcast on BCCH.

C1= (A - MAX (B, O)) A:= B:= Rxlev Average - P1 P2 - Max RF Power of Ms

P1= Rxlev_access_min=<*> 0= -110 dBm 1= -109 dBm . . 63= -47 dB P2= ms_txpwr_max_cch= <*> 0= 43 dBm 1= 41 dBm . . 15= 13 dBm

Note: +A -A +B -B

Good downlink Poor downlink Poor uplink Good uplink

A brief description of C1 would be: for selection the MS chooses the best positive C1 value. for reselection the C1 value of the neighbor must be greater than that of the server.

222

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Idle Mobile Behaviour

Cell Reselection for Fast Moving Mobile Units cell_reselect_hysteresis= <*> * 0= 0dB RXLEV 1= 2dB RXLEV . . 7= 14dB RXLEV Macrocell location Location area A BCCH C1 + X

Location area B BCCH C1

Microcell

If X" is a high value then it would be difficult to move from location area A" to location area B".
EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems 223

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Idle Mobile Behaviour

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Effects of increasing cell_reselect_hys teresis


As there is only one value for CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS broadcast, increasing the value will slow down the reselection process for mobiles moving into other macrocell neighbours in different location areas, as well as, mobiles reselecting the microcell. This must be considered before the change is made. Another limitation of this approach is the fact that CELL_RESELECT_HYSTERESIS has a maximum value of 14 dB. Given the recommended strategy of designing with high signal strengths on street from the microcells, this 14 dB margin may easily be exceeded and reselection may occur.

224

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Idle Mobile Behaviour

Effects of increasing cell_reselect_hysteresis

Can cause: S The reselection process will be delayed from the macro to micro.

However: S CELL_RESELECTION_HYSTERESIS has a maximum value of 14 dB. This margin may be easily reached as microcells are recommended to be designed with high signal on street strength. S The reselection process will also be delayed for MACRO to MACRO reselection, for macrocells with different location areas.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

225

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Idle Mobile Behaviour

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Cell reselection C2
C2 can be used to control mobiles from reselecting into the microcell by setting a time that the mobile must be in receipt of the microcell or macrocell neighbours BCCH before it can camp on, it could also reduce the number of reselections. C2 is an optional GSM feature which can only be used for cell reselection, it can be enabled or disabled on a cell basis. If C2 parameters are not being broadcast the C1 process is used for reselection. The formula below shows that C2 is firmly based on the original C1 calculation. C2= C1 + Cell_reselection_offset Temporary offset * H (for penalty_time <31) C2= C1 Cell_reselection_offset (for penalty_time= 31) Whilst idle the mobile will maintain a list of the strongest 6 neighbours being monitored from the idle ba list. This will be constantly updated and reselection parameters regularly checked. At least every 5 seconds the MS will calculate C2 for the server and C2 for neighbours, if the C2 for the best neighbour exceeds that of the server for a period of 5 seconds then reselection will take place. If the neighbour is in a different location area then cell_reselection_hysteresis is also considered for the same period. The parameters affecting C2 are broadcast on BCCH system information to an idle mobile and are described below:

cell_reselect_param_ind
This parameter is used by the MS to determine if C2 parameters are being broadcast or not. If set the MS will use the C2 process for reselection, otherwise C1 controls reselection as well as selection. A phase 2 MS is capable of performing the C2 calculation, a phase 1 MS is not.

cell_reselect_offset
An integer code specifies the cell_reselect_offset in dBs. This offset could be either positive or negative depending on the value of penalty_time.

A brief description of C2 would be:


S S For reselection to take place within a location area. C2 (server)<C2 (neighbour) for penalty_time For reselection to take place to another location area. C2 (server)<C2 (neighbour) for penalty_time (note: C1 calculation for the neighbour will still take cell_reselect_hysterisis into account)

226

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Idle Mobile Behaviour

Cell Reselection C2 C2 Version 1 C2=C1+cell_reselection_offset-Temporary_offset x H (for penalty_time database value 0-30) H H = 0 for (penalty_time -T)<0 = 1 for (penalty_time -T)>0

C2 Version 2 C2 = C1 - cell_reselection_offset (for penalty_time= 31) Parameters


S cell_reselect_param_ind= <*> * 1 - C2 parameters broadcasted 0 - C2 parameters not broadcasted

S cell_reselect_offset= <*> * integer code for dB offset 0= 0dB 1= 2dB 2= 4dB . . . . 63= 126dB
EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems 227

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Idle Mobile Behaviour

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Cell reselection C2
Temporary_offset
This negative temporary_offset is imposed only for the duration of the penalty time, then it is disregarded.

Penalty_time
Penalty_time is the duration for which the negative temporary_offset is considered, and is compared with Time T in the algorithm. Time T is the length of time the MS has maintained the neighbour in its top six measured cells. If penalty_time is set to 31 the temporary_offset is ignored and the cell_reselect_offset becomes constantly negative.

cell_bar_qualify
cell_bar_qualify is used only in cell selection to prioritise a cell as being normal or low priority. The MS will always select cells with normal priority providing their C1 calculation is greater than zero. Only if a normal priority cell cannot be found will a low priority cell (providing C1 > 0) be selected. This is a phase 2 mobile function.

228

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Idle Mobile Behaviour

Cell Reselection C2 Parameters . . .


S Temporary_offset= <*> * integer code for 10's of dBs offset 0= 0dB 1= 10dB 2= 20dB 3= 30dB . . . 7= infinity

S Penalty_time= <*> * integer code for 20 sec periods 0= 20 sec 1= 40 sec . . . 30= 620 sec 31= Temporary_offset ignored, cell_reselect_offset is negative

Note: C2 is a phase 2 mobile function.

S cell_bar_qualify= <*> 0 - Normal 1 - Low

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

229

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Idle Mobile Behaviour

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Selective cell-bar on microcells


An alternative approach is to selectively cell-bar the microcells. This means that mobiles in idle mode may only camp on the macrocells. Origination would occur on the macrocell, followed by hand-down to the microcell if appropriate. This approach, however, has the disadvantage that any extra geographical coverage which barred microcells offer over and above that of the macrocells would be lost as far as originations were concerned. This situation could be alleviated to some extent by not barring indoor and pedestrian area microcells or areas of macrocell deep fade. Selective_cell_bar is set in add_cell and is set by the prompt cell_bar_access_switch. cell_bar_access_switch= 0 cell is not externally barred no mobile originations are rejected cell_bar_access_switch= 1 cell is externally barred no mobile originations are rejected If the cell is EXTERNALLY barred, no mobile originations will be rejected. This allows for test mobiles to access the system as well as phase 2 mobiles (when the cell_bar_qualify flag is being broadcast as a 1 in the System Information Messages). Note: only phase 2 mobiles can read the cell_bar_qualify flag. If a cell is INTERNALLY barred, all mobile originations will be rejected regardless.

230

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Idle Mobile Behaviour

Selective CellBar

Can cause: S Mobiles in idle mode only camp onto macrocells rather than barred microcells.

But: S Any extra geographical coverage areas offered by the barred microcells is lost as far as originations were concerned.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

231

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Effects of Broadcasting Separate BA Lists

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Effects of Broadcasting Separate BA Lists


Broadcasting separate BA lists
The separate BA lists feature allows the operator to select neighbours to be included in the BCCH allocation on the SACCH and the BCCH. Currently, there is only one BA list maintained at the BSS. However, with the microcellular purchasable option the BSS shall maintain two separate lists: S BA BCCH: This list is the BA sent in the System Information Message Type 2 on the BCCH. It is the list of BCCH frequencies in use by a PLMN in a given geographical area. It is used by the MS in cell selection and re-selection. BA SACCH: This list is the BA sent in the System Information Message Type 5 on the SACCH. It indicates to the MS which BCCH frequencies are to be monitored for handover purposes.

By maintaining two distinct BA lists, the operator is given the flexibility to vary the frequencies the MS monitors in idle mode independant of the frequencies the MS monitors as potential neighbours in active mode.

Method 1: (see table opposite)


With this arrangement, there is no restriction on handovers, they can occur macromacro, macromicro, micromacro, and micromicro. However, when a mobile which is camped on a microcell moves out of this cell, it can only reselect a macrocell since this is all there is in its BA(BCCH) list.

Method 2: (see table opposite)


Method 2 is similar to method 1 except that the microcells are removed from the macrocell BA(BCCH), resulting in there being no reselection mechanism to return to the microcells once the macro layer is entered. This would place a large amount of idle mode traffic on the macrolayer. This traffic would place call originations on the macrolayer and hand down to the microlayer would then follow where appropriate.

232

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Effects of Broadcasting Separate BA Lists

Broadcasting Separate BA Lists

Examples Method 1:
Method 1 entails broadcasting the following candidates; SUMMARY OF BA BROADCASTS FOR METHOD 1 Broadcast Microcell BA(BCCH) Microcell BA(SACCH) Macrocell BA(BCCH) Macrocell BA(SACCH) Broadcast candidates listed Overlying macrocell Overlying macrocell Neighbour microcells Neighbour macrocells Underlying microcells Neighbour macrocells Underlying microcells

Method 2:
Method 2 entails broadcasting the following candidates; SUMMARY OF BA BROADCASTS FOR METHOD 2 Broadcast Microcell BA(BCCH) Microcell BA(SACCH) Macrocell BA(BCCH) Macrocell BA(SACCH) Broadcast candidates Overlying macrocell Overlying macrocell Neighbour microcells Neighbour macrocells Neighbour macrocells Underlying microcells

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

233

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Effects of Broadcasting Separate BA Lists

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

C2 reselection exercise
The parameters and levels specified on the facing page are typical values experienced by a mobile in the reselection process. Use these values to determine whether the mobile will reselect to the neighbour cell. The mobile has been in the server well over one hour, and the best neighbour has been in the top six measured cells for exactly 4 minutes.

WORKING AREA SERVING (working out C1 first)


A= A= B= B= C1= C2= Rxlev Av = P1= rxlev_access_min= dBm (P2=ms_txpwr_max_cch= dBm) dBm dBm dBm dBm)

P2 - Max RF Power of MS + = = =

NEIGHBOUR
A= A= B= B= C1= C2= + Rxlev Av P1 = (P1= rxlev_access_min= dBm (P2=ms_txpwr_max_cch= dBm dBm dBm dBm) dBm)

P2 Max RF Power of MS = = =

FOR RESELECTION C2 (server) < C2 (neighbour) - cell_reselect_hysteresis

234

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Effects of Broadcasting Separate BA Lists

C2 Reselection Example
S SERVING CELL DATABASE PARAMETERS CELL IDENTITY= rxlev_access_min= ms_txpwr_max_cch= cell_reselect_param_ind= cell_reselect_offset= Temporary_offset= Penalty_time= 234 10 255 038 20 ( 90dB) 5 (33db) 1 3 3 5

S BEST NEIGHBOUR CELL DATABASE PARAMETERS CELL IDENTITY= rxlev_access_min= ms_txpwr_max_cch= cell_reselect_param_ind= cell_reselect_offset= Temporary_offset= Penalty_time= S Rxlev Average Serving= -70 dBm Best Neighbour= -63 dBm S Cell_reselect_hysteresis= 2 S Mobile power class= 2 (8w [ 39 dBm) 234 10 262 042 20 1 1 2 1 12

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

235

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Exercise

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Exercise
If it was decided that we would like the mobile just to camp on to the macro layer in idle mode, and not on the micro cell layer (handovers to take place between layers) how would we set up the neighbour list in the micro and macro serving cells? For the in-building solution we want the mobiles to reselect to the pico cell in the lobby from the micro when entering the building, but once in the building, we do not want to reselect back to the micro. How would we set the neighbour list for the pico cells and micro cells? We do not want to handover to pico cells from the micro and from the pico cells to the micro cells.

236

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Exercise

MACRO

PICO Cell 6

PICO Cell 5

MICRO Cell 2

PICO Cell 4

PICO Cell 3

TO CAMP ON CELL 1 MACRO IN IDLE MODE MACROCELL 1 BA list BCCH MICROCELL 2

SACCH

BCCH

SACCH

IDLE PICO IN LOBBY CELL 3 BA List BCCH

SACCH

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

237

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Hotspots

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Hotspots
Detection of Hotspot cells
One method used to detect hotspots is simply to place a test transmitter in a candidate Hotspot location and transmit a dummy BCCH which is cell barred. The dummy BCCH is transmitted on a clean frequency for which the signal strength in the candidate test area is otherwise below some threshold value. The BSIC/frequency of this dummy BCCH is added to the BA(SACCH) list of the macrocell for which the Hotspot is intended to relieve. The measurement reports of mobiles operating on such a macrocell are analysed to see how strongly they are reporting the dummy BCCH. For a given level reported by the mobile, and given hysteresis values, an assessment can be made of whether the mobile would have handed over to the Hotspot cell, had it been a real cell in the neighbour list of the macrocell. After analysis and assessment, an estimate can be made as to how much of the mobile population in idle mode would have camped on the Hotspot cell, had it not been barred. The attraction of using the Hotspot detector is that separate coverage checks to guarantee traffic are not necessary, the traffic is guaranteed by the very nature of the Hotspot detector technique. Of course coverage checks may still be required to verify that interference does not arise.

238

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Hotspots

Detection of Hotspot Cells BSC MSC

Macrocell

BTS
PC LOG FILE"

BTS

Dummy BCCH

Area of high traffic

Dummy BCCH at a constant power level. Its level is reported to the current BTS.
EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems 239

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Hotspots

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Identification of potential macro/microcell frequency reuse by measurement (Hotspots)


Planning tools currently exist in which there is enough confidence to predict interference levels between adjacent microcells. However there are difficulties involved in predicting interference between microcells and macrocells with existing planning tools. The only reliable method to quantify the interference experienced with a given frequency plan in which micro/macro reuse exists, (e.g. at the edge of the microcell coverage area), is by measurement. Even if a first pass frequency plan involving micro/macrocell reuse is created using a planning tool, it is highly recommended that measurements are made to back up the predictions. A key factor in predicting the effects of micro/macro interference is the correlation between shadowing of the wanted and interfering signals. In order to assess this, measurement of the interfering macrocell signal should be made in the service area of the microcell in question. In order to be effective, these measurements must average the signal strength on a scale: 1. 2. Large enough to average out the fast fading effects Small enough to exhibit the shadowing effects

Having collected this data together with position information, it can be overlaid onto the microcell predictions and the difference (carrier to interference) calculated and plotted. Care must be taken to ensure that the microcell prediction is carried out to the same level of signal averaging. For example, if a ray tracer tool is used to produce the prediction, the signal should also be averaged to remove the fast fading component. This data allows a prediction of the area distribution of C/I, which can then be compared with the target quality of service criteria. The hotspot detector allows identification of the following hotspot cell site attributes (as employed by the test transmitter); S S S S S Antenna location Antenna height Antenna bore angle Antenna gain pattern Radiated power

The next step in implementing the hotspot cell is to identify a frequency (or frequencies) for use in the cell. This will usually be a difficult process, since the hotspot cell is usually needed where there is already a high capacity system in place, with small cells and very high frequency reuse.

N.B. For more information see Appendix C.

240

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Hotspots

Identification of Potential Macro/Microcell Frequency Reuse by Measurement (Hotspots)


1. Large enough to average out the fast fading effects.

dB

Measurement at these two points would give a low average

Deep fade

Dist

2. Small enough to exhibit the shadowing effects.

-10db

-16db

-5db
 40l

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

241

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

In-building Coverage

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

In-building Coverage
In-building coverage which comes from macrocells and externally mounted microcells is difficult to predict. This is because the main propagation paths into the building from an antenna mounted at some external location depends very much on the particular relationship between the antenna and the building. The diagram opposite demonstrates this. The in-building penetration for the case of normal incidence (a) is expected to be significantly better than for the case where the angle of incidence is shallow (b). Improved in-building coverage arising from on-street microcells is likely to be fairly irregular, with most of the improvement in the immediate neighbourhood of the microcell antennas themselves. The situation is complicated by the dependence of in-building penetration on the composition and structure of the building.

Propagation from outside to inside


S S S Cells deployed within streets external to the buildings being covered. Coverage provided both on-street and, where possible, in-building. Cell capacity dependent on expected subscriber usage in cell area and frequency spectrum restrictions. In-building coverage dependent on building penetration requirement (directly affects Tx power and Rx sensitivity requirements).

242

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

In-building Coverage

In-building Coverage from External Cell

Affected building

Rx/Tx path

ROADWAY

Antenna position (a) Normal incidence of Rx/Tx path significantly better than (B)

Affected building

Rx/Tx path

ROADWAY

Antenna position (b) Shallow incidence of Rx/Tx path

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

243

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

In-building Coverage

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

In-building coverage using internal mounted microcells / picocells


To guarantee coverage within a particular building, there may be no alternative but to provide a specific cell for coverage in this building alone, or to extend a local cells coverage into the building by means of a cell extender (repeater). Such coverage may be achieved by means of either a distributed antenna, or a radiating cable (leaky feeder). These cells are generally referred to as picocells.

244

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

In-building Coverage

In-building Coverage

Propagation from within buildings


S illumination of individual buildings / structures / floors with dedicated carrier equipment. S requires placement of a dedicated cellular infrastructure within the buildings dependant on subscriber demands. S carrier resources are distributed utilising various transmission techniques (i.e. distributed RF, leaky feeder). S control of radiation (coverage/interference) in this environment is critical to successful performance of the network.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

245

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

In-building Coverage

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Distributed antenna
Distributed antenna means a number of antennas all connected to the same BTS by means of bi-directional couplers. No special co-phasing equipment is generally needed for the multiple antennas since the multipath environment ensures that the nulls arising from cancellation of the signals are not noticeable. Note that each stage of splitting by means of a bi-directional coupler introduces 3dB loss into the signal path.

Radiating cable (leaky feeder)


An alternative to distributed antennas is to use radiating cable (leaky feeder). This is feeder cable which is designed to radiate along its length. This concept is illustrated on the opposite page. The design target is to ensure that the cable passes sufficiently close to the intended traffic without making the length so long that there is too high an attenuation between the ends of the cable and the entry point to the base station.

246

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

In-building Coverage

In-building Coverage using Internal Mounted Microcells


Distributed Antenna
Second floor antenna First floor antenna

-3 dB

Splitter

Duplexor

Tx

RCU
Rx

Radiating Cable

in building feeder cable ("leaky feeder")

BTS cabinet (in-building)

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

247

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

In-building Coverage

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcell re-distribution
Consider the case where a building is situated on a street where there is good on-street microcellular coverage, but where the in-building penetration loss is too high to obtain adequate service in the building from the external microcell. There is sufficient spare traffic capacity on the existing microcell to handle the additional in-building traffic, so the expense of a specific in-building cell is not warranted. A cell enhancer may be used, as shown on the opposite page, to extend the microcell coverage into the building The term cell enhancer refers to a bi-directional RF amplifier for use in the GSM band. This is coupled via an antenna to a source cell, not directly connected to the source BTS. The purpose of such a device is to distribute a channel or channels of an existing cell to a new location.

Wideband enhancer
As the name suggests it could take in the whole GSM spectrum if required.

Channelised enhancer
A channelised enhancer selectively amplifies and redistributes specified channels. Channelised operation is more appropriate to microcellular applications as amplification and transmission of channels other than those desired increases the interference levels in the area concerned.

Stability
It is important to ensure that the repeater system does not oscillate or ring, causing serious system degradation. As a guideline to achieving this, the gain should be at least 15dB lower than the isolation between the microcell pick-up antenna, and the microcell re-distribution antenna. This isolation is the difference in dB between the level of a signal input to one of the antennas, and the corresponding signal at the output of the other antenna.

Automatic Gain Control (AGC)


In addition to the minimum signal requirements, the repeaters dynamic range should be sufficient to handle the case where a MS which is fully powered up is operating at the minimum coupling loss to the microcell re-distribution antenna. The response time of the AGC must be understood, normally it will not be possible for the AGC to respond fast enough to work on a per-timeslot basis. In this case, the degradation from gain reduction due to a close-in mobile on limit range must be considered.

248

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

In-building Coverage

Microcell Re-distribution

Cell enhancer Indoor distribution system (antennas & leaky feeder) Microcell pick up antenna

Use of a Microcell Enhancer


Microcell pick up antenna Enhancer Microcell antenna Microcell re distribution antenna Former coverage hole now covered by enhancer

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

249

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Propagation within Buildings

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Propagation within Buildings


At present, planning the RF environment inside a building is difficult from a prediction point of view. No planning tools, as yet, can give an accurate picture as regards reflections, diffractions and absorption of the RF signal. Looking at the known behaviour of GSM 900 and DCS 1800 frequencies, we can make a number of assumptions about probable behaviour of the RF signal. Most buildings of a modern construction have a concrete shell with metal supports built into the walls and floors. We will use this as a model to base our basic look at propagation inside buildings. The RF signal would easily radiate through the partition walls commonly used. The floor would attenuate the signal considerably if it were concrete with steel strengtheners. From these assumptions, perhaps the main propagation route would be through the windows, although this again would depend on building height and the size and type of windows. However, with a reasonable output of power it may be possible to provide coverage on more than one floor. Another consideration is that the signal may propagate through a window or windows and reflect off other buildings back into the building requiring coverage. Any propagation externally from within a building would possibly be a source of Co and adjacent interference to the macro or micro layers. The shorter the wavelength the better the defraction if this is the main source of coverage, however the absorption would be worse. EGSM900 frequencies have a lower penetration loss than DCS1800. DCS1800 has fades that, although closer together, are generally less pronounced.

250

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Propagation within Buildings

Propagation within Buildings

Concrete reinforced with steel

RF signal

All internal walls are of the wood and plasterboard partition type

Large diffraction loss as the signal enters via windows. This could be the main mode of propagating.

S The absorption properties of the concrete floors with steel reinforcement would make it difficult to get coverage through the floor. GSM 900 frequencies would penetrate better than DCS 1800.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

251

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

The In-Building Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The In-Building Solution


Introduction to picocellular
Providing a high level of capacity and coverage inside buildings is a natural progression from the macrocellular wide area coverage, through microcellular coverage of urban environments to the picocellular solution which will provide coverage within buildings. The picocellular infrastructure will provide more cost effective solutions than the traditional BTS infrastructure due to very low output powers, as well as meeting specific environmental conditions. S S S Macrocellular wide area coverage, using your phone in a car. Microcellular coverage of urban environments using a handportable phone. Picocellular enables the concept of cellular everyone everywhere.

252

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The In-Building Solution

Why Pico-Cellular

Capacity and coverage

Macrocells

Microcells

Picocells

Offices

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems


Mobile

Pedestrian and urban

Shopping centres, railway stations etc.

Network maturity

253

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

The In-Building Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

What is picocellular?
Let us compare the picocellular environment with that of the microcellular solution. Within the microcellular area of coverage we had a small cell of less than 500m radius, with the antenna mounted below rooftop. This enabled the RF to be contained within street canyons. This provided additional capacity, as well as efficient reuse of the portion of the frequency spectrum allocated to operators. The picocellular area of coverage is a small cell of less than 100m radius with the antenna mounted inside a building. However, the RF environment is now contained within the building, thereby providing additional capacity as well as a high frequency reuse. Picocellular can be considered as the third layer within a multi-layer network. The picocellular solution provides this functionality of a seamless service within the existing infrastructure by utilising the same phone, same features, as well as the same method of accessing these features in all environments. There must also be the seamless service between the three layers: Layer 1 macrocell Layer 2 microcell Layer 3 picocell as well as the support of the mobile in both the idle and dedicated mode.

254

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The In-Building Solution

The Layered Approach

Macrocell

Microcell

Picocell

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

255

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

The In-Building Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Distributed BTS is a solution which overcomes the problems incurred by extended coax distribution systems. Individual transceivers are mounted in each area that needs to be served and are then connected via existing building cable systems. Each transceiver is connected back to a central controller using twisted pair telephone cable or by computer fibre optic backbones. In addition, the central controller interfaces directly with the existing Motorola BSC and OMC equipment enabling easy integration into existing networks.

256

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The In-Building Solution

What is Picocellular?

RF Units

Twisted Pair or Fibre Interconnect

Cluster Controller E1/T1 MSC BSC

Microcell

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

257

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

The In-Building Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The picocellular solution


See page opposite.

258

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The In-Building Solution

The Picocellular Solution

The picocellular environment can offer the operator the following benefits: S low RF power providing high quality, focused indoor coverage without adversely affecting the surrounding network; S picocells maximise efficient use of the available frequency spectrum enabled by the use of low RF output power. An effective in building system must also provide: S coverage at all locations where people might wish to make or receive a call; S good call quality; S sufficient capacity to support the number of calls to be made; S easy capacity expansion when it is required; S easy installation; S minimal disruption to the external network; S support for differential tariff schemes.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

259

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

The In-Building Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

260

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Chapter 3

Planning of Microcells and Picocells

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

ii

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Chapter 3 Planning of Microcells and Picocells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Planning of Microcells and Picocells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Steps in Planning Microcellular Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identification of requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic Handling in Microcellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensioning of Signalling Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements for Calculating Link Budgets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Link Budgets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Close proximity interworking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum Coupling Loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Factors Effecting Close Proximity Interworking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum Coupling Loss (MCL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Designing without Close Proximity Mobiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EMC Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink Interference to Foreign Mobiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Building Penetration from Externally Mounted Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operation from Tall Buildings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Further Microcell Planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection of cell sites . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microcellular coverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combined Cell Frequency Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning a Combined Cell Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning and Measurement Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Motorola Ray Tracer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of simulation tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Motorola Handsim Simulation Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visualiser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Co-channel and Adjacent Channel Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting a frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use of planning tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning Tools for In-Building . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-building capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Micro/Macro Layer Frequency Separation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handover Scenario for Adjacent Channels (Both BCCH Carriers) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directional antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OMNI antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical Transient Cell Situation at in this Case a Crossroads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

i
31 31 32 32 34 36 38 310 310 312 314 314 316 318 320 322 324 326 326 326 326 328 332 332 334 336 336 338 340 342 342 342 344 344 344 350 352 354 354 356 358

iii

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Installation of Microcell Antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Antenna types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Installation of antennas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

360 360 362 364

iv

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning of Microcells and Picocells

Planning of Microcells and Picocells


Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student will be able to: S S S Calculate a microcell link budget and picocell link budget. Understand the principles of planning microcells and picocells. Understand the use of Motorola planning tools.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

31

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Steps in Planning Microcellular Systems

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Steps in Planning Microcellular Systems


Identification of requirements
The first step in planning a microcellular system is to create a clear specification of the requirements for the final system; these requirements include the following points: S S S S S S S S level of traffic to be handled coverage area specific areas of strategic coverage Enhanced in-building coverage quality of service (RF coverage, RXQUAL, Blocking) indoor coverage requirements frequencies available co-ordination with other operators rate of system growth

32

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Steps in Planning Microcellular Systems

Identification of Requirements

S Level of traffic to be handled S Coverage area S Specific areas of strategic coverage" - Enhanced in building coverage S Quality of service (RF coverage, RXQUAL, blocking) S Indoor coverage requirements S Frequencies available S Co ordination with other operators S Link Budgets S Rate of system growth

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

33

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Traffic Handling in Microcellular

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Traffic Handling in Microcellular


It is of great importance when designing a microcellular system to take into account the way offered traffic is to be handled. With increasing traffic, the behaviour of a multi-layer microcell system is complex, therefore it is important from the outset to be clear about the criteria which must be fulfilled in order to constitute a good system design. Some consideration should be given to the following criteria: S S S S S blocking probability for originations system RF losses (RXQUAL<=4) mean handovers per call location updates per call <= 3% <= 3% >= 98% <= 2 <= 1

The first of these criteria is directly experienced by the user. The last criteria must be met so as to avoid overloading the BSS processing capability. The actual behaviour of the system will depend upon user behaviour, variables such as call distribution, speed distribution, repeat attempts etc. make it difficult to produce a model which incorporates all of these aspects. In order to achieve these criteria, very careful use of the handover algorithms and parameters is required. Careful consideration should also be given to the RF coverage as increasing the cell size will increase the traffic handled and vice versa. It has been found that the frequency plan can affect performance. The handovers per call figure do not show a strong dependence on the number of frequencies. The figures for RXQUAL and RF losses however, improve greatly with the increased numbers of frequencies. It is worth considering how existing customers may be affected when implementing the microcells. The aim is to ensure the quality of service is at least as good as the macrocell.

34

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Traffic Handling in Microcellular

Some consideration should be given to the following criteria:

S Blocking probability for originations S System RF losses S (RXQUAL<=4) S Mean handovers per call S Location updates per call

<= 3% <= 3% >= 98% <= 2 <= 1

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

35

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Dimensioning of Signalling Channels

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Dimensioning of Signalling Channels


Consideration should also be given to the required number of signalling channels necessary to handle the signalling generated by a microcellular system. There are three main elements which must be dimensioned. S S S Paging channels Access grant channels SDCCH channels

In order to do this, it is first necessary to have a prediction of the numbers of the various types of transaction that will require resources, these are: S S S S S Call set-ups SMS set-ups Supplementary Service invocations Location updates Attach/detach

An analysis of the potential traffic can be done by looking at existing Macrocell usage or the use of planning tools (e.g. Hotspot detection software). Once a Microcell is installed optimisation can take place to help get the signalling channel ratios correct. It is wise to plan for any future expansion at this stage to ensure that the quality of service is not affected by sudden traffic growth in an area.

36

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Dimensioning of Signalling Channels

Dimensioning of Signalling Channels

There are three main elements which must be dimensioned:

S Paging Channels S Access Grant Channels S SDCCH Channels

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

37

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Requirements for Calculating Link Budgets

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Requirements for Calculating Link Budgets


When calculating link budgets for Microcells you require the information shown opposite. Most of the information would come from the manufacturers specifications, or be calculated for each Microcell separately.

38

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Requirements for Calculating Link Budgets

Requirements for Calculating Link Budgets

Inputs include: S Class's of mobile for which coverage is to be provided S Top of rack power - user variable S Duplexor loss - manufacturer specification S Feeder loss - manufacturer specification S BTS antenna gain - manufacturer specification S In building penetration loss measured S MS Antenna gain/body loss manufacturer specifications S MCL (RF close proximity interworking recovery) - calculated or measured

GSM 900 Typical Values

CLASS 4

1.2 W -1dB

-3dB

5dBi -25dB -3dB

-65dB

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

39

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Link Budgets

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Link Budgets
There are two types of Microcell link budget, those with close proximity interworking and those without close proximity interworking.

Close proximity interworking


Close proximity interworking refers to the particular problems that occur in microcells due to the fact that subscriber units on foreign systems can operate very close to the microcell antenna. They are potentially susceptible to the wideband noise that can be generated by the microcell BTS, and conversely the wideband noise generated by these subscriber units can interface with weak signals from mobiles operating on the microcell. Whether or not close proximity interworking should be included in the design is really a decision of the operator. As we will see, close proximity interworking requires the inclusion of a margin, which restricts the coverage of the microcell. There is therefore a whole spectrum of possibilities, depending on how much margin is introduced.

310

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Link Budgets

Close Proximity Interworking S A specific problem with microcells that may not occur to such a high degree in macrocell systems: Uplink problem: S Foreign mobile close to microcell antenna operating on high power level generates wideband noise/modulation spectrum S Subscriber unit on microcell system at limit range S If C/I" is inadequate, microcell call may be dropped Downlink problem: S Microcell BTS generates modulation spectrum wideband noise and

S Subscriber unit on foreign macrocell system at limit range S If C/I" is inadequate, macrocell call may be dropped

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

311

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Minimum Coupling Loss

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Minimum Coupling Loss


When a user gets close to the antenna, the RF path loss becomes quite small. The minimum that we would expect for an average user is defined as the minimum coupling loss. Motorola define the Minimum Coupling Loss as being the smallest path loss (including the gains of the BTS and mobile antenna) between the antenna and the nearest point where a mobile can be reasonably expected to operate. The point at which MCL is experienced will depend upon various parameters antenna height, gain, etc. The foreign mobile will generate modulation spectrum and wideband noise, which may fall within the receive band of the BTS. This foreign signal behaves as interference and the MCL point is the worst point for this to happen, since this foreign signal will be the strongest there.

312

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Minimum Coupling Loss

Minimum Coupling Loss

100m User A User B

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

313

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Factors Effecting Close Proximity Interworking

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Factors Effecting Close Proximity Interworking


The factors to be taken into account when planning microcells with respect to close proximity interworking are shown opposite. The main factor is the minimum coupling loss, this is a major consideration when siting an antenna. Also frequency separation between microcell and foreign systems is important. The greater the frequency separation the better.

Minimum Coupling Loss (MCL)


Motorola define the minimum coupling loss as the path loss (including the gains of the microcell and mobile antennas) between the antenna and the nearest realistic point where a mobile can be reasonably expected to operate.

314

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Factors Effecting Close Proximity Interworking

Close Proximity Interworking

Effects depend on: S Minimum Coupling Loss (MCL) S Modulation spectrum of the foreign subscriber unit S Modulation spectrum of the micro BTS S Frequency separation between the microcell and foreign systems S RF Planning - path loss to the microcell subscriber at limit of its range S Power control level of the foreign subscriber unit

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

315

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Designing without Close Proximity Mobiles

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Designing without Close Proximity Mobiles


Opposite is an example of an uplink and downlink budget for a system without close proximity interworking. Throughout these link budgets we refer to a wanted subscriber unit and a foreign subscriber unit. The wanted subscriber unit is a unit on the microcell system being designed. The foreign subscriber unit is a subscriber unit on another system, or your own system, but on another cell operating in the same area. It is assumed that 2W handportables must be served.

316

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Designing without Close Proximity Mobiles

Example uplink budget without close proximity mobiles


Wanted subs. unit Tx power MS Antenna gain/body loss BTS antenna gain BTS feeder loss Duplexor/cable loss Allowed path loss for -104dBm on BTS side" of duplexor Path loss, allowing 7dB margin above sensitivity, i.e. -97 dBm -128dB 33dBm -3dB 5dBi -3dB -1dB -135dB

Example downlink" budget without close proximity mobiles


To balance the links, the following downlink budget is adopted: BTS Tx power at DRCU Combiner loss Duplex/cable loss BTS feeder loss BTS antenna gain MS antenna gain/body loss Path loss for -102 dBm at mobile Path loss, allowing 7 dB margin above sensitivity i.e. -95dBm 38dBm -3dB -1dB -3dB 5dB -3 dB -135 dB -128dB

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

317

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

EMC Considerations

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

EMC Considerations
Microcell antennas may need to operate close to domestic equipment, which makes the equipment more susceptible to electromagnetic disturbances than would be the case with macrocell antennas. This creates a problem when deciding EIRP values for inclusion in the design parameters; therefore antenna siting and EIRP levels are more critical. There are various standards covering the immunity of equipment to EMC disturbances, which came into effect within Europe on the 1st January 1996. However, there is no guarantee that existing equipment manufactured prior to this date will respect these standards. Equipment suffering from EMC disturbances could have serious consequences for the operator. For example, antennas mounted near an external burglar alarm could cause triggering of the alarm. It would be reasonable to presume that the EIRP would be restricited to around 33dBm or less in some cases. EIRP = Effective Isotropic Radiated Power.

318

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

EMC Considerations

EMC Considerations

Alarms

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

319

Downlink Interference to Foreign Mobiles

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Downlink Interference to Foreign Mobiles


Having chosen the basic system parameters, the question arises as to whether the microcell BTS causes interference to foreign mobiles operating at the MCL from the microcell antenna. The analysis is as follows (for a setup giving 33dBm EIRP): BTS Tx power at DRCU Relative power in foreign receive band * Combiner loss Duplexor/cable loss BTS feeder loss BTS antenna gain MCL MS antenna gain/body loss Power in foreign MS receive band 36dBm 75dB 3dB 1dB 4dB 5dBi 65dB 3dB 110dBm

* This value depends on the power level used by the BTS. The figure quoted here is the figure observed in type approval testing for 600kHz offset. It was measured with the BTS at minimum power and is therefore the worst case. The foreign mobile should receive a downlink signal from its own base station significantly greater than 110dBm since it is unlikely to be operating at minimum power in a city. Therefore downlink interference from the microcell should not affect it, even for a frequency offset as low as 600kHz. The decision as to whether or not close proximity interworking should be taken into account is the choice of the operator. The question rests on the probability of interference to/from a foreign mobile, this depends on a number of factors: S S S Minimum coupling loss Frequency offset from foreign mobile Probability of the foreign mobile being close-in and using coincident timeslot with wanted mobile at large path loss

Taking all these factors into account, the probability of interference is quite low; in this case it is not worth constraining the allowed path loss by 10dB.

320

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Downlink Interference to Foreign Mobiles

Downlink Interference to Foreign Mobiles

BCCH"

BTS NETWORK A

BCCH"

BTS NETWORK B

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

321

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Building Penetration from Externally Mounted Cells

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Building Penetration from Externally Mounted Cells


Having gone through the preceding process, the result is a figure for the total allowed path loss in the cells design. For a cell with an outdoor-mounted antenna, this total path loss defines the limit of possible coverage, including building penetration losses and on-street path loss. This means that as the distance from the antenna increases, the depth of penetration into buildings should reduce. However there may be situations where a building at greater distance has better indoor coverage (e.g. due to the fact that the angle of incidence to the building is more favourable for better penetration). The level of penetration into a building depends on many factors for example building material, number of windows, angle of incidence, and internal structure. For buildings of a type typical in Europe, (36 floors, thick stone walls, cellars), it is very difficult to guarantee 100% coverage within a building from outdoor cells. If there are so called strategic buildings where full coverage is required, the most realistic solution is to plan a cell with an indoor antenna (or multiple antennas). The full link budget is then available for propagation within the building.

322

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Building Penetration from Externally Mounted Cells

Building Penetration from Externally Mounted Cells

BTS

Bad In building Penetration

Good In building Coverage

Excellent In building Coverage

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

323

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Operation from Tall Buildings

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Operation from Tall Buildings


A problem sometimes occurs with the uplink operation of microcellular systems when mobiles are operating from the upper floors of tall buildings. Consider the case as shown opposite, where a MS is being served by a nearby street level microcell. The MS is operating in a building which is higher than the typical surrounding buildings. The downlink signal from the nearby microcell antenna is the best server so the MS camps on the cell and makes calls via that cell. The problem is that due to the building height, the uplink signal is now no longer constrained by the street canyons, and the signal will radiate uncontrollably, potentially causing uplink interference. The severity of such a problem depends on the mobiles proximity to windows in the building, and on the required power level. Potential solutions to this problem are; 1. 2. Design the system so that in the upper floors of such typically high buildings the macrocell will be the best server. Set the power control window, so that mobiles camped on a microcell in this situation operate at lower power levels, (provided no other detrimental effects are experienced). Introduce special in-building coverage in the upper floors, so that the mobile can operate on a special cell within the building, at lower power.

3.

324

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Operation from Tall Buildings

Operation from Tall Buildings

MS operating within tall building

Serving microcell at street level on a typical building

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

325

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Further Microcell Planning

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Further Microcell Planning


Selection of cell sites
Having set up the link budgets, the planning tool can now be used to come up with a first pass set of antenna locations, heights, types, azimuth alignments, and EIRPs, which give the required on-street coverage. Special in-building cells must be planned empirically as in-building prediction tools are not as yet sufficiently accurate or easy to use. We could use the hotspot detector to come up with first pass cell site locations.

Microcellular coverage
The two layer architecture gives the possibility of implementing a non-ubiquitous cellular coverage. Traffic not falling within the microcellular areas is handled by the macrocells. There is a trade-off between the macrocell capacity and the cost of implementing more microcell sites.

Frequency planning
Having identified a set of cell sites and antenna parameters which give the required level of microcellular coverage, frequencies are now assigned and the level of interference checked. When running the planning tool, an attempt should be made to obtain a plan for which the carrier to co-channel interference ratio (C/I), is better than 15dB overall; this gives a margin for protection against the effects of fading and shadowing.

326

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Further Microcell Planning

Further Microcell Planning

Once link budgets have been calculated the planning tool can help with:

S Identification of cell sites S Microcellular Coverage S Frequency Planning

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

327

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Combined Cell Frequency Allocation

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Combined Cell Frequency Allocation


When planning frequency allocations in a combined cell architecture, it is best that the frequencies deployed in the microcells are separate from those in the macro layer. This reduces the co channel and adjacent channel interference problems encountered with the macrolayer. This is not however a rule and with careful planning the use of macrocell frequencies in the microcell layer can be accomplished.

328

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Combined Cell Frequency Allocation

Combined Cell Frequency Allocation Macrocell 4 x 3 re use minimum of 2 carriers per microcell group
329

D3

12

24

11

C3

23

10

22

B3

A3

21

D2

20

C2

25

B2

18

19

12

17

25

A2

D1

16

12

MACRO RE USE

MICRO RE USE

C1

15

29

B1

14

27

13

A1

25

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

10

10

24

30

24

30

28

17

18

19

20

Combined Cell Frequency Allocation

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

This diagram shows a combination of macrocell frequency re-use in the microlayer as well as separately allocated microcell frequencies.

330

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Combined Cell Frequency Allocation

Combined Cell Frequency Allocation

A1
25 8 27

B1
10

30

A2
5 25

A3
17

B2
12 24 6

B3
18

10

C1

29

24

D1
12

C2
30 25 19

C3
7

D2
28

1 20

D3
8

Microcells

Note: This is a very simple representation of designed as a base example

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

331

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Planning a Combined Cell Network

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning a Combined Cell Network


Network capacity
When calculating the network traffic capacity it is best to calculate an Erlangs/Km2 figure for each of your macrocell sites. This figure should then be added to the Erlangs/Km2 figure for the microcells contained within that site. This gives you a total Erlangs/Km2 figure for each macro/microcell coverage area. This is only an example and the figures tend towards the most optimistic view of potential microcellular. Directed Retry will give the system more flexibility when allocating a TFC to a MS in call setup (i.e. the system could allocate a macro or micro TFC depending on availability). This diagram shows that by taking carriers from the macrolayer to use in the microcell layer, it can be clearly seen that there is a definite traffic capacity increase even though the macrocell capacity is reduced.

Note: In the diagram opposite the Erlang figures are based on 2% blocking. Each microcell/macrocell using 1 combined CCCH multiframe.

332

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning a Combined Cell Network

Planning a Combined Cell Network Network Capacity

Macrocell Network 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

S 4 site, 3 cell re use pattern S all cells 2 2 2 prior to planning S each 2 2 2 has an area of 1km2 S each 2 2 2 has 26.49 Erlangs per site capacity (typical macrocell)
Total 26.49 Erlangs/km2 in one macro site area

Combined Cell Network 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2

60 microcells per 1-1-1 macro site (microcells have 1 carrier)

S each microcell has 2.8767 erlangs capacity S each 1 1 1 macrocell provides 8.6301 Erlangs capacity S each 20 microcells provide 57.534 Erlangs
Total 181.232 Erlangs/km2 in one macro site area

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

333

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Planning and Measurement Tools

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning and Measurement Tools


The planning of microcells can be aided greatly by the use of planning tools. These planning tools should be able to predict the radio path performance in two key microcellular areas: S S Planning in dense urban environments Planning for in-building coverage

There are several planing and measurement tools available. The two that Motorola use for the planning of microcells are: S S S The Motorola Ray Tracer The Motorola handsim. Simulation Tool The Visualiser

Both tools have been developed by Motorola specifically for use in microcellular systems.

334

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning and Measurement Tools

Planning and Measurement Tools

S The Motorola Ray Tracer S The Motorola Handsim - Simulation Tool S The Visualiser S The Planner

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

335

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

The Motorola Ray Tracer

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The Motorola Ray Tracer


Ray tracing is basically an angular scan performed from the base station through 360 degrees, using a number of regularly spaced rays which are projected outwards. The number of rays used is typically one per degree, but this may be varied depending upon the required resolution of the prediction. The projected ray strikes building obstacles within the street canyon and are reflected, diffracted, and possibly attenuated through the buildings. In a complex urban environment the number of reflected rays can reach a high number which have to be traced and predicted by the tool to determine their level when they reach the receiver. A physical model for propagation in macrocells is generally beyond the capability of prediction tools and therefore prediction is carried out empirically. However, accurate and deterministic modelling is possible for microcells. Motorola has researched a number of computer simulated microcell prediction tools, and has developed a ray tracing tool. This tool promises greater accuracy in outdoor microcellular applications than that of the empirical models offered by other vendors. The Ray tracing tool is a flexible planning tool allowing the planner to cover any possibilities.

Types of simulation tool


The three types of simulation listed opposite can provide the following performance analysis: S S S S S S S co-channel interference delay spread average power at a given point Instant power

The following inputs can be entered to achieve the desired level of simulated projection: INPUT DATA: Add a map area and building information. RF INPUT DATA: Antenna types and locations are entered. PROPAGATION PARAMETERS: Set number of reflections and diffractions per ray.

336

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The Motorola Ray Tracer

The Motorola Ray Tracer

Methods of Simulation:
S Grid Simulation: Computes average power in a grid area.

S Route Simulation: Computes coverage over a set route. S Point Simulation: Indications of performance analysis at a set point of co ordinates

Performance Analysis:
S Co channel interference S Delay spread S Average power at a given point S Instant power

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

337

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

The Motorola Handsim Simulation Tool

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The Motorola Handsim Simulation Tool


The HANDSIM simulation tool allows the user to predict how a system will perform from a call quality perspective based on propagation data calulated by ray tracer. The tool has the capability of modelling generic or customer specific cellular systems. HANDSIM is a simulation tool that enables system configurations to be modelled with digital cellular traffic. The traffic is allowed to traverse the system either in random directions or confined to a predefined frequency plan. As the mobiles move they are permitted to handover from one cell to another using the microcellular algorithms. This means that HANDSIM consists of models for propagation, fading and interference to estimate the signal level, BER and FER at each measurement reporting interval to supply the handover algorithms with appropriate information to make handover decisions. Through system simulation the operator can devise optimum parameters for handover algorithms, and thus enhance network performance. When running a complete network simulation, HANDSIM reads five input files which contain the operator defined simulation control, simulation exclusion, fading profile, pathloss overlays, and cell/handover configuration data; these five files characterise the simulation to be undertaken and detail parameters such as; S S S S S S length of simulation (can be run in real time) street map definition pathloss type feature activation cell configuration, location, and frequency definition of lognormal fading

338

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The Motorola Handsim Simulation Tool

Major Advantage of Handsim

A major advantage of the HANDSIM tool is its ability to graphically represent a number of diverse system performance analyses and statistical data such as the following; S traffic statistics S C/I C/N cumulative distributions S scatter plots per handover type/dropped call S trouble recognition statistics S trace files S call distribution The professional visualisation of the data generated allows the operator to assess the network's performance and to visually quantify dropped calls, locate traffic hotspots, and simulate changes to the handover algorithm.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

339

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Visualiser

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Visualiser
The planning tool takes as many microcells the system may have, analyses the TEMS scan files available per location and using the TEMS.CE2 file implemented when the measurements were collected identifies which stations were interfering and the level associated with each one. After this it takes the frequency planning to be implemented when the frequencies chosen are to be deployed and for each cell two files are generated. One containing all the cells identified to help in the neighbour definition, and a second one with all frequencies available in your spectrum ordered from best to worse. This planning tool will allow time to be saved when bringing new cells into service.

340

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Visualiser

Automatic Frequency Selector

TEMS files

Scan files

Freq. plan

AFS PlanningTool

Neighbour Candidates

Frequency Ordering

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

341

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Co-channel and Adjacent Channel Interference

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Co-channel and Adjacent Channel Interference


Having identified the antenna location, gain pattern, EIRP etc for the desired microcell coverage, the next problem is to identify a frequency (or frequencies) for use in the cell. This problem is particularly difficult in systems where there is already a dense macrocell coverage in the area (which is precisely the type of system where microcells may be required).

Selecting a frequency
The problem is to find a frequency (frequencies) which will not cause interference to, or experience interference from, any macrocell in the area. Both co-channel and adjacent channel interference must be considered. Ideally one would use a planning tool to check the interference levels within the serving area of the microcell, and the interference from the microcell in the serving area of the relevant macrocells. However, this requires a planning tool which treats the micro and macrocells on the same basis and is therefore able to generate C/I and C/A predictions between microcells and macrocells.

Use of planning tools


Currently, a typical macrocell prediction tool operates on a statistical basis and predicts a median signal strength. This is a large scale average, in which the effects of lognormal shadowing have been averaged out. Useful microcell planning tools operate on a different basis, they too predict a signal strength which is an average value, but this value is averaged over much smaller dimensions. This is necessary to predict the effects which are vitally important at a microcellular level particularly building shadowing. Therefore the microcellular planning tool is predicting effects which are averaged out in the macrocellular tools, and in this sense it is operating on a different basis, therefore care must be taken in calculating interference between the layers.

C/I Carrier/Co-channel Interface C/A Carrier/Adjacent Channel Interface

342

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Co-channel and Adjacent Channel Interference

Co-channel and Adjacent Channel Interference

Microcell Frequency Identification S Frequencies must not cause or experience interference to/from macrocells S Requires a planning tool which will treat the macro and microcell on the same basis

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

343

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Planning Tools for In-Building

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning Tools for In-Building


Planner
Planner is a simple to use tool that allows an individual to evaluate the number of RF units required for an in-building system. To get the best estimate from this program the operator will need a good knowledge of both the building and the occupants. It is still possible to use it with limited data, but the risks of getting inconclusive data are somewhat increased.

In-building capacity
To determine the amount of carrier equipment required to provide an adequate capacity solution, the amount of traffic channels to be supported must be known. For this to be determined, we need to have the following information: S S S S S Subscriber density Subscriber distribution Grade of service required Erlangs per subscriber Erlang B Tables

However, it is important to note that the calculation does not take into account the quantity of control channels needed to support the subscribers contained within the environment.

Capacity planning tool


Motorola have developed a planning tool to assist the operator in: S S S Calculating the traffic requirements Calculating the cell size Indicating how many RF units are required, as well as which kind of system best suits the operators application and scenario.

344

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning Tools for In-Building

The Traffic Calculator

Traffic Calculator Traffic 500 25 70 7 Number of people % penetration Traffic per person (mE) Total Traffic (E) Blocking Probability 0.01% 0.1% 1% 2%

Number of radios 3 1 carrier cell 2 carrier cells 3 carrier cells Total available traffic (E)

OK

Cancel

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

345

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Planning Tools for In-Building

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

346

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning Tools for In-Building

Cell Size Calculator

Cell Size Calculator

12

Output Power at antenna (dBm)

0.44 2 3

Clutter Loss (DB/m) dB per wall with Fading Margin (dB) Calculate 0 Walls

102

Min. In Building Power level (dBm)

92 26594

Cell Radius (m) Cell Area (sq. m) OK

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

347

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Planning Tools for In-Building

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

348

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning Tools for In-Building

The Answer

The Answer

Heads required for capacity Heads required for coverage

3 0

Comments: You have a capacity limited system. Look at co-locating head units to get some trunking efficiency from a multicarrier solution.

OK

Cancel

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

349

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Micro/Macro Layer Frequency Separation

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Micro/Macro Layer Frequency Separation


This illustration was carried out for just one point, Q. There will be areas of the cell where an analysis like that above shows that it is theoretically possible to reuse macrocell frequencies. However, it must be emphasised that this is a theoretical analysis using; S S S perfect grid locations identical antenna heights homogenous propagation

These factors all add to the variability in the overall picture, and mitigate against the general re-use of macrocell frequencies in the microcells. There may be some cases where it can be confirmed, by means of the propagation tool or by measurement, that the signal strength from a macrocell (e.g. cell C) is sufficiently low at a microcell location so as not to cause interference. In this case the frequency could be re-used in a microcell. However, this is only likely to hold true for isolated microcells. Therefore the following recommendations are adopted;

It is preferred that microcell and macrocell layers should use distinct frequency bands. Occasional reuse of a macrocell frequency in the microcell layer may be possible, but this should be confirmed by empirical tests on the system in question.
The next possibility to consider is the case where the macrocell frequency allocations are immediately adjacent to each other. For example, if the microcell frequencies are 13 18, then there is an adjacent channel problem. This will occur in the macrocell employing channel 12. A mobile operating on a microcell on channel 13 may not be able to decode the BSIC of the macrocell due to the difference in signal strength exceeding the adjacent channel protection ratio. Thus the macrocell would not appear as a handover candidate and the inter-layer handover would not occur. Conversely a mobile on the macrocell would see the microcell as an adjacent channel interferer when it was in the coverage area of this microcell. This could lead to dropped calls. Leaving one guard channel between the micro and macro allocations alleviates this problem considerably, as the adjacent channel protection ratio is now 41dB. This means that the macrocell BSIC can be read over most of the coverage area of the microcell and conversely the area of a microcell over which a mobile on the macrocell will suffer interference is greatly reduced. This motivates the second recommendation;

At least one guard channel should be maintained between the frequencies in use in a macrocell and the frequencies in use in the microcells underlying that macrocell.
In cases where limited spectrum availability means that a guard channel is not possible, it may be possible to invoke violations of the first recommendation to make the frequency plan work. In the previous example where the microcell frequency groups are 13 18, interference problems were experienced in the macrocell using channel 12. It may be possible to engineer the microcell planning so that microcells which would have used channel 13 use another channel (e.g. channel 10) instead. It is emphasised that that these macro/micro reuse cases should be checked by measurement.

350

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Micro/Macro Layer Frequency Separation

Micro/Macro Frequency Re-use

Recommendations:
S It is preferred that microcell and macrocell layers should use distinct frequency bands. Occasional re use of a macrocell frequency in the microcell layer may be possible, but this should be confirmed by empirical tests on the system in question.

S At least one guard channel should be maintained between the frequencies in use in a macrocell and the frequencies in use in the microcells underlying that macrocell.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

351

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Handover Scenario for Adjacent Channels (Both BCCH Carriers)

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Handover Scenario for Adjacent Channels (Both BCCH Carriers)


Having decided the separation between the micro and macro layer frequency bands, the next step is to assign frequencies to the microcells. The previous page gives recommendations for checking the co-channel interference (C/I) ratio for the frequency plan. When assigning frequencies, it is also important to take account of the adjacent channel interference. The GSM recommendations indicate that degradations occur at an adjacent channel interference level of about 9dB in a fading channel (no shadowing). This means that for a mobile moving from one microcell to another, where the channels assigned are adjacent (see diagram), there is a limited window in which handover can occur. Only as the neighbour cells signal gets within 9dB of the serving channel does the neighbour BSIC become decodeable. The MS can then start reporting this neighbour channel and the BSS can start the averaging process. If the handover command is not sent before the target channel exceeds the serving channel by 9dB, the handover may fail because the handover command becomes corrupted. The other constraint on the handover is that the handover process itself will only start when the power budget expression exceeds the HO_MARGIN (xdB). The handover success rate is largely dependent on mobile speed and adjacent channel handover parameters. To minimise problems the following recommendations should be adopted; S S Use as large a frequency set as possible in the microcell layer. As far as possible avoid the use of adjacent channels in adjacent cells. Wherever possible, avoid the use of adjacent channels in neighbour cells which are round the corner from each other. The rapid signal changes in a round the corner scenario make the window in the diagram smaller in terms of distance travelled. Avoid the use of adjacent channels in neighbour cells which may encounter fast moving mobiles. Use short averaging periods and low HO_MARGINS for adjacent channel handovers. In cases where micro/macrocell frequencies are separated only by a narrow guard band, (one channel), the microcell frequency which is nearest to the macrocell frequency, should be assigned to the microcells furthest away (in distance) from the macrocell. If none of the above recommendations can be adopted then use of the 7th algorithm type may be utilised.

S S S

352

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Handover Scenario for Adjacent Channels (Both BCCH Carriers)

Handover Scenario for Adjacent Channels (Both BCCH Carriers)

The handover window


Power MS direction xdB 9dB

9dB

Dist Adjacent BSIC is decodeable here Target HO command PBGT becomes unreliable beats HO_Margin

Note: The 9dB window is defined in the GSM recommendations

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

353

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Antenna Types

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Antenna Types
Both directional and omni directional antennas have their uses in microcellular systems. The different attributes of the various antenna types can be used by the proficient cell planner to avoid shadows, reduce handover requests, and maximise traffic capture.

Directional antennas
Directional antennas are useful for covering long streets, giving the added advantages of extra gain in the forward direction and suppressed signal in the reverse direction this is a useful characteristic if the cell is a potential interferer to another cell located behind it. It is also worth noting that a directional antenna could be used to improve in-building coverage and reduce co-channel interference in the reverse direction.

354

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Antenna Types

Antenna Types Directional Antennas

Buildings
Antenna

Coverage

S High gain (forward direction) S Can enhance in building penetration for specific buildings where required S Control of interference in reverse direction S Good for covering long streets
Buildings
Antenna

Reduced co channel interference in this direction

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

In building coverage could be greatly improved at this point

Coverage

355

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Antenna Types

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

OMNI antennas
Omni antenna are useful for covering open areas (e.g. squares, plazas). In these areas, it is desirable to have a clear best server cell to avoid excessive handovers and their attendant problems. Another application is to create a corner crossroads cell. This avoids having transient cells at street crossroads. However, by intersecting with more streets the potential for interference with other cells may be increased.

356

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Antenna Types

Antenna Types

OMNI Antennas
Buildings Antenna

Coverage

Buildings Antennas

Coverage

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

357

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Typical Transient Cell Situation at in this Case a Crossroads

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Typical Transient Cell Situation at in this Case a Crossroads


The problem with transient cells is that a mobile may handover to (or camp on) a cell while it is stationary at traffic lights, and then lose the cell as it drives off at high speed before it has a chance to reselect/handover. This situation must be avoided as even slow moving mobiles could experience problems. The solution could be the use of an omni antenna to cover the crossroads.

358

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Typical Transient Cell Situation at in this Case a Crossroads

Antenna Types

Typical transient cell situation in this case at a crossroads


Buildings Antenna M Coverage
Mobile M hands on to cell A, then drives in the direction shown

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

359

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Installation of Microcell Antennas

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Installation of Microcell Antennas


S The theoretical radiation pattern of an antenna will be distorted by mounting it in close proximity to a wall or other structure. The antenna should ideally be mounted more than one wavelength away. Antennas should be mounted as far away as possible from any electrical equipment (e.g. security cameras, burglar alarms). Directional antenna azimuth should be as close as possible to the value used in the prediction tool. An external antenna should ideally be mounted at least one floor lower than the lowest roof in the cells coverage area in order to avoid diffraction over rooftops. Antennas should be mounted at least one floor lower than that of the opposite buildings. Remember not to have antennas too low (at least 5 to 7m up) this avoids obstruction by buses etc. Building features near the antenna (eg buttresses and corners) will have great effects on cell shape, therefore, antenna locality should be carefully chosen.

S S S

Diversity
Due to the types of propagation and the low propagation delays in the microcellular environment the benefits of diversity would have to be considered on an individual basis. Not only is space diversity (2 antennae [10 apart) a possible method, but also phase diversity could be used at the BTS. This system again would have to be considered on a per cell basis.

360

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY


Installation of Microcell Antennas
BUILDINGS BUILDINGS Coverage Poor Coverage Area

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

Antenna Too High

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Installation of Microcell Antennas

Signal deflects over rooftop causing interference in the macrocell layer

361

Installation of Microcell Antennas

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Antenna types
Both directional and omni-directional antennas have their uses within the in-building environment. The different attributes of the various antenna types can be used by the cell planner to: S S S Reduce handover requests Maximise traffic capture Minimise external interference

Directional antenna
Directional antenna are useful for covering long corridors, giving the added advantages of extra gain in the forward direction and suppressed signal in the reverse direction. This can reduce co-channel interference in the reverse direction. The building geometry will modify the directivity of any particular antenna. S S S High gain (forward direction) Control of interference in reverse direction Good for covering long corridors

362

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Installation of Microcell Antennas

Directional Antenna

Directional Antenna

Rooms

Reduced co-channel interference in this direction

Coverage

Rooms

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

363

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Installation of Microcell Antennas

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Omni antenna
Omni antenna are useful for covering open areas. In these areas it is desirable to have a clear best server cell to avoid excessive handovers.

Installation of antennas
S The theoretical radiation pattern of an antenna will be distorted by mounting it in close proximity to a wall or other structure. The antenna should ideally be mounted more than one wavelength away. Antennas should be mounted as far away as possible from any electrical equipment, (e.g. security cameras, burglar alarms). Building features near the antenna will have a great effect on cell shape, therefore antenna locality should be carefully chosen. Cosmetic appearance. Consideration of EMC.

S S S S

364

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Installation of Microcell Antennas

Omni Antenna

Rooms Omni Antenna

Possible area of coverage

Rooms

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

365

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Installation of Microcell Antennas

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

366

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Chapter 4

Microcellular Database

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

ii

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Chapter 4 Microcellular Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Microcellular Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microcellular Handover Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handovers in Hotspots and Combined Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main design criterion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handovers to/from other Vendors Macrocells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Current Motorola Handover Decision Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microcellular Handovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Seven Motorola Microcellular Handover Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiband operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting of the Candidate List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interference avoidance test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 1 Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PBGT algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink RXLEV only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adapted power Consideration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uplink Consideration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power budget exercise part 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power budget exercise part 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Criteria 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Criteria 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MicroMicro Quality Handover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 1 Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 2 Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 3 Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 4 Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 5 Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimization of type 5 handovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 6 Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Type 7 Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illustration of Handover Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adaptive Handovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example Application Scenarios for Handover Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Imperative handover from microcell to macrocell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hand-down from macrocell to microcell (handover to a type 5 neighbour) . . . . . Handover to a type 3 neighbour (round the corner handover) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handover to a line-of-sight neighbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Applying the algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example Application Scenarios for Handover Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

i
41 41 42 44 44 46 48 410 412 412 414 414 416 416 418 420 422 428 428 428 430 432 434 436 436 438 440 442 444 448 448 452 456 460 462 466 466 466 466 466 466 468

iii

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Co-located Mini Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handover Detection and Power Control Process (Microcellular PBGT Ho Evaluation) Microcellular Database Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Add_neighbor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Prompted parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directed Retry and Congestion Relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directed retry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Congestion relief . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Congestion handover criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Emergency and EGSM calls in cells using directed retry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microcellular purchasable option and directed retry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TCH flow control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directed retry and congestion relief database parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enhanced congestion relief procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Directed Retry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Congestion Relief Type 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Congestion Relief Type 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Concentric Cells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency re-use advantages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zone interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zone configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power based handover algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interference based handover algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interference based handover into zone 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guard timer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interference based handover into zone 0 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel allocation rules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Calculated Handover Power Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Range Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timeslot Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF Planning Guidelines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximizing Output Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximizing Receiver Sensitivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Range Handovers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Extended Range Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolated Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Types of Extended Range Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boundary Cell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Range Cell parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Extended Range Cell parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiband Inter-cell Handover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiband handover database parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiband neighbour measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Band preference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classmark of mobile . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
iv

470 472 478 478 480 492 4100 4100 4100 4102 4102 4102 4102 4102 4112 4116 4118 4120 4122 4124 4126 4128 4130 4134 4136 4138 4140 4142 4144 4148 4150 4152 4154 4156 4158 4160 4162 4162 4164 4164 4166 4168 4170 4174 4176 4178 4180

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Coincident Multiband Handover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feature objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Coincident Multiband . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4182 4182 4184

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

vi

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Database

Microcellular Database
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student will be able to: S S S S Understand the principles of handovers in microcellular. Understand the seven Motorola microcellular handover algorithms. Understand the add_neighbour command. Understand the use and implementation of directed retry and congestion relief.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

41

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Microcellular Handover Criteria

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Handover Criteria


When planning a microcellular handover strategy, there are some basic criteria that should be employed. These criteria detail a strategy for handovers between: micro macro macro micro macro micro macro micro

The criteria for each of these handovers is shown opposite.

42

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Handover Criteria

Microcellular Handover Criteria

MACRO
Too many HO or emergency

normal

MACRO
Time delay

MICRO

May be fast?

MICRO

Macro Micro - using a delay mechanism Micro Micro corner" situation - quick or restricted depending on route Micro Macro - prefer micro neighbours - speed detection (e.g. delay) - Maybe to alleviate possible adjacent channel interference.
EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems 43

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Handovers in Hotspots and Combined Architecture

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Handovers in Hotspots and Combined Architecture


The different propagation conditions which exist in a microcellular system, together with the multiple layer approach require the development of special handover algorithms. This section gives a description of Motorola algorithms, together with examples of their application.

Main design criterion


The main design criterion to be addressed is to find a mechanism to encourage fast moving mobiles to be served by the macrocells and to encourage slow moving mobiles to be served by the microcells. The terms fast and slow here have no absolute meaning, ideally, all mobiles would be served by the microcells since this is where the bulk of the system capacity is. However, some mobiles may be travelling so fast that either; 1. For these mobiles, handovers between microcells would occur too late to prevent interference or even a dropped call. (Recall that since the cells are now very much smaller, the distance a mobile travels before a handover is executed can be a significant proportion of the cells radius and therefore can take the mobile into the interference region), or The large number of handovers generated would cause an unacceptable loading on the system processors.

2.

Mobiles for which these conditions would apply are referred to as fast mobiles. If these mobiles can be encouraged to utilise the macrocells, then conditions (1) and (2) are much reduced. The Motorola microcell handover procedures set aims to address this problem. Additionally the macrocell will provide a safety net for handovers when microcells use adjacent frequancies and when microcell capacity is exceeded (eg directed retry). The main design target can thus be stated as: Keep the mobiles on the microcells except when their speed is high enough to degrade their service quality, in which case they are to be served by the macrocells. If their speed reduces such that they can be adequately served by the microcells, then hand them back to the microcells.

44

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Handovers in Hotspots and Combined Architecture

Dedicated Mode S Fast mobiles should hand up to the macro layer S Slow mobiles should stay on the micro layer S Handover to a transient" microcell should be discouraged

The Motorola Approach S Define a number of handover procedures, each tailored to a particular scenario type S Allow the procedure to be selected on a per neighbour basis

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

45

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Handovers to/from other Vendors Macrocells

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Handovers to/from other Vendors Macrocells


One scenario that must be considered is where the microcells are deployed underneath the macrocell of another manufacturer. In this case, the performance that can be obtained depends, to some extent, on the handover algorithms employed by the macrocell manufacturer. Since idle mode behaviour is essentially under the control of the mobile, the question of any idle mode incompatibility does not arise. It is impossible to make general statements on this issue without knowing the details of the other manufacturers implementations, however, assuming that at least the standard ETSIdefined algorithms have been implemented, then there should be enough scope in setting the values of handover parameters to make the system work well. The Motorola OMC-R has the ability to create a proxy cell environment to aid the multivendor environment. This feature gives the following advantages: S S S Represent cells in a different network, either those managed by another Motorola OMC-R or another vendors OMC-R. Removes the need to manually update the neighbors in your system which point to cells in another system. A form on the OMC-R GUI that shows a subset of the proxy cell parameters.

European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)

46

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Handovers to/from other Vendors Macrocells

Handovers to/from other Vendors Macrocells

Macrocell Manufacturer x?

Microcell using Motorola Equipment (BTS)

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

47

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Current Motorola Handover Decision Algorithms

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Current Motorola Handover Decision Algorithms


Handover triggers are currently based on the following criteria: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Receive Quality (Uplink and downlink) Receive Signal Strength (Uplink and downlink) Distance (Timing Advance) Interference level Power Budget

A decision has to made by the BSC as to what priority should be given to each of the five criteria. They are in fact placed in order of priority, Receive Quality being the most important and Power Budget being the least. Therefore, if there are more handover bids to a cell than free channels, then the bids with cause Receive Quality shall take highest priority. Cells that the MS is being handed over to, can also be placed in priority levels. These priority levels are considered together with the list of candidates and the interference levels in the choice of new cell. If there are then two cells which meet the criteria for handover then the cell with the highest priority shall be used. This enables umbrella cells for instance to be given a lower priority and therefore only handle calls when no other cell is available. Channel congestion in the best cell shall cause the choice of the second cell. If no cell is available and call queuing is employed then the MS will be placed in the queue until the relevant cell becomes available. MS placed in queue for handover purposes take priority over new calls.

48

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Current Motorola Handover Decision Algorithms

Current Motorola Handover Decision Algorithm

Handover Criteria: S S S S S Receive Quality Receive Signal Strength Distance Interference Level Power Budget

Really Emergency handovers When finely optimised power budget should be the main cause of handovers

Target Cell Priority: S List of candidates within a non micro cellular software load sets the neighour priority by PBGT-HO_MARGIN

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

49

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Microcellular Handovers

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Handovers
It is worth noting that when implementing microcells it is suggested that the following parameters are set to implement fast handovers.

HREQAVE=6 HREQT=1

set on a per neighbour basis. These valuesgiven are loaded for a fast or slow handover as required.

Nx= Px= 1 - no voting in all cases for microcells Note: HREQTNx

These values in the above example are set so that there is a weighting towards a fast handover (i.e. Only one average is taken of six values (measurements/calculations) and if this is at or below a specified threshold a handover trigger is generated).

Note:
HREQAVE has previously been specified on a per cell basis.

410

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Handovers

Microcellular Handovers Values aimed at fast handovers HREQAVE HREQT Nx= Px =6 =1 =1

Note: HREQTqNx

B -88

A -85 -84 -89 -90 -91 -90

Rxlev (in dbs)

B -87

A -88

If -88 is the threshold value or greater then a handover would be generated.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

411

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

The Seven Motorola Microcellular Handover Procedures

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The Seven Motorola Microcellular Handover Procedures


The Motorola approach to this has been to implement seven procedure types, which are appropriate for various situations. The algorithm type to be used can be specified on a per neighbour basis. These algorithms will now be described. A key component of the algorithms is their treatment of handover candidate ordering. Each neighbour cell is classified as a type N neighbour (N= 1 to 7), when N is the number of the procedure that is selected for that neighbour. The candidate ordering is shown later. Basically, there are two cases where a PBGT handover is generated, and where a non PBGT handover is generated. There are two further sub-cases of the PBGT handover case, depending upon whether or not there was a type 3 neighbour generating a handover request or not.

Multiband operation
Should a BSS be configured for multiband operation, as well as microcellular operation, the BSS orders handover candidates based on the multiband preferred operation sorting algorithms, before ordering handover candidates based on the microcellular sorting algorithms. By applying the algorithms in this manner the list of handover candidates is grouped based on preferred band operation, and each group ordered based on the microcellular algorithms, where applicable.

412

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The Seven Motorola Microcellular Handover Procedures

The Seven Motorola Microcellular Handover Procedures

S Specified on a per neighbour basis S Each neighbour cell is classified as a type N" neighbour (N= 1 to 7)

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

413

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Setting of the Candidate List

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Setting of the Candidate List


Using the microcell implementation, each neighbour is assigned a power budget algorithm to be used for that neighbour. Upon receipt of each measurement report the BSS uses the assigned algorithm for each neighbour reported by the MS to determine if the MS qualifies for a power budget handover to that neighbour. The BSS then evaluates the number of neighbours which qualify for a power budget handover. These neighbours are then prioritised based on the algorithm used to determine the power budget handover qualification and the value of the power budget calculation. The BSS will then manipulate the list of candidate cells based on the table opposite.

Interference avoidance test


Calls can also be dropped when a cell hands over to a neighbour, which in turn has a neighbour with an adjacent (BCCH) channel frequency. A new per neighbour parameter, adj_chan_intf_test is provided which, if enabled, enables the BSS to perform an interference avoidance test on the neighbour candidate before handing it over a call. The interference avoidance test can be used regardless of which of the seven types of handover algorithms is being used for the neighbour. Another per neighbour parameter, adj_chan_rxlev_diff, allows the operator to enter the desired RXLEV difference between the two cells. For any given neighbour with the interference avoidance test enabled, the BSS finds out if any other neighbour is on an adjacent channel with respect to this neighbour.

414

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Setting of the Candidate List

Setting of Candidate List

Step 1 2 3

Action Remove any neighbour that fails the Interference Avoidance Test. y g Remove any neighbour which does not satisfy additional requirements of its algorithm (this does not apply for type 1 and 2). If handover triggered by . . . type 3 neighbour Then . . .

Preference given to type 3 neighbours. Candidate list built in the following order: i. All algorithm 3 neighbours which qualify ranked by power budget. ii. Algorithm 2 neighbours which qualify ranked by power budget. iii. Any algorithm 4, 5 and 6 neighbours which qualify ranked by power budget. Then any type 1 neighbours. The intention is to prefer type 3 neighbours, use type 2 neighbours as default candidates in case of blocking and use the other types which generated causes as last resorts. Preferene given to qualified microcell/picocell neighbours. Candidate list built in the following order: i. Remove algorithm 2 neighbours from the list. ii. All algorithm 4, 5, or 6 neighbours (in that order) which qualify, ranked by power budget. iii. Any algorithm 1 neighbours which qualify ranked by power budget. This gives handover preference to any qualified microcell/picocell neighbours and uses Algorithm 1 candidates as default in the case of there being no qualified microcell/picocell. Preference given to macrocells. Candidate list is built in the following order: i. Remove any algorithm 7 neighbour which fails test: Power budget pbgt_adj_chan_ho_margin >= 0 ii. All algorithm 1 and 2 neighbours which qualify ranked by power budget. iii. Any other neighbours which qualify for power budget handovers, ranked by power budget. This gives handover preference to macrocell neighbours in the case of imperative/adjacent channel interference handovers but uses all other neighbour types as default candidates, ranked by power budget, if no macroCell is available.

type 4, 5 or 6 neighbours

imperative handovers (handover cause other than power budget) or adjacent channel interference.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

415

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Type 1 Algorithm

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 1 Algorithm
PBGT algorithm
Algorithm 1 is simply the standard GSM power budget algorithm. The difference from the previous implementation is that the averaging period (HREQAVE) can be set on a per-neighbour basis, The power budget formula can be considered in two parts, the left handside the serving cell and the right handside the neighbour cell. The power budget calculation is carried out every half second (SACCH multiframe). For each reported neighbour of all mobiles engaged in traffic the aim of the formula is to afford the mobile the lowest uplink pathloss (not subject to N & P voting).

PBGT(n)=

[min(ms_txpwr_max,P)- Rxlev_DL - Pwr_C_D] SERVER

- [min (ms_txpwr_max,P) - Rxlev_DL] NEIGHBOUR For handover to take place it is usual for : PBGT(n)>Ho_margin

416

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 1 Algorithm

Type 1 Power Budget Assessment All Values in dBm


417

Min (ms_txpwr_max, P) - Rxlev_DL - PWR_C_D

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

PBGT (n) =

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Min (ms_txpwr_max, P) - Rxlev_DL

SERVING

NEIGHBOUR

Type 1 Algorithm

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Downlink RXLEV only


Probably the most important factor in any handover decision and selection process should be the mobiles perception of its serving downlink level as compared to neighbours downlink level. This is accounted for in the power budget expression:

PBGT (n) = [ -Rxlev_DL ] - [ -Rxlev_DL ]


As can be noted, all the other inputs to the formula have been removed and this level comparison can be easily seen. PBGT(n) will become a value greater than 0 if the reported neighbour level becomes greater than the server. The Rxlev_DL averages for the neighbour can come from two sources. This is covered later in the course.

SERVER

NEIGHBOUR

418

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 1 Algorithm

Considering RXLEV Only

PBGT (n) > 0

SERVER

NEIGHBOUR
HIGH POWER

REPORTED SERVER LEVEL

BASE STATION

BASE STATION

REPORTED NEIGHBOUR LEVEL

DISTANCE MOBILE

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

419

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Adapted power Consideration

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Adapted power Consideration


A direct level comparison is not always correct because the mobile is potentially reporting adapted power on the serving cell whereas, the neighbour is being measured at its full BCCH power level. A correction factor must therefore be considered:

PBGT (n) = [ -Rxlev_DL - PWR_C_D ] - [ -Rxlev_DL ]


Where PWR_C_D= max_tx_bts Actual BTS ouput power. PWR_C_D will always equal a positive value, or zero when the MS can no longer be maintained in the downlink power window.

SERVER

NEIGHBOUR

420

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Adapted power Consideration

Adapted Power Correction Factor


BCCH POWER LEVEL

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

BCCH POWER LEVEL

POWER WINDOW

A DIRECT LEVEL COMPARISON WOULD SUGGEST PBGT(n) > 0 IN THIS AREA

PBGT (n) > 0

NEIGHBOUR

SERVER

REPORTED LEVEL

421

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Uplink Consideration

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Uplink Consideration
Remember that the aim of this formula is to provide the mobile with the lowest uplink pathloss, so far the uplink path has not been considered. The first part of each side of the formula provides this comparison. min (ms_txpwr_max, P) ms_txpwr_max of the server equates to the value specified in max_tx_ms in the add_cell. ms_txpwr_max of the neighbour can be specified in add_neighbour for an external call and for an internal neighbor the ms_txpwr_max is read from the neighbor cell area of the database (add_cell). The value of P equates to the maximum power of the mobile concerned. The power budget formula is designed for a mobile suited to the PLMN being used, that is that the mobile always has sufficient power to support all cells within the PLMN. In this case the P value is never used and the ms_txpwr_max is always the deciding uplink factor. The following examples illustrate this ideal.

422

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems 423

CONDITION 1 S EQUALLY SIZED CELLS S MS ABLE TO SUPPORT SERVER AND NEIGHBOUR S max_tx_ms (SERVER)= ms_txpwr_max (NEIGHBOUR)

PBGT (n) > 0

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

SERVER

NEIGHBOUR

Uplink Consideration

BCCH

BCCH

Uplink Consideration

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

424

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems 425

CONDITION 2 S LARGE SERVER, SMALL NEIGHBOUR S MS ABLE TO SUPPORT SERVER AND NEIGHBOUR S max_tx_ms (SERVER) >ms_txpwr_max (N EIGHBOUR)

PBGT (n) > 0

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

SERVER NEIGHBOUR
Uplink Consideration

PBGT(n)= [HIGHER SERVER] - [LOWER NEIGHBOUR]

Uplink Consideration

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

426

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems 427

CONDITION 3 S SMALL SERVER, LARGE NEIGHBOUR S MS ABLE TO SUPPORT SERVER AND NEIGHBOUR S max_tx_ms (SERVER) < ms txpwr_max (NEIGHBOUR)

PBGT (n) > 0

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

SERVER

NEIGHBOUR
Uplink Consideration

PBGT(n)= [LOWER SERVER] - [HIGHER NEIGHBOUR]

Type 1

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 1
Power budget exercise part 1
The figures specified on the facing page can be used by the HDPC to calculate the Power budget assessment. Use the working area to calculate PBBT (n).

SERVING (macro)
serving= serving= serving= min (ms_txpwr_max,P) Rxlev_DL PWR_C_D

NEIGHBOUR (micro)
neighbour= neighbour= neighbour= min (ms_txpwr_max(n),P) RXLEV_NCELL (n)

PBGT (n)= PBGT (n)= PBGT (n)=

serving Neighbour

Power budget exercise part 2


If the measured parameters remain the same and the neighbor was a microcell what would you change if you wished the PBGT(n) figure to equal at least 8. Note: the uplink of the microcell does not require 33 dBm. It would only require 25 dBm.

Parameter ......................... could be altered to equal ...............................

428

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 1

Type 1 Power Budget Example S SERVING CELL DATABASE PARAMETERS Cell identity= 234 10 255 038 max_tx_ms= 33 dBm max_tx_bts= 0 (43dB) ms_txpwr_max_def = 39dBm add_neighbour external 234 10 256 039 ms_txpwr_max_cell= 33dBm S BEST NEIGHBOURS DATABASE PARAMETERS Cell identity= 234 10 256 039 ms_txpwr_max_def= 39 ms_txpwr_max_cell= 33 S RXLEV AVERAGE SERVING (Reported)= -90dBm NEIGHBOUR= -75 dBm S SERVING CELL DL OUTPUT POWER= 32dBm S MOBILE= CLASS 4
CLASS
1 2 3 4 5

MAX POWER
20W 8W 5W 2W 0.8W

dBm
43 39 37 33 29
429

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Criteria 1

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Criteria 1
Criteria 1 ensures that the mobile is perceiving each neighbours Rxlev at a power level good enough for the downlink path to support a good call, criteria 1 is as follows: rxlev_ncell > rxlev_min(n) + Max (0, Pa) Rxlev_ncell is the latest averaged average processed for that neighbour. Rxlev_min (n) is the database parameter set in the add_neighbour command. For internal cells rxlev_min_cell is optional and if not specified then rxlev_min_def in the add_cell command of the server is used. The last part of this calculation tempers the perceived downlink rxlev average with the potential uplink path. max (0, Pa) where Pa= ms_txpwr_max(n) P P= max power of ms

If the MS is suited for the PLMN in question Pa will always equal either zero or a negative value and will therefore not be considered. If the MS is not suited to that neighbour, ie its maximum power can not support that required by that cell then the averaged rxlev_ncell would have to become a greater value to overcome this handicap. Criteria 1 would therefore prevent such a handover until the MS was deeper into that neighbour. Any neighbour failing Criteria 1 is not further considered in any handover decision process. The software bin and hence averages used for criteria 1 are created in the averaging mechanism chg_act_alg_data_surround cell which pointed to by decision_1_ncell_av_h_calc in a add_cell. This has not changed from the existing criteria 1 implementation.

430

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Criteria 1

First Criteria

RXLEV_NCELL(n) > RXLEV_MIN(n) + Max (0,Pa)

where: Pa= ms_txpwr_max(n) - P P= max power of ms

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

431

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Criteria 2

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Criteria 2
Each neighbour, for that mobile, that satisfies criteria 1 is then subjected to criteria 2. criteria 2 specifies that: PBGT(n) Ho_margin Ho_margin for both external and internal cells can be specified in the add_neighbour command. For internal cells this parameter is optional and if not specified then the ho_margin_def in the add_cell of the server is used. Criteria 2 will produce a result for each neighbour, either positive or negative, that result is further considered in the specific handover procedure to follow. For microcellular the neighbors are then ranked by algorithm type. The neighbor software bin and hence the averages used in criteria 2 are set in chg_act_alg_data surround_cell which is pointed to by decision_1_ncell_rxlev_av_h_calc in add_cell. The server averages used in criteria 2 are again set in chg_act_alg_data rxlev_dl_ho which in this case is pointed to by decision_1_p_bgt_rxlev_av_h in add_cell.

432

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Criteria 2

Second Criteria

PBGT(n) - HO_MARGIN

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

433

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

MicroMicro Quality Handover

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

MicroMicro Quality Handover


When a RXQUAL handover condition exists, a layer indication for the serving cell and the type of neighbour within the environment (identified by the PBGT algorithm utilised by that neighbour) will be used to prioritise the microcell neighbours, thereby attempting to handover, as well as maintain, the call within the microcellular layer. The lower the number for the layer indication, the larger the layer. Currently, this means that cell level 0 is the macro layer, cell level 1 is the micro layer and cell level 2 is the pico layer. RXQUAL handovers can effectively be disabled to a specific neighbour by setting the ho_margin_rxqual[N] for that neighbour to 63. Prioritisation and ordering of handover candidates will only be performed if the functionality is enabled via the prioritize_microcell flag, and the bounce_protect_qual_tmr is not active. Prioritization is as shown opposite: Commands: Element Layer_number Min 0 Max 2 Default Value Definition 0 0 = Macrocell 1 = Microcell 2 = Picocell 0 = Disabled Layer of serving cell will not impact sort ing of candidate list. 1 = Enabled Layer of serving cell will impact sorting of candidate list. Comments per cell element

prioritize_micro cell

per cell element

434

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

MicroMicro Quality Handover

Prioritisation RXQUAL condition with call in microcell layer: 1. All neighbours which exceed Criteria 1. 2. All neighbours remaining after the exclusion procedure defined by ho_margin_rxqual[N] 3. Neighbour types prioritised: 4, 5, 6 sorted by pbgt-Ho_margin, followed by 3 sorted by Pbgt-Ho_margin, followed by 1, 2 sorted by PBGT-Ho_margin RXQUAL condition with call in macrocell layer: 1. All neighbours which exceed Criteria 1. 2. All neighbours remaining after the exclusion procedure defined by ho_margin_rxqual[n] 3. Neighbour type prioritised: 1 sorted by PBGT-Ho_margin followed by 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 sorted by PBGT-Ho_margin

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

435

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Type 1 Algorithm

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 1 Algorithm
Uses
This is an extension of an existing algorithm to a per neighbour basis. As this is the case, it will still mainly be used in its traditional role, that of macro to macro handovers.

436

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 1 Algorithm

Type 1 Algorithm

Uses S Serving Cell is a macrocell S Preferred handover mechanism for macro to macro handovers

MACROCELL (TYPE 1)

MACROCELL (TYPE 1)

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

437

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Type 2 Algorithm

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 2 Algorithm
If a neighbour cell is specified to be type 2 neighbour, it will not trigger a handover but is preferred when an emergency handover is needed. This means that, for example, if an imperative handover is caused(which usually means that the quality is degraded), then handovers to type 2 cells will be preferred. Note that a type 2 neighbour does not generate handover requests.

438

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 2 Algorithm

Type 2 Algorithm S Serving cell is a microcell, macrocell would be made a type 2 neighbour to eliminate pbgt handovers between layers. S If an imperative handover takes place (rxlev/rxqual), algorithm 2 neighbour gets priority. S Additionally if an algorithm 3 (round the corner neighbour) generates a handover cause and the handover fails then algorithm 2 neighbour (macrocell) will be next in the candidate list

MACROCELL (TYPE 2 NEIGHBOUR)

HO FAILS MS HANDS UP TO MACROCELL


MICROCELL MICROCELL

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

439

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Type 3 Algorithm

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 3 Algorithm
The operator may select a power budget algorithm where once the standard GSM power budget conditions have been met. An additional restriction must be met before a power budget handover will be initiated to that neighbour cell. The additional restriction being that of the serving cell uplink and downlink RXLEVs must be below specified thresholds. These thresholds are defined on a per neighbour basis. This algorithm prevents power budget handovers to neighbours located around a corner until the receive levels of the serving cell has dropped below the thresholds, indicating that the MS has moved around the corner. This guards against the case where the threshold is crossed only due to a temporary fade. The probability of this happening both in the uplink and downlink is low due to the 45Mhz frequency separation. With signal losses of as much as 2030 dBs in the space of 1040 meters can be measured when turning a street corner. With this in mind, it is imperative that the handover algorithm reacts quickly enough to maintain the call.

440

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 3 Algorithm

Type 3 Algorithm

PBGT (n) > HO_MARGIN

Power SERVER NEIGHBOUR


HO_MARGIN
UL/DL THRESHOLD

Handover can occur when: S PBGT(N) >HO_MARGIN and averaged serving cells RXLEVs
are below thresholds UL_RXLEV_SERV_L and DL_RXLEV_SERV_L

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

441

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Type 3 Algorithm

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Uses
The type 3 Algorithm can be used when a handover is required due to a large drop in service Rxlev. Some examples are shown opposite.

442

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 3 Algorithm

Type 3 Algorithm

Uses: S Serving cell is a microcell, microcell neighbour which round the corner is a Type 3 S Rxlev threshold ensures corner has been turned before handover (up to 20dB drop) S Candidate ordering ensures that a type 2 macrocell is a secondary candidate S Serving cell is a micro, neighbour cell is an inbuilding microcell.
Buildings
Type 3 Neighbour

Buildings

MS

Buildings

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

443

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Type 4 Algorithm

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 4 Algorithm
This is a delayed handover. A timer is started when an MS hands into the micro server cell. The handover request is generated if PBGT exceeds HO_MARGIN after the timer has expired. This delay mechanism discourages handover into transient microcells which are potential candidates only for a short period of time, and can be used to force a fast moving mobile to enter an interference zone before handing over to the neighbour microcell. This will cause a hand up to the macrocell, where the mobile will be encouraged to stay. Additionally, the algorithm can be used to label a cell as a microcell for later use in the candidate ordering algorithm. In this case the timer may be set to zero.

444

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 4 Algorithm

Type 4 Algorithm

PBGT (n) > HO_MARGIN

Power
TIMER"

SERVER

MICRO NEIGHBOUR
HO OCCURS if PBGT(n)>HO_MARGIN

Handover can occur when: S PBGT(N)>HO_MARGIN and time threshold exceeded since beginning of call" on this channel

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

445

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Type 4 Algorithm

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Some examples of the use of the type 4 Algorithm are shown opposite.

446

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 4 Algorithm

Type 4 Algorithm

S Serving cell is a microcell, target cell is a microcell with direct path to neighbour-levels from both cells are high so rxlev threshold would be ineffective to start timer. S With timer set to zero, algorithms can be used simply to label a cell as a micro neighbour. S Timer limits spurious handovers, forcing imperative handups for fast mobile subscribers

Buildings

Microcell

Microcell

Buildings

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

447

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Type 5 Algorithm

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 5 Algorithm
This is also a delayed handover. A timer is started when the average measurement reports (HREQT) from the neighbour in question exceed a certain threshold. The timer is reset when the neighbour signal strength falls below this threshold. A handover request is generated if PBGT exceeds HO_MARGIN after the timer has expired. If the measurement reports (Hreqt) drop below the threshold the timer stops.

Optimization of type 5 handovers


Type 5 handovers are intended for hand-down calls from macrocells to microcells. A problem occurs though with the indoor environment. This is because good quality might exist with relatively low RXLEV. As hand-downs are based on relatively high threshold (based on outdoor situation) a hand-down to macrocell to microcell might not take place, even when the microcell is the correct cell for the call to be in. To avoid this problem, optimization of this procedure causes type 5 handover algorithm to ignore the level threshold when the power budget between the serving cell and the neighbour cell meets a new, settable handover margin.

448

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 5 Algorithm

Type 5 Algorithm
PBGT (n) > HO_MARGIN

Power
HO_MARGIN

SERVER
TIMER STARTED AS RXLEV(n)> THRESHOLD
TIMER"

NEIGHBOUR
THRESHOLD

HANDOVER

Handover can occur when: S PBGT(N)> HO_MARGIN and time threshold exceeded since averaged neighbour cell RXLEV_NCELL has exceeded threshold RXLEV_NCELL_H

NB: RXLEV is ignored if the following is true: S PBGT(N)>HO_MARGIN_TYPE5

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

449

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Type 5 Algorithm

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Examples of the use of the type 5 Algorithm are shown opposite.

450

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 5 Algorithm

Type 5 Algorithm

S Serving cell is a macrocell, target cell is a type 5 microcell S Timer prevents fast moving mobiles from handing down S Combination of a timer with a short averaging period provides better performance than a long averaging period, as up to date data is used in the handover decision. S Serving cell is a microcell and there is a type 5 microcell neighbour with a direct path.
MACROCELL

MICROCELL (TYPE 5) MS (FASTMOVING)

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

451

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Type 6 Algorithm

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 6 Algorithm
This mechanism was presented to SMG2 by Siemens but was not adopted for Phase 2. A timer is started when PBGT exceeds HO_MARGIN. An offset is added to HO_MARGIN to further discourage handovers. If PBGT exceeds the offset HO_MARGIN whilst the timer is running, a handover request is generated. After the timer has expired, a dynamic offset is subtracted from the static offset making pbgt handover easier to neighbour.

452

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Type 6 Algorithm

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems 453

PBGT(n) > HO_MARGIN PBGT(n) >HO_MARGIN + STATIC OFFSET

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

TIMER

PBGT(n) > HO_MARGIN + STATIC OFFSET DYNAMIC OFFSET

Handover occurs when: S During Timer Period PBGT(n) > HO_MARGIN + STATIC OFFSET S After Timer Period PBGT(n) > HO_MARGIN + STATIC OFFSET - DYNAMIC OFFSET

Type 6 Algorithm

Type 6 Algorithm

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Some examples of the use of the type 6 Algorithm are shown opposite.

454

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 6 Algorithm

Type 6 Algorithm

S Serving cell is a macrocell, target cell is a type 6 microcell S Timer prevents fast moving mobiles from handing down to microcell S Serving cell is a micro, there is a type 6 micro with a direct path

MACROCELL

MICROCELL (TYPE 6)

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

455

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Type 7 Algorithm

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 7 Algorithm
If a mobile is moving from a serving cell to a neighbour which has an adjacent channel BCCH frequency the quality of the call will keep on dropping due to increasing level of adjacent channel interference. Assuming that both serving cell and interfering neighbour are single carrier cells neither an intra_cell nor an inter_cell handover to the interfering neighbour will help. The handover should be performed to a third neighbour which is not an adjacent channel. The type 7 algorithm has been defined to facilitate early detection of an adjacent channel interference problem. In a microcellular environment an operator will typically define a neighbour to be of type 7 if both the resource cell and the neighbour are single carrier cells with BCCH on adjacent channels. Another situation which could potentially drop a call is a handover to a neighbour which in turn has a neighbour with adjacent channel frequency. To avoid such a situation, the HDPC process will perform an interference avoidance test (if enabled) before handing over a call to the neighbour. For any given neighbour with interference avoidance test enabled, the HDPC process will find out if any other neighbour is on an adjacent channel (with respect to this neighbour). If there is then it will delete the neighbour from the neighbour list if the RXLEV difference is greater than the parameter adj_chan_rxlev_diff.

456

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Type 7 Algorithm

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems 457

PBGT(n) > pbgt_adj_chan_ho_margin

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

SERVER

NEIGHBOUR (WITH A BCCH OF ADJACENT FREQUENCY)

Handover occurs when: Standard power budget algorithm for detecting handover using adj_chan_ho_margin for handover margin (typically negative). Handover condition to this neighbour indicates potential adjacent channel interference problem. The handover is performed to a cell other than the neighbour.

Type 7 Algorithm

Type 7 Algorithm

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Some examples of the type 7 algorithm are shown opposite

458

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Type 7 Algorithm

Type 7 Algorithm

S Serving cell is a microcell and the target neighbour has an adjacent channel BCCH. The type 7 neighbour listing will drive the mobile subscriber to the macro layer or another microcell as required.

MACRO

MACRO

MICRO ARFCN=10

MICRO ARFCN= 11

MICRO

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

459

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Illustration of Handover Types

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Illustration of Handover Types


Some suggested uses for the procedures are shown opposite

Note:
The type 2 neighbor does not generate handover requests for PBGT, however, Rxlev, Rxqual etc. are still available methods, if enabled within the database.

460

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Illustration of Handover Types

Illustration of Handover Types

MacroMacro (1)*

Macrocell
MicroMacro Rxlev or Rxqual (secondary target for 3 or for a type 7 to avoid interfer ence)*

MacroMicro (5,6)*

Microcell
MicroMicro a) target is line of sight" (4,5,6)* b) target is around corner" (3)*

*Note:

Numbers indicate suggested choice of procedure. Other algorithms may prove just as useful if optimised correctly.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

461

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Adaptive Handovers

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Adaptive Handovers
Currently, handovers are controlled by a voting mechanism, such that, if a certain number of the most recent averages meet certain criteria the need for a handover is recognised. Adaptive handovers allow handovers to occur faster when conditions are deteriorating rapidly and slower when conditions are marginally poor. This saves calls and helps to prevent needless handovers. The idea is that a cumulative value is maintained and updated at each measurement. As long as a marginal handover exists, the value is incremented by a certain amount (based on the difference between some handover threshold and the current measurement). The cumulative value is reset to zero any time there is no marginal need for a handover. However, if the cumulative value reaches some trigger, a handover need is recognised. Adaptive handovers have been implemented for power budget handovers, quality handovers (uplink and downlink) and level handovers (uplink and downlink).

462

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Adaptive Handovers

Adaptive Power Budget Handover


If then PBGT(n) > HO_margin PBGT_cumulative value= PBGT_cumulative value + (PBGT(n)-HO_margin) If then If PBGT_ cumulative value > PBGT_trigger generate handover PBGT(n) < HO_margin PBGT_cumulative value= 0 (i.e. reset)

Adaptive Level handover


If where then rxlev_xx < l_rxlev_xx_ho xx= UL/DL rxlev_cumulative value= rxlev_cumulative value + (l_rxlev_xx_ho - rxlev_xx) rxlev_cumulative value> rxlev_trigger generate handover rxlev_xx > l_rxlev_xx_h rxlev_cumulative value= 0
EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems 463

If then If

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Adaptive Handovers

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

464

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Adaptive Handovers

Adaptive Quality Handover

If then

rxqual_xx > l_rxqual_xx_h rxqual_cumulative value= rxqual_cumulative value + (rxqual_xx - l_rxqual_xx_h) adap_ho_alt_trigger_rxqual is disabled rxqual_cumulative value>adap_trigger_rxqual_xx generate handover hopping is enabled and adap_ho_alt_trigger_rxqual is enabled rxqual_cumulative value > adap_trigger_hop_rxqual_xx generate handover xx= UL/DL

If and then or if and then where

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

465

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Example Application Scenarios for Handover Procedures

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Example Application Scenarios for Handover Procedures


Opposite is an application example for handovers between microcells with various relationships. The table gives an example of how the Motorola algorithms might be applied in these cases.

Imperative handover from microcell to macrocell


The macrocell is a type 2 neighbour for each of the microcells. This means that if an imperative handover is generated whilst in one of the microcells, the macrocell will always be given high priority (see handover candidate ordering list).

Hand-down from macrocell to microcell (handover to a type 5 neighbour)


The 3 microcells are all specified as type 5 neighbours of the macrocell. This allows the possibility of delaying the hand-down from the macrocell until the mobile has seen a consistently high signal level from the microcell for a specified time. In this way, fast mobiles will not stay in a microcell long enough to trigger a hand-down.

Handover to a type 3 neighbour (round the corner handover)


Microcell 2 is specified to be a type 3 neighbour of microcell 1. This means that a mobile travelling along route A will satisfy the condition for handover because the serving cell RXLEV threshold is crossed as the mobile turns the corner. A mobile travelling along route B, however, will not satisfy the condition for handover because the serving cell RXLEV will remain above the threshold.

Handover to a line-of-sight neighbour


Microcells 1 and 3 are line-of-sight neighbours,and in this case algorithm 4 is applied. This is used in preference to algorithm 1 since type1 neighbours would have an equal weighting with type 2 neighbours in the event of an RXQUAL handover.

Applying the algorithms


Care must be exercised in the application of these algorithms since the relations between the microcells (LOS or round the corner) depends upon the path taken between them. Depending upon the RF planning, it may be possible to arrange that, having specified an algorithm tailored to one particular route between the cells, then any other route goes via other cells. For example, this could be done to isolate possible areas of adjacent or co-channel interference in the network.
466

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Example Application Scenarios for Handover Procedures

Application Scenarios for Handover Procedures

Microcells operating below macrocell

A 3 B 1

Macrocell coverage area

CELL

NEIGHBOUR 1

ALGORITHM 5 5 5 2 3 4 2 3 3 2 4 3

Macro M

2 3 Macro

2 3 Macro

1 3 Macro

1 2

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

467

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Example Application Scenarios for Handover Procedures

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Example Application Scenarios for Handover Procedures


In the diagram opposite is shown an application example for handovers between picocells and their relationships with external cells. The example is that of a commercial in-building system that was implemented by Motorola at Swindon.

Applying the Algorithm


Care must be exercised in the application of these algorithms since the relations between internal and external cells depends upon the path between them. Depending upon the RF planning, it may be possible to arrange that, having specified an algorithm tailored to one particular route between the cells, then any other route goes via other cells. For example, it may be possible to isolate areas of adjacent or co-channel interference in the network. Note: All picocell to picocell handovers are set as type 1.

Pico-Pico Type 1:
This will enable imperative handovers to the macro on the periphery of the picocell coverage but will also allow handovers to other picocells where this provides the best power budget.

Pico-macro Type 2:
Handover to a Type 2 Neighbour only on an imperative cause.

Macro-pico Type 5
The neighbour cell threshold set at the minimum pico level for handover. This algorithm provides a timer to prevent ping-pong handovers back down to picocells after imperative handover to macro/external layer. Some picocellular systems, because of their billing or network architecture, do not require handovers from pico to macro layers on any cells other than those covering entrances and exits. In these cases the following algorithm strategy may be considered:

Pico-pico Type 4 or 5
This will enable power budget handovers between picocells with the option on the Type 5 to include a further neighbour threshold barrier where, for instance, on a particular floor, coverage from an adjacent floor level gave good coverage but where the handover to the other floor was not required unless in transit to that floor.

Pico-macro Type 2:
Handover to Type 2 Neighbour only on imperative cause to be defined only on cells covering entrances and exits.

Macro-pico Type 5
Neighbour cell threshold setting minimum pico level for handover on entrance and exit cells only. Provides a timer to prevent ping-pong handovers back down to picocells after imperative handover to macro/external layer.
468

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Example Application Scenarios for Handover Procedures

Motorola Picocell System Swindon

Motorola Picocell System Swindon chan 113 Frequency Plan chan 107 chan 110 chan 123 cell 56065 Production Finance Reception cell 16065
Type 2@12dBWanborough3, ms_txpwr_max=23rxqual=226 4/1:rxlev=20,4/1

CRF cell 46065

Restaurant cell 66065

Prod.Mngmt cell 26065 Engineering cell 6065


Type 2@12dBWestlea3, ms_txpwr_max=23rxqual=226 4/1:rxlev=20,4/1

Macro handover to picos type 5 default 0dB@bcch, timer 8sacch, neighbour threshold @ 25, ms_txpwr_max39 from Westlea 3 and Wanborough 3

Type 2@6dBWanborough3, ms_txpwr_max=23rxqual=226 4/1:rxlev=22,4/1 (cell16065 only)

Type 2@6dBWestlea3, ms_txpwr_max=23rxqual=226 4/1:rxlev=22,4/1 (cell16065 only)

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

469

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Co-located Mini Cell

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Co-located Mini Cell


This is a method of increasing spectrum efficiency and traffic channel capacity. The implementation of a co-located mini cell is shown on the diagram opposite. The mini cell could share the same antenna as the overlaying macrocell. The mini cell has a smaller service area, this service area can be controlled by use of the microcellular handover algorithms or the cell power (max_tx_bts). This system could be used to address capacity of a hotspot or network wide depending on operator requirements and frequency planning restrictions. With a shared antenna system the flexibility of the separate antenna microcell implementation is lost.

470

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Co-located Mini Cell

Co-located Mini Cell

alg1

macrocell

alg2 minicell alg5

alg1

Note: The alg 5 has the flexibility to restrict the minicell service area by use of the threshold and timer values

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

471

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Handover Detection and Power Control Process (Microcellular PBGT Ho Evaluation)

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Handover Detection and Power Control Process (Microcellular PBGT Ho Evaluation)


The process opposite is the method that HDPC uses to evaluate neighbors for triggering a handover cause PBGT.

Note:
This would only happen if the software had not triggered a ho_cause of Rxqual, Rxlev, Interference or timing advance at this time.

472

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Handover Detection and Power Control Process (Microcellular PBGT Ho Evaluation)

Microcellular PBGT Flow Chart


From other ho_processes not triggerd (I.e. Rxqual, Rxlevel, interference, distance)

Note:
no pwr_ho_allowed flag set? yes no

if the microcell feature is not purchased, all neighbors have pbgt_alg_type= 1 (standard GSM PBGT)

More neighbours to check yes is pbgt_alg_type(n)= 1?

yes

Alg type 1:if PBGT> ho_margin then set pbgt_ho_needed(n)=TRUE

no yes is pbgt_alg_type(n)=2? Alg Type 3: if PBGT>ho_margin and serving cell rxlevs are below the defined uplink and downlink thresholds (UL_RXLEV_SERV_L) and DL_RXLEV_SERV_L) then set pbgt ho needed(n)=TRUE yes Alg Type 4: if PBGT>ho_margin and the call has been on the current channel longer than time threshold (qulaify_count> QUALIFY_TIME), then set pbgt_ho_needed(n)=TRUE

no is pbgt_alg_type(n)=3?

no is pbgt_alg_type(n)=4? no is pbgt_alg_type(n)=5? no yes yes yes

Alg Type 5: if PBGT>ho_margin and time threshold (QUALIFY_DELAY) exceeded since the neighbor cell rxlev exceeded threshold (RXLEV_NCELL_H) then set pbgt ho needed(n)=TRUE.

is pbgt_alg_type(n)=6?

Alg Type 6: if ho_margin has Alg Type 6: if ho_margin has been continuously exceeded for been continuously exceeded for the specified time then set set the specified time then pbgt_ho_needed(n)=TRUE pbgt_ho_needed(n)=TRUE
Alg Type 7: If Pbgt > Pbgt_adj_chan_ho_margin =TRUE

no

if pbgt_ho_needed= TRUE for any neighbor yes set Ho_cause PBGT

no

1 MEAS_REP WT

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

473

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Handover Detection and Power Control Process (Microcellular PBGT Ho Evaluation)

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Once a course is set all neighbr Rxlev_all latest re-averaged averages are processed through CRITERIA 1 and CRITERIA 2.

Note: CRITERIA 1 is pass or fail. Any failed neighbors do not continue through the process.

474

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Handover Detection and Power Control Process (Microcellular PBGT Ho Evaluation)

Microcellular Pbgt Flow Chart

Evaluate CRITERIA 1 for all neighbors

Evaluate CRITERIA 2 for neighbors passing CRITERIA 1

`0' No

Ncell_proc flag set?

`1' Yes

2 Alternative algorithm

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

475

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Handover Detection and Power Control Process (Microcellular PBGT Ho Evaluation)

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The process opposite takes all neighbours and their CRITERIA 2 result and produces a ho_recognised message. The process also takes into account the algorithm type label used in add_neighbor.

476

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Handover Detection and Power Control Process (Microcellular PBGT Ho Evaluation)

Microcellular Pbgt Flow Chart

Sort all candidiates in order of PBGT with the strongest neighbor first

is ho.cause =PBGT?

Yes

is there a type 3 neighbor in the list with pbgt_ho_needed(n)= TRUE?

Yes

is there a neighbour type 7 in the list with Pbgt_adj_ch_ ho_margin= TRUE?

No

Reorder list with all type 3 neighbors with pbgt_ho_needed(n)=TRUE at the top of the list, followed by type 2 neighbors, followed by any type 1, 4, 5, 6 neighbors with pbgt_ho_needed(n)=TRUE

No No Reorder list with any type 4, 5, 6 neighbors with pbgt_ho_needed(n)=TRUE, followed by any type 1 neighbors.

Yes

Reorder list with any type 1 and 2 neighbors, followed by any type 3, 4, 5, 6 neighbors

send HO_RECOGNIZED msg: set ho_counter to database parm. handover_recognised_period

MEAS_REP_WT

Note: Each candidate list subset is ordered by PBGT.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

477

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Microcellular Database Parameters

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Database Parameters


Add_neighbor
Once the microcellular option is enabled the database will support the features of separate BA (BCCH) and BA (SACCH) lists and neighbor listing by Algorithm type. We will consider the add_neighbor command. The current add_neighbor command includes all parameters on the command line. The microcell feature will change the add_neighbor command to prompt for the necessary information and the new parameters to support the feature.

Note 1:
The cell identity (src_cell_id or neighbor_cell_id) must be entered as a seven digit GSM cell id.

Note 2:
The neighbor_cell_id may be placed with the string test# where # is a number between 1 and 64. Addition of test neighbors are to add frequencies to the BA_SACCH and/or BA_BCCH lists. Therefore, for test neighbors the placement will be an optional parameter and ignored if entered and the frequency will be the only prompted parameter.

Note 3:
If the list_type is not entered, the neighbors frequency will be added to both the BA_BCCH and BA_SACCH lists.

Note 4:
If the list_type is ba_bcch and placement is internal, no data will be prompted.

Note 5:
The maximum neighbors added to the BA_SACCH list is limited to the current maximum of 32 neighbors. The maximum number of neighbors will be 64.

478

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Database Parameters

add_neighbor Command name: Security Level: Function: Parameters:


<src_cell_id> Cell identity of the cell to which a neighbor is being added.

add_neighbor 2 Used to add one cell to anothers neighbor cell list

<neighbor_cell_id> Cell identity of the cell specified as a neighbour to the source cell. <placement> internal" external" Specifies that the neighbor cell is inside the BSS. Specifies that the neighbor cell is outside of the BSS. Put neighbors frequency on the BA_BCCH list. Put neighbors frequency on the BA_SACCH list. Put neighbors frequency on the BA_BCCH and BA_SACCH lists.

<list_type>

ba_bcch" ba_sacch" both"

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

479

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Microcellular Database Parameters

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Prompted parameters
S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S S Enable synchronization Enter the neighbour cell frequency type Enter the BCCH frequency number Enter base station identity code (BSIC) Enter MS transmit power maximum Enter neighbor receive level minimum Enter neighbor handover margin Does this neighbour have a carrier with an interfering frequency Enter the threshold for inner zone handover Enter the margin for inner zone handover Enter the power budget surrounding cell hreqave Enable adjacent channel interference avoidance test Enter the RXLEV difference for adjacent channel interference avoidance test Enter the power budget algorithm type Enter the adjacent channel interference detection handover margin Enter the uplink receive level threshold of the serving cell Enter the downlink receive level threshold of the serving cell Enter the qualifying time threshold Enter the qualifying delay time Enter the neighbor cell receive level threshold Enter the delay time Enter the handover static offset Enter the handover dynamic offset Enter neighbour congestion handover margin Is directed retry allowed at this external neighbour cell Enter the range area that the neighbour is adjacent to.

480

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Database Parameters

Add Neighbor Prompts Table


Prompt Enable synchronization: 1 (Yes) 0 (No) Range 0 None Default Notes N/A for external neighbors N/A for internal neighbors.

Enter the neighbor cell frequency pgsm type: egsm dcs1800 pcs1900 Enter the BCCH frequency number: 1 to 124 for GSM900 1 to 124 for EGSM900 512 to 885 for DCS1800 512 to 710 for PCS1900 Enter base station identity code (bsic): 0 to 63

None A value MUST be entered at this prompt.

N/A for internal neighbors

None A value MUST be entered at this prompt. None A value MUST be entered at this prompt.

N/A for internal neighbors

Enter MS transmit power maximum:

5 to 39 (odd values only) for GSM900 0 to 30 (even values only) for DCS1800 and PCS1900 0 to 63

N/A for internal neighbors

Enter neighbor receive level minimum:

rxlev_min_def Required for external of neighbor cell neighbors ho_margin_def Required for external of neighbor cell neighbors Refer to the description of the ho_margin_def parameter. 0 (No) Only prompted if inner_zone_alg for the source cell is set to 2, and the neighbor is being added to the SACCH list Only prompted if Does the neighbor have a carrier with an interfering frequency? = 1 (yes). Only prompted if Does the neighbor have a carrier with an interfering frequency? = 1 (yes).
. . . continued

Enter neighbor handover margin: 63 to 63

Does this neighbor have a carrier 0 (No) with an interfering frequency? 1 (Yes)

Enter the threshold for inner zone handover

0 to 63

Enter the margin for inner zone handover

0 to 63

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

481

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Microcellular Database Parameters

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

482

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Database Parameters

Prompt Enter the power budget surrounding cell hreqave: Enable adjacent channel interference avoidance test?: Enter rxlev difference for adjacent channel interference avoidance test: Enter the power budget algorithm type: Enter the adjacent channel interference detection handover margin: Enter the uplink receive level threshold of the serving cell: 1 to 31 0 (No) 1 (Yes)

Range 8

Default

Notes

0 (No) 0

NA if multi-layer handovers is not purchased NA if multi-layer handovers is not purchased This prompt only applies if the previous answer was 1 N/A if multi-layer handovers is not purchased This prompt only appears if pbgt_alg_type=7. N/A if multi-layer handovers is not purchased and pbgt_alg_type 0 3 N/A if multi-layer handovers is not purchased and pbgt_alg_type 0 3 N/A if multi-layer handovers is not purchased and pbgt_alg_type 0 4 N/A if multi-layer handovers is not purchased and pbgt_alg_type 0 5 N/A if multi-layer handovers is not purchased and pbgt_alg_type 0 5 N/A if multi-layer handovers is not purchased and pbgt_alg_type 0 6 N/A if multi-layer handovers is not purchased and pbgt_alg_type 0 6 N/A if multi-layer handovers is not purchased and pbgt_alg_type 0 6
. . . continued

63 to 63

1 to 7 63 to 63

1 neighbor_ho margin None A value MUST be entered at this prompt. None

0 to 63

Enter the downlink receive level threshold of the serving cell: Enter the qualifying time threshold: Enter the qualifying delay time:

0 to 63

0 to 255

0 SACCH periods 0 SACCH periods None A value MUST be entered at this prompt. 0 SACCH periods 0

0 to 255

Enter the neighbor cell receive level threshold:

0 to 63

Enter the delay time:

0 to 255

Enter the handover static offset:

0 to 127

Enter the handover dynamic offset:

0 to 127

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

483

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Microcellular Database Parameters

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

484

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Database Parameters

Prompt Enter neighbor congestion handover margin:

Range 63 to 63 To disable congestion handovers to this neighbor, set the value to 63

Default

Notes

ho_margin_cell Value should be less than or of neighbor cell equal to the ho_margin_cell of the neighbor cell. This prompt is only presented if directed retry or congestion relief is purchased. 1 N/A when adding internal neighbors This prompt is only presented if directed retry or congestion relief is purchased. This prompt is only presented if the Extended Range Cells feature is unrestricted.

Is directed retry allowed at this external neighbor cell?:

1 = Yes 0 = No

Enter the Range of the neighbor cell:

normal extended

Normal

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

485

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Microcellular Database Parameters

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

add_neighbor In order that the correct integer values are added in the add_neighbor command prompts, the following is useful: In the prompts for timers in algorithms 4, 5 and 6. Then 0 to 255 equates to: 0 SACCH multiframes= 0 secs 1 SACCH multiframes= 480 msecs 2 SACCH multiframes= 960 msecs . . 255 SACCH multiframes= 122.4 secs

In prompts for thresholds in algorithms 3 and 5. Then 0 to 63 equates to: 0= 110 db 1= 109 db 2= 108 db . . 63= 47 db

In prompts for offsets in algorithms 6. Then 0 to 127 equates to: 0= 0 db 1= 1 db 2= 2 db . . 127= 127 db

486

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Database Parameters

Microcellular Database Parameters

adap_ho_alt_trigger_rxqual

Used to enable or disable adaptive quality handovers, based on alternate trigger values.
adap_ho_pbgt

Used to enable or disable adaptive power budget handovers.


adap_ho_rxlev

Used to enable or disable adaptive level handovers.


adap_ho_rxqual

Used to enable or disable adaptive quality handovers.


adap_trigger_hop_rxqual_dl

Used to set the value of the adaptive downlink receive quality hopping handover trigger.
adap_trigger_hop_rxqual_ul

Used to set the value of the adaptive uplink receive quality hopping handover trigger.
adap_trigger_pbgt

Used to set the value of the adaptive power budget handover trigger.
adap_trigger_rxlev_dl

Used to set the value of the adaptive downlink receive level handover trigger.
adap_trigger_rxlev_ul

Used to set the value of the adaptive uplink receive level handover trigger.
adap_trigger_rxqual_dl

Used to set the value of the adaptive downlink receive quality handover trigger.
adap_trigger_rxqual_ul

Used to set the value of the adaptive uplink receive quality handover trigger.
ho_margin_type5

Used to set the value of the handover margin for the new type 5 power budget handover algorithm.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

487

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Microcellular Database Parameters

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

use_neighbor_pbgt hreqave In order that the sites unaffected by the microcellular deployment can use their existing PBGT calculation the chg_element use_neighbor_pbgt_hreqave flag can be used. This can be used in the Pbgt calculation for the neighbor Rxlev_dl

Note:
In Software Release GSR2 onwards this parameter is not restricted to the microcellular purchasable option.

488

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Database Parameters

Microcellular Database Parameters

use_neighbor_pbgt_hreqave
use_neighbor_pbgt_hreqav <*> <site ID> <Cell_number>

<*>= 0 or 1 <site ID> = 1 to 40 <cell number> = GLOBAL CELL ID 0- Pbgt decision uses hreqave value entered in chg_act_alg_data surround_cell (Software bin defined by decision_1_p_bgt_rxlev_av_h for the neighbor side of the Pbgt calculation.) 1- Pbgt decision uses hreqave value entered in add_neighbor for the neighbor side of the Pbgt calculation.

Note:

This only affects the neighbor value of rxlev_dl in the Pbgt calculation, not the values used in Criteria 1 and Criteria 2.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

489

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Microcellular Database Parameters

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

en_incom_ho This flag is not a purchasable microcellular option but it is a useful parameter to be aware of. It is enetered in add_cell. The flag enables/disables incoming handovers to a cell (regardless of selective_cell_bar_access_class flag).

490

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Database Parameters

Microcellular Database Parameters

en_incom_ho <*> <*>= 0 or 1

0- Incoming handovers are not allowed. 1- Incoming handovers are allowed

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

491

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Microcellular Database Parameters

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Exercise
S The aim of this exercise is to complete a database with suitable levels (for Add_Neighbor) using the microcellular principles considered in the course. The strategy for all mobiles is that when idle, they are to be served by the macrocell layer. Fast moving mobiles are to be discouraged from handing into the microcells. Slow moving mobiles in dedicated mode are to be served by the microcell layer. You may only use the add_neighbor command to complete the task. The following information is to be considered: Rxlev on street: MACROCELL 75 dbm MICROCELL 60 dbm In building 80dbm Fast moving mobiles spend no more than ten seconds in the microcells (A SACCH multiframe period is 480 msecs). All microcells are under the control of a separate BSC from that of the macrocell. All cells are in the same location area. The system is GSM 900. The ncell_proc flag is set to 0 in all microcells. Consider the in-building microcell may radiate through the walls to the street.

S S

S S S S S S

492

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Database Parameters

Microcellular Exercise

FAST MS

MACROCOVERAGE (CELL 1)

INBUILDING CELL 5

FAST MS

MICROCELL 2

SERVER 0

MICROCELL 3

MICROCELL 4

PEDESTRIAN WALKWAY

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

493

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Microcellular Database Parameters

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

add_neighbour srccell_id xxx xx xxx xx0 neighbor_cell_id xxx xx xxx xx1 Placement _ _ _ _ list type _ _ _ _ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

494

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Database Parameters

add_neighbour srccell_id xxx xx xxx xx0 neighbor_cell_id xxx xx xxx xx2 Placement _ _ _ _ list type _ _ _ _ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

495

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Microcellular Database Parameters

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

add_neighbour srccell_id xxx xx xxx xx0 neighbor_cell_id xxx xx xxx xx3 Placement _ _ _ _ list type _ _ _ _ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

496

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Database Parameters

add_neighbour srccell_id xxx xx xxx xx0 neighbor_cell_id xxx xx xxx xx4 Placement _ _ _ _ list type _ _ _ _ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

497

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Microcellular Database Parameters

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

add_neighbour srccell_id xxx xx xxx xx0 neighbor_cell_id xxx xx xxx xx5 Placement _ _ _ _ list type _ _ _ _ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

498

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular Database Parameters

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

499

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief


Directed retry
The GSM implementation of standard directed retry allows the simultaneous handling of call setup assignment and handover procedures, by allowing a handover from an SDCCH to a TFC. Essentially this feature allows a MS to be handed from an SDCCH in one cell that has no TFC channel capacity available at call setup (for that MS) to a TFC channel in another cell. This feature will not be activated unless the Assignment Request (for that MS) is queued awaiting resource (i.e. All TFC resources in the cell are utilized). It is possible to enable this feature such that it will only allow movement of an MS to cells internal to the BSS. This implementation has no impact on the A-interface signalling and for this reason can be used with an existing MSC configuration. If this feature is implemented to allow the MS to be handed to an external cell, then it requires the Handover Required message to carry a cause of directed retry. To instruct the mobile to move the Handover Command carrying the channel mode element is sent to the mobile. The channel mode element indicates to the mobile that the target channel supports either speech, signalling or data. Of course a directed retry handover will not be initiated unless the MS has reported a strong enough neighbor that meets a congestion relief criteria. If directed retry is enabled and the BSS receives an Assignment Request and no TFC channels are available then the Assignment Request is queued regardless of queuing being enabled in add_cell. If a TFC becomes available whilst the neighbors are being processed then the queuing procedure is followed and the directed retry procedure is aborted. If queuing is disabled in the BSS, the BSS will perform an internal queuing procedure, if queuing is enabled normal queuing shall be performed. If the BSS is using internal queuing, it will not send a Queuing Indication message. If all attempts at directed retry fail or no valid neighbors are reported then the TFC request will remain queued for the remainder of the relevant queuing timer.

Congestion relief
This feature consists of two congestion relief procedures (they are mutually exclusive) that can be enabled independently or in conjunction with Directed Retry. If the MS requiring a TFC channel has not had the opportunity to report a neighbor that is good enough to hand to, then the BSS may force another MS to handover from the congested cell to free up a TFC channel. Of course this MS that is in an established call is only forced to handover if it has a neighbor that meets the congestion handover criteria. If no calls meet the congestion handover criteria, no handovers shall be initiated. The following options are available: 1. 2. The maximum number of handovers initiated by this method is the number of queued requests in the congested cell. The maximum number of handovers initiated by this method is the number of calls meeting the congestion handover criteria in the congested cell.

4100

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief

Micro BSS Macro BSS

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4101

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Congestion handover criteria


The handover criteria for both of the above features can be specified on a per cell basis. A new margin is prompted in add_neigbor, this is called the congestion_handover_margin. If the latest rxlev_dl average of any of the neighbors (for any MSs established in a call on the congested cell) meet criteria 1 then they are further processed through a modified criteria 2 (Pbgt Congestion_Handover_Margin > 0). If any neighbors qualify using directed retry or congestion relief they can be used to move MSs or a MS.

Emergency and EGSM calls in cells using directed retry


If the emergency call pre-emption feature is enabled, emergency calls will not be handed over for congestion reasons unless all the calls in the cell are emergency calls. In the case of all emergency calls in a cell, pre-emption cannot occur so a handover shall be attempted to service the incoming emergency call. An MS on a EGSM channel shall not be handover from an EGSM frequency due to congestion unless an EGSM capable MS is queued.

Microcellular purchasable option and directed retry


When directed retry and or congestion relief are allowed, if a neighbor qualifies for a congestion handover prior to satisfying the microcellular algorithm selected for that cell, a handover will be attempted (cause directed retry). A way of avoiding this would be to give the microcell neighbors a high congestion_handover_margin.

TCH flow control


It is advisable, if the maximum benefit of directed retry or congestion relief is to be had the tch_flow_control should be disabled.

Directed retry and congestion relief database parameters


Enabling Directed Retry dr_preference
This is a chg_element command and is entered at the BSC, it is used to enable the feature and to determine if the MSC is to be involved in the procedure as necessary. This is a purchasable option and as such it defaults to off. By entering this command it determines if handovers can be forced to either internal neighbors or internal and external neighbors.
4102

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief Database Parameters

Enabling Directed Retry

chg_element dr_preference <*> <bsc or 0>

0: Directed retry disabled (default). 1: Directed retry enabled.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4103

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Directed retry and congestion relief database parameters


dr_standard_congest
This is a chg_element command that can only be entered on a per cell basis if the dr_preference is enabled at the BSC. This element enables or disables the standard directed retry feature on a per cell basis. If this is command is enabled within the BSS then the timer that that awaits an Assignment Complete message may require modification (i.e. increasing) in the MSC

dr_ho_during_assign
The BSS has the ability to enable and disable handovers triggered during an assignment procedure. These handovers would be from SDCCH to TFC in target cell. This feature does not effect the existing SDCCH to SDCCH handovers enabled in add_cell. If an intra-cell handover is needed during an assignment procedure and the assignment request is queued, the BSS will perform the intra-cell handover. If an inter-cell handover is needed during the assignment procedure and the Assignment Command has not been sent to the MS, an inter-cell handover is initiated. No Handover Performed message shall be sent to the MSC as the Assignment Complete from the new cell contains all the necessary information. If the Assignment Command has been sent to the MS, the BSS shall wait for either the Assignment Complete or Failure message from the MS before initiating the handover.

4104

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief Database Parameters

chg_ele dr_standard_congest<*><site id><cell id>


* 0: Disabled (default) 1: Handover the MS queuing on an SDCCH awaiting a TFC channel to another cell in the case of congestion.

chg_element dr_ho_during_assign <*> <site id> cell_number=<cell id>


* 0: Ignore the need for a handover until the assignment procedure is complete (default) 1: Act on the need for a handover during the assignment procedure. (If directed retry or congestion relief is enabled)

Note: The MSC may require to increase the timer waiting for Assignment Complete messages from the BSS when this element is enabled.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4105

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Directed retry and congestion relief database parameters


Valid_Candidate_period
This is the timer that controls the duration that qualified candidates for handovers due to congestion are valid before HDPC is queried for new candidates. It is wise to set this parameter lower than the assignment request queued timer bss_map_t11 (rrsm_timer_value, 12 prior to 1.5.0.x_).

4106

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief Database Parameters

chg_element valid_candidate_period <*> <site id> cell_number=<global cell id>


* 1 to 1000000 ms (default is 4000)

Note: This timer was known as rrsm_timer_value, 1 prior to 1.5.0.x.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4107

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Directed retry and congestion relief database parameters


ho_exist_congest
This is a chg_element command entered on a per cell basis to enable the congestion relief (directed retry alternative). This allows the BSS to attempt to handover MSs to another cell when they are established on on a call. This frees up a TFC channel or channels as required for a MS or MSs queued on an SDCCH awaiting a TFC channel in that cell. This feature has two implementations each is mutually exclusive. The first thing to note is this feature will only move established calls that have met the criteria required to move. The implementations are: 1. 2. The total number of established MSs on TFCs forced to move is equal to the number of MSs that are in the queue awaiting a TFC. The total number of established MSs on TFCs forced to move is equal to the total number meeting the criteria.

4108

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief Database Parameters

chg_element ho_exist_congest <option*><site> cell_number = <cell id)


* 0- disabled (default) 1- Attempt to handover as many calls as the number of assignment requests. 2- Attempt to handover as many calls as meet the congestion handover criteria.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4109

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Directed retry and congestion relief database parameters


handover_required_curr_ch
This parameter must align with the settings of the MSC regarding the contents of the Handover Required message from the BSS. This parameter is set on a per BSS basis, it determines if the current channel information element is included in the Handover Required message. This element is found in GSM08:08. The target BSS on receipt of a Handover Required message composes the requested channel type with the current__channel_element and is they are different it will include the channel_mode_element in the Handover_Command. This is done so that the MSs can determine whether that are moving to a speech, data or signalling channel.

dr_chan_mode_modify
This element is entered at the BSC and determines the need for a channel mode modify procedure after a successful handover in which the channel mode changed ( GSM 04:08 sect 7.3.7 ). The BSS shall read this database parameter only in the case of a successful handover in which the channel mode changed, the MS is phase 1, and the new channel mode is full rate speech. Typically changing the channel mode during a handover occurs only during a directed retry handover that has successfully completed to this BSS during directed retry procedure. This is required as some MSs cannot interpret the channel_mode element of the handover_command.

msc_preference
This element is used to set the message flow sequence used on the A-interface for external handovers during the assignment procedure. This element must align with the MSC expectations. The MSC implementation may depend on whether queuing is enabled in the cell. This parameter is only applicable when dr_preference is enabled at the BSC.

4110

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief Database Parameters chg_element handover_required_curr_ch <*> <bsc or 0>
* 0: 1: Disabled (default). Include the current channel element in the Handover Required message (GSM 08:08).

chg_element dr_chan_mode _modify <*> <bsc or 0>


* 0: 1: Disabled ( default ) Perform channel mode modify procedure after a handover for a phase 1 MS in which the channel mode changed to full rate speech.

chg_element msc_preference <*> <site id> cell_number=<cellid>


* 0: 1: 2: The BSS shall send only the Handover Required message with the cause directed retry to the MSC (default ). The BSS shall send only the Handover Required message with the cause of the handover to the MSC. The BSS shall send an Assignment Failure message with cause directed retry before sending a Handover Required message with the cause directed retry to the MSC. The BSS shall send an Assignment Failure message with cause directed retry before sending a Handover Required message with the cause of the handover to the MSC. The BSS shall send an Assignment Failure message with cause directed retry after sending a Handover Required message with the cause directed retry to the MSC. The BSS shall send an Assignment Failure message with the cause directed retry after sending a Handover Required message with the cause of the handover to the MSC.
4111

3:

4:

5:

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Enhanced congestion relief procedures


These new procedures take the form of expanding the decision process for handovers to include the state of congestion at the target cell and incorporate the added dimension of time over which the decision is to be implemented. The enhancements are shown in the following procedures.

Non-imperative Handover Rejection


The BSS will reject incoming non-imperative handovers if it will cause congestion relief procedures to be triggered. Also the BSS will not allow an incoming handover if the reason for that handover is congestion relief and the handover itself will cause congestion relief procedures to activate at the target cell.

Congestion Relief Handover Retry


The source cell will not attempt a congestion relief handover, for a period of time, to a target cell which had rejected a previous handover attempt, imperative and congestion relief. A new timer element retry_candidate_period, is used to control this period of time. It does not however affect any imperative handover retries.

Incoming Handover Requests


Congest_at_target has been implemented to control the behaviour of the target cell should it reject a handover request either imperative or congestion relief. If the BSS target cell rejects an incoming handover because the handover would trigger congestion relief procedures, the target cell attempts to inform the source cell of its future, intra BSS only accessibility status. If the target cell is configured to optionally invoke congestion relief procedures after rejecting the handover request, then it may be capable of handling the necessary handovers. If a BSS target cell accepts an incoming handover due to congestion relief and this handover itself triggers the target cell congestion relief procedures, that target cell does not trigger any handover attempts back to the source cell which triggered the congestion relief to begin with.

Handover Retry
Congest_at_source enables the course cell to optionally retry an imperative, intra-BSS only, handover to target cells which rejected the inital handover request and initiated a congestion relief procedure.

Multiband Mobile Station Redirection


mb_tch_congest_thres controls the percentage point at which multiband mobile stations start to be redirected to the preferred band. The BSS does not allow an incoming band preference handover should the servicing of that handover cause this percentage to be exceeded.

4112

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief Database Parameters

S congest_at_target <*><location><cell_desc>
* 0: 1: The system will take no action if the cell rejects a handover request. The system will invoke congestion relief procedures if this cell rejects a handover request.

S congest_at_source <*><location><cell_desc>
* 0: 1: The system takes no actions if a given candidate rejects a handover. If an imperative handover is needed the source cell retries candidates which were previously unable to serve the handover request.

S retry_cand_prd<*><location>cell=<cell_desc> 1000000ms S mb_tch_congest_thres <*><location><cell_desc>


* 0-100: (Percentage)

All values set using chg_element

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4113

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Directed retry and congestion relief database parameters


add_neighbor
If either the directed retry feature, the congestion relief feature or both are enabled then the add_neighbor command is modified. The prompts depend on whether the neighbor is internal or external. If the neighbor is internal then add_neighbor will prompt for the congestion_ho_margin , its default is the same as the per neighbor value of ho_margin. To disable handovers for congestion to this cell set this value to its maximum, to make it easy to trigger a congestion handover to this cell set it lower than the ho_margin of that cell. If the neighbor is external then add_neighbor will prompt for congestion_ho_margin and also as to whether directed retry is allowed to that external cell is allowed or not.

4114

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief

Directed Retry and Congestion Relief Database Parameters

add_neighbor

add_neighbor <source cell id> <target cell> <placement> <ba_list> sync: BCCH ARFCN: BSIC: Ms_txpwr_max: Rxlev_min_cell: ho_margin: power budget HREQAVE: Algorithm type: Algorithm specific prompts: congestion_ho_margin: Is directed retry allowed at this external neighbor site: Internal only ( 0 or 1 ) External only ( 1 - 124 ) External only External only External and Internal Optional ( 0 to 63 ) External and Internal Optional ( -63 to 63 ) If microcellular purchased ( 0 to 255 ) If microcellular purchased ( 1 to 6 ) If microcellular purchased ( -63 to 63 ) External only (0 = No and 1 = Yes)

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4115

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Directed Retry

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Directed Retry
The standard GSM Directed Retry procedure is used when a call is on an SDCCH and the BSS is unable to assign the call to a TCH due to congestion in the cell. In this case, CP sends a force handover request message to the Radio Subsystem for that channel. The Radio Subsystem searches for a valid neighbour using the congestion handover margin and the last received measurement report. If a valid neighbour exists, Radio Subsystem initiates the handover by sending a handover recognized message to CP with the cause set to Congestion Standard Directed Retry. The diagram opposite shows the message flow for the Standard GSM Directed Retry as handled by the BSS internally.

4116

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Directed Retry

Standard GSM Directed Retry

MSC
Assignment Request

CP

RSS

MS

No Free TCH in the Cell Force Handover Request Check for any valid neighbours of the call on the specified channel using the per neighbour congestion handover margin

Handover Recognized CP allocates a TCH on the target cell and activates the channel

Handover Command Handover continues to target cell as usual Assignment Complete Handover Command

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4117

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Congestion Relief Type 1

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Congestion Relief Type 1


This is an alternative method of finding a TCH for an MS on an SDCCH in a cell where all TCHs are in use. Since the MS may not have been on the SDCCH for a long enough period of time to report neighbours, this method involves selecting handover candidates from the established calls on TCHs in the congested cell. When CP detects that a TCH is not available, CP sends candidate list query messages per carrier to the RSS. The RSS searches through all active TCHs for calls which qualify for a handover using the per neighbour congestion handover margins. RSS compiles a list of candidates and their calculated power budget values, and returns this information in a candidate list response to CP. If no candidates are found, RSS responds with a candidate list response message containing an empty list. CP then initiates handovers for indicated calls as needed. In this case, the RSS does not send a handover recognised message. The diagram opposite shows the message flow for the Congestion Relief Type 1 as handled by the BSS internally.

4118

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Congestion Relief Type 1

Congestion Relief Type 1

MSC
Assignment Request

CP
No Free TCH in the Cell

RSS RSS

MS

Candidate List Query Candidate List Query

Check for any valid neighbours of all calls on TCHs using the per neighbour congestion Candidate List Response Candidate List Response CP initiates handovers for qualified calls as needed to reduce congestion Handover Command Handover Command

Handover Command

Handover Command Handover Command

Handover Command Handover Command Assignment Complete Handover Command Handover Command

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4119

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Congestion Relief Type 2

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Congestion Relief Type 2


This type of congestion relief is triggered by CP sending a force handover request message with an invalid channel number specified. In this case, the RSS shall walk through all active TCHs searching for candidates for the handover using the per neighbour congestion handover margins. For each call, which has one or more valid neighbours, the RSS shall send a handover recognised message to CP with the cause set to congestion Handover All TCHs. The diagram opposite shows the message flow for the Congestion Relief Type 2 as handled by the BSS internally.

4120

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Congestion Relief Type 2

Congestion Relief Type 2

MSC
Assignment Request

CP
No Free TCH in the Cell Force Handover Request

RSS. .RSS

MS

Force Handover Request

Check for any valid neighbours of all calls on TCHs using the per neighbour congestion handover margin. A handover recognized message is generated for each call with a valid neighbour

Handover Recognized Handover Recognized

Handover Recognized Handover Recognized Assignment Complete

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4121

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Concentric Cells

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Concentric Cells
The concentric cell feature enables much tighter frequency re-use planning, which gives great advantages in the efficient use of the available frequency spectrum. In effect this feature means that one cell is present in both the macro and micro layers. At least two carrier frequencies are required for each concentric cell, the BCCH carrier being in the macro layer and a second carrier in the micro layer. Assuming that this minimum configuration is provided, further non-BCCH carriers can be included in either layer. As the BCCH carrier must always be transmitted at maximum cell power, the BCCH carrier forms the outer zone otherwise known as zone 0, while the non-BCCH carrier(s) in the micro layer provide a smaller coverage area known as the inner zone or zone 1. Using an intra cell handover, traffic can be moved from zone 0, where it originates, to zone 1, or back out again.

4122

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Concentric Cells

Concentric Cells

Zone 0 (Macro)

BTS
Zone 1 (Micro)

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4123

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Concentric Cells

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Frequency re-use advantages


The major advantage of the concentric cell architecture is that the frequency re-use plan of the network can be much more efficient. This is because the inner zone (ie zone 1) of each cell does not border onto any other cells (the only possible handovers into or out of this zone are intra cell to or from zone 0 of the same cell). Therefore the inner zone of every cell in the network could conceivably be using the same set of carrier frequencies.

4124

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Concentric Cells

Frequency Re-use Advantages

Zone 0 (BCCH, macro) Zone 1 (micro) BTS site

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4125

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Concentric Cells

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Zone interaction
All call originations, incoming power based inter cell handovers, incoming directed retry channel assignments etc. always go into the outer zone (zone 0), from where they can move into the inner zone (zone 1) if they meet the necessary criteria This intra-cell handover can be triggered either for power reasons or due to interference.

4126

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Concentric Cells

Zone Interaction

S All calls originate in outer zone S Intra cell handover between zones: Power based algorithm Interference based algorithm

S chg_ele inner_zone_alg <*> <site> cell_number = <cell desc> <*> 0 = Disable inner zone 1 = Power based algorithm 2 = Interference based algorithm S Further prompts appear for relevant parameters in both cases

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4127

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Concentric Cells

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Zone configuration
The two zones of a concentric cell are configured as follows:

Zone 0 (outer):
S S S Maximum downlink Tx power= BCCH power (max_tx_bts) Maximum uplink Tx power= max_tx_ms Non-BCCH carriers can use downlink adaptive power control

Zone 1 (inner)
S S S Maximum downlink Tx power= trx_pwr_red (qmax_tx_bts) Maximum uplink Tx power= ms_txpwr_max_inner Each carrier can have a different trx_pwr_red value, giving multiple sub-zones inside zone 1

All control channels in outer zone.

4128

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Concentric Cells

Zone Configuration

Zone 0 (outer)
S maximum downlink Tx power= BCCH level (max_tx_bts)

S Maximum uplink Tx power= max_tx_ms

S Non BCCH carriers can use APC DL

Zone 1 (inner)
S maximum downlink Tx power= trx_pwr_red (q max_tx_bts)

S Maximum uplink Tx power= ms_txpwr_max_inner

S Each carrier can have a different trx_pwr_red value, giving multiple sub zones inside zone 1

ALL CONTROL CHANNELS IN OUTER ZONE

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4129

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Concentric Cells

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Power based handover algorithms


In the power based intra-cell handover algorithm carriers in the inner zone are given reduced maximum uplink and downlink transmit levels, which define the coverage area of the inner zone. The decision to move traffic between zones is based on the downlink and uplink receive levels with respect to the serving cell, as well as database parameters, using the formulae shown.

4130

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Concentric Cells

Power Based Handover into Zone 1

Zone 0

Zone 1

Rxlev_dl > rxlev_dl_zone + zone_ho_hyst + (bs_txpwr - bs_txpwr_max_inner) AND Rxlev_ul > rxlev_ul_zone + zone_ho_hyst + (ms_txpwr - ms_txpwr_max_inner) where: rxlev_dl/ul_zone= minimum rxlev in inner zone zone_ho_hyst= inner zone handover margin bs/ms_txpwr= current tx power in outer zone bs_txpwr_max_inner= TRX maximum power capability - trx_pwr_red ms_txpwr_max_inner is defined in the database
EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems 4131

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Concentric Cells

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

4132

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Concentric Cells

Power Based handover into Zone 0

Zone 0

Zone 1

AND bs_txpwr_max_inner Rxlev_dl < Rxlev_dl_zone AND BS_txpwr= bs_txpwr_max_inner OR Rxlev_ul < Rxlev_ul_zone AND ms_txpwr= ms_txpwr_max_inner where: rxlev_ul/dl_zone= minimum rxlev in inner zone bs_txpwr_max_inner= TRX maximum - power trx_pwr_red ms_txpwr_max_inner is defined in the database bs/ms_txpwr= current tx power in inner zone

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4133

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Concentric Cells

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Interference based handover algorithm


In this algorithm, the coverage area of the inner zone is defined by the interference levels from neighbouring cells using the same or adjacent frequencies. The decision to move traffic between zones is based on path loss calculations between the mobile and the serving cell. For concentric cell inter zone handovers, the usual power budget formula is modified to remove consideration of the mobiles transmit power capacity, as follows: Pbgt(n)= (ms_txpwr_max rxlev_dlpwr_c_d) (ms_txpwr_max(n) rxlev_ncell(n)) where pwr_c_d= maximum downlink Tx power in outer zone actual downlink Tx power ms_txpwr_max= maximum mobile transmit power defined per cell

4134

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Concentric Cells

Interference Based Handovers

PBGT(n)= (ms_txpwr_max - rxlev_dl - pw_c_d) (ms_txpwr_max(n) - rxlev_ncell(n)) S negative result 5 good path (low loss) to serving cell N mobile is good candidate for inner zone S Further test performed to prevent mobile from experiencing or causing interference: ms_pwr_factor= rxlev_ul + (ordered level - used level)- l_rxlev_ul_p S Measurement and calculated Pbgt(n) value used differently for UL and DL for handovers into each zone.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4135

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Concentric Cells

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Interference based handover into zone 1


In deciding whether a call is suitable to be served by an inner zone channel, the BSS (HDPC) must satisfy itself that both of the conditions opposite are true. However, it should be noted that they must be true in relation to all neighbours that contain a co- or adjacent-channel interfering carrier frequency.

4136

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Concentric Cells

Interference Based Handover into Zone 1

Zone 0

Zone 1

HO if BOTH are true: S Uplink Pbgt(n) + ms_pwr_factor + inner_zone_threshold(n)+ inner_zone_margin (n) p 0 S Downlink rxlev_dl+pwr_c_d - (rxlev_ncell(n) + inner_zone_threshold(n) + inner_zone_margin(n)) q 0
EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems 4137

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Concentric Cells

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Guard timer
Since the MS requires some time to decode the BSIC for neighbour cells, a guard timer (neighbor_report_timer) has been introduced. This timer is started when the MS accesses a dedicated channel. Prior to expiry of this timer, a handover to the inner zone can only be initiated if the BSS has received measurement information and the handover criteria are met for all of the defined interfering neighbours. Once the timer has expired, the BSS assumes that any neighbour which has not been reported by the MS is not strong enough to prohibit handover into the inner zone. As long as all reported interfering neighbours meet the specified criteria, the handover into the inner zone is initiated.

4138

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Concentric Cells

Guard Timer

neighbor_report_timer (0 - 255 SACCH multiframes) S Allows time to decode BSIC of interfering neighbours

If neighbor_report_timer not expired HO to inner zone only if measurements received (and criteria satisfied) for all defined interfering neighbours.

If neighbour_report_timer expired Assumes any unreported neighbour is not strong enough to cause interference, normal HO rules apply

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4139

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Concentric Cells

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Interference based handover into zone 0


In order to hand a call over to the outer zone, either of the conditions shown opposite must be true for any of the neighbours containing interfering carrier frequencies.

4140

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Concentric Cells

Interference Based Handover into Zone 0

Zone 0

Zone 1

HO if EITHER is true: S Uplink PBGT(n) + ms_pwr_factor + inner_zone_threshold(n)>0 S Downlink rxlev_dl + Pwr_C_D - (rxlev_ncell(n) + inner_zone_threshold (n)) <0

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4141

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Concentric Cells

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Power control
If the call is active on a channel in the inner zone, the BSS performs an additional check prior to ordering a power decrement. When the BSS power control algorithm determines that the downlink power should be decremented, a check will be performed to verify that the power decrement will not cause the MS to subsequently require a handover to the outer zone. The power control decrement is only allowed if the following is TRUE for ALL neighbours which have been identified as interferers: (RXLEV_DLpower decrementRXLEV_NCELL(N))> inner_zone_threshold(N) If the call is active on a channel in the inner zone, and the BTS is not transmitting at the maximum power level the following equation is evaluated for ALL neighbours which have been identified as interferers: (RXLEV_DL + power increment RXLEV_NCELL(N )>inner_zone_threshold(N) If a power increment is necessary to satisfy the above equation for ALL interfering neighbours, the power level increment is ordered. The BSS selects the minimum power increment which satisfies the above equation for ALL interfering neighbours. The power increment can only be ordered if the ordered power level remains below the maximum transmit level.

4142

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Concentric Cells

Downlink Power Control in the Inner Zone

Decrease if:
rxlev_dl - power decrement - rxlev_ncell(n) > inner_zone_threshold (n)

Increase if:
rxlev_dl + power increment - rxlev_ncell(n) > inner_zone_threshold (n)

Must satisfy the above for all interfering neighbours

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4143

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Concentric Cells

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Channel allocation rules


The following Channel Allocation requirements are necessities to ensure correct implementation of the Concentric Cells feature: S A database threshold, outer_zone_usage_level, has been introduced which allows the operator to specify the level of traffic channel congestion which must be reached in the outer zone prior to the use of the inner zone resources. Since inner zone frequencies may have a tighter re-use pattern, this allows the operator to only use those frequencies more prone to interference if the cell is congested. If the operator chooses to use inner zone resources whenever a MS is qualified, regardless of outer usage, the database parameter outer_zone_usage_level can be set to 0. Inter-cell handovers are only allocated resources from the outer zone of the cell when the Power Based Algorithm is selected. If there are no resources available in the outer zone, the handover request is denied. If additional neighbours have been provided in the candidate list, the BSS proceeds t the next qualified candidate. If the Interference Based Algorithm is active in the target cell of an inter-cell handover, the BSS allocates an inner zone resource for the call if the following criteria have been met: S The MSs reported RXLEV for the target cell exceeds direct_inner_zone_threshold . The outer_zone_usage_level has been met at the target cell.

When an intra-cell handover is initiated due to interference and intra-cell handovers are allowed, the BSS attempts to move the MS to another channel within the same zone of the cell. If the MS is on a channel in Zone 1 using the Power Based Algorithm and these inner zone carriers have different maximum downlink transmit levels, the MS is only moved to a carrier with in a maximum transmit level which is greater than or equal to the current carrier. If there is no suitable available resource in the same zone and the cell is in the inner zone, the BSS then attempts to allocate a resource from the outer zone. A call served by the outer zone is not moved to the inner zone. If no available resource can be found, the handover request is denied. The BSS always selects an outer zone channel for an Immediate Assignment, even if a traffic channel is allocated. If there are no resources available in the outer zone, the BSS sends an Immediate Assignment Reject. The BSS selects a call from the outer zone to be pre-empted for the emergency call pre-emption procedure.

4144

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Concentric Cells

Channel Allocation Rules


S outer_zone_usage_level % TCH congestion in outer zone before HO to inner zone allowed S Inter cell handovers always into outer zone with power based algorithm. S Inter cell handovers and TCH assignments can go straight into inner zone, with interference based algorithm, if: 1. 2. rxlev_dl > direct_inner_zone_threshold outer_zone_usage_level exceeded

S Normal intracell handovers move traffic to a new channel in the same zone. S All immediate assignments in outer zone. S option_emergency_preempt always preempts an outer zone call. S TCH flow control, congestion relief, dynamic channel reconfiguration all happen in the outer zone only. S intra_cell_handover_allowed parameter irrelevant for inter zone handovers

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4145

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Concentric Cells

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Channel allocation rules


S The BSS may determine that a call is qualified to be moved to an inner zone channel prior to initiation of the Assignment procedure in one of three ways: If the Power Based Algorithm is used and the defined conditions for handover into the inner zone have been met. If the Interference Based Algorithm is used and the defined conditions for handover into the inner zone have been met. If the Interference Based Algorithm is used and the receive level as reported by the MS exceeds the database parameter direct_inner_zone_threshold . This mechanism allows the BSS to assign the MS an inner zone resource prior to receipt of neighbour cell reports from the MS. This direct assignment can be disabled by setting the threshold to the maximum value in the database.

The traffic channel flow control, congestion relief, and dynamic reconsideration features use the traffic channels usage in the outer zone ONLY to determine of the cell is congested. Congestion relief procedures only imitate handovers for calls in the outer zone. To avoid barring of access classes prior to using the inner zone resources, the outer_zone_usage_level should be set to a lower value than both the normal_overload_threshold and the critical_overload_threshold used by the flow control feature. The BSS does not consider the intra_cell_handover_allowed flag when initiating inter-zone handovers. Inter-zone handovers can be enabled or disabled separately using the new database parameters included with the implementation of this feature. If a zone handover attempt into the inner zone fails due to congestion (that is, no inner zone resource available) an the call qualifies for an interference handover, the call will not handover due to interference if the intra_cell_handover_allowed flag is disabled.

4146

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Concentric Cells

Channel Allocation Rules


S outer_zone_usage_level % TCH congestion in outer zone before HO to inner zone allowed S Inter cell handovers always into outer zone with power based algorithm. S Inter cell handovers and TCH assignments can go straight into inner zone, with interference based algorithm, if: 1. 2. rxlev_dl > direct_inner_zone_threshold outer_zone_usage_level exceeded

S Normal intracell handovers move traffic to a new channel in the same zone. S All immediate assignments in outer zone. S option_emergency_preempt always pre empts an outer zone call. S TCH flow control, congestion relief, dynamic channel reconfiguration all happen in the outer zone only. S intra_cell_handover_allowed parameter irrelevant for inter zone handovers

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4147

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Calculated Handover Power Level

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Calculated Handover Power Level


When a mobile hands over into a new cell, its first transmission into the new cell is transmitted at a certain level. This level can be fixed by the handover_power_level parameter, but this level is often fairly high, resulting in immediate power control activity to reduce the mobiles transmit power. Instead, the mobile can be instructed to use a calculated level that lies inside the power control window right from the start. This facility is set up using the use_derived_ho_power parameter and uses the following formula: Handover power level= min (C+(AB), D, P) where: A= B= C= max_tx_bts of the target cell rxlev_dl from the target cell u_rxlev_ul_p ) l_rxlev_ul_p = centre of the target cells uplink power 2 window max_tx_ms of the target cell power class of the mobile

D= P=

This facility is only supported for intra_BSS handovers.

4148

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Calculated Handover Power Level

Calculated Handover Power Level

use_derived_ho_power=<*> * 0= use handover_power_level 1= use calculated handover level handover level= min (C+(A-B), D, P) where A= B= C= max_tx_bts of target cell rxlev_dl from target cell

centre of target cell's uplink power window D= P= max_tx_ms of target cell power class of mobile

u_rxlev_ul_p ) l_rxlev_ul_p = 2

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4149

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Extended Range Cell

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Extended Range Cell


Motorola supports a software feature called Extended Range Cell or ERC that allows mobiles to use a cell beyond the GSM specified 35 kilometre limit. At distances greater than 35 Km the propagation delay exceeds the standard GSM timing advance of 63 bit periods or 233us. This timing advance is sufficient for the two way propagation delay between the BTS and the MS to be overcome. From distances over 35km, the MSs transmitted signal will begin to arrive in the following timeslot, corrupting the data being processed in both timeslots. With the ERC feature enabled, the BTS expands its receive window to cover both the MS allocated timeslot and the following timeslot. This gives an effective 156 extra bit periods for the propagation delay which increases the maximum cell radius to 121km. In simple terms, it is necessary to use two normal timeslots to form a single extended range timeslot. Using two timeslots allows the BTS to handle additional propagation delay from the mobile. The actual value of timing advance given to the MS can still only go up to 63 bit periods, but as the MSs transmit burst can late by a whole timeslot at the BTS and still be decoded correctly. The extended range cell feature is supported by the SCU, TCU and CTU families of radio.

4150

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Extended Range Cell

Extended Range Cell

The Extended Range Feature extends the valid timing advance served at a cell from 63 bit periods for a normal range cell to 219 bit periods for an extended range cell. For a PGSM / EGSM cell, ERC feature extends the range of the cell from 35km to 121km. Main Operator benefits include; 1. Increased coverage in rural areas without implementing new cell sites. 2. Coverage is possible in untapped areas that were previously uneconomical or simply out of range. e.g. islands, offshore oil platforms, shipping lanes & mountainous areas.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4151

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Timeslot Allocation

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Timeslot Allocation
In an extended range cell, all BCCH and SDCCH control channels are allocated dual timeslot channels. This allows the cell signalling to cover mobiles within the 35Km limit and the extended coverage range (up to 121km). When a mobile originates, it is assigned either a single timeslot or dual timeslot channel, based on the timing advance information. Mobiles can also move between normal range areas and extended range areas based on timing advance information reported. It is recommended that combined control channels be configured for two carrier cells. If noncombined control channels are used the 8 SDCCHs placed on the second carrier would also need to be allocated an extended range cell timeslot. This will reduce the capacity of the cell by either one extended range cell timeslot or two normal range timeslots. It can be assumed that with some extended timeslots configured, that the signalling requirements will be reduced from that of a two carrier cell with all normal timeslot configured. However, this is not to say that it cannot be configured for noncombined where conditions dictate.

4152

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Timeslot Allocation

Timeslot Allocation

Each carrier can have between 0 and 4 extended range timeslots. Starting with timeslot 0 and paired with the following timeslot. All BCCH, CCCH and SDCCH channels must be extended timeslots. Extended Range TCHs will be used when the absolute timing advance is > 63.

CONTROL TS0 TS1 EXTENDED TCH TS2 TS3 EXTENDED TCH TS4 TS5 TS6 TS7

EXTENDED TCH

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4153

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

RF Planning Guidelines

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

RF Planning Guidelines
Most of the GSM900 mobiles in use in networks around the world are Class 4. These give an output power of 2 Watts. However, Class 2 mobiles are still manufactured which give an output of 8 Watts and are able to transmit further. For planning purposes the Class 4 (2W) mobile should be used for consistency The sensitivity of the MS is fixed by the manufacturer and is primarily designed for the GSM specification of a 35km cell. The BTS can, however, be optimized by increasing transmit power. Sensitivity can also be increased through the use of low noise mast head amplifiers.

Another consideration is that the primary propagation method of GSM is Line of Sight (LOS). As such the height of the transmitting / receiving antenna is vital. The simple formula listed shows the minimum height required to reach a specific distance. As an example, if a cell radius of 80km is required over sea, the antenna height, which will allow a line of sight to the horizon, is 500m.

d = (2rh) 1/2

a h d

h = height of antenna r = radius of earth d = horizon distance

4154

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

RF Planning Guidelines

RF Planning Guidelines
Successful extended range cell implementation is achieved by RF planning and system design. The factors for success are: 1. Maximising Transmit Powers 2. Maximising Receiver Sensitivities. Use figures obtained in the link budget to find the acceptable allowable path loss.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4155

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Maximizing Output Power

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Maximizing Output Power


To maximise the output power of the Base Station, single carrier cells can be used. This will avoid the combination losses of multiple carrier cells. This means that the output power at the top of the cabinet could be set to 40 watts (900MHz), giving an increase in signal strength of 3 dB. However, this will limit the capacity handling ability of the cells. For cells where additional carriers are required, air combining can be implemented so that the combination losses are minimised. To maximise transmit and receive powers, high gain directional antennas are should be implemented with a minimum of 16dBi gain, however the exact specifications will depend on the specific application. The antennas should also be mounted as high as is practical. Obviously, the higher the antenna is the larger the propagation distance. Note: Where possible sites should be located on top of hills, etc to gain the height above the average surrounding terrain. This allows for large effective antenna height without the need for high towers. The horizon distance should also be taken into account when deciding the antenna height.

4156

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Maximizing Output Power

Maximizing Output Power

Single carrier cells


S

Avoid the combination losses of multiple carrier cells.

Multiple carrier cells


S

Air combining to minimize combination losses.

Base Station Antennas


S

High gain directional antennas

Low Loss Feeder Cables

Increased coverage
sys12_4_mop

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4157

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Maximizing Receiver Sensitivity

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Maximizing Receiver Sensitivity


Nothing can be done to improve the sensitivity of the mobile phone as it is fixed to the specifications of each manufacturer. Therefore the design figure to be used in the link budget calculations is 102dBm ,as per ETSI specifications. Optimizing the receive path will improve the sensitivity. The exact figure will depend on the specifications of the amplifier used. Motorola 900 and 1800 radios are already designed to exceed the ETSI specifications for BTS sensitivity. In addition to this, the implementation of Low Noise Mast Head Amplifiers will add significantly to the effectiveness of the cell. Low noise amplifiers can give gains of up to 10dBm in the uplink.

4158

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Maximizing Receiver Sensitivity

Maximizing Receiver Sensitivity

MS Sensitivity fixed
S

Link budget design specification of 102dBm.

Low Noise Mast Head Amplifiers


S

Gains of up to 10dBm in uplink.

RF

BiasTee

BTS

Power Distribution Unit (PDU)

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4159

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Extended Range Handovers

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Extended Range Handovers


Motorola has modified the handover candidate ordering algorithm to ensure that mobiles within a predefined radius are assigned to single timeslots. This ensures that the extended range timeslots are reserved for the long range mobiles. New types of handover triggers have been defined to balance the calls between the extended and normal timeslots. When the mobiles TA is >=50, any extended neighbor will be moved to the top of the candidate list. Otherwise the neighbor will be moved to the bottom of the candidate list. This allows the extended range cell to preserve its extended range resources.

4160

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Extended Range Handovers

Extended Range Handovers

IntraCell
Extended to normal handovers Triggered when the mobile moves inside the 35Km zone, i.e. TA < 63. Normal to extended handovers Triggered when the mobile moves beyond 35Km, i.e. TA > 63.

InterCell
Incoming to ERC cell from any cell. The call is assigned to an extended timeslot initially, as the incoming TA is unknown. When TA is determined, an intracell handover to a normal timeslot will occur if TA < 63. Outgoing Handovers from a Normal Cell with ERC Neighbours. When mobiles are beyond a specified distance, e.g. 30Km, the ERC neighbours will be given priority in the candidate list.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4161

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Types of Extended Range Cell

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Types of Extended Range Cell


Isolated Cell
An isolated extended range cell has no neighbors with the normal range zone. For incoming intercell handovers into any ERC, an extended range TCH is always used because the initial TA cannot be determined until the mobile arrives. Isolated Cells will never allow a normal range TCH to be used for incoming handovers

4162

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Types of Extended Range Cell

Types of Extended Range Cell

Isolated Cell
S S

Has no neighbors with the normal range zone. Isolated Cells will never allow a normal range TCH to be used for incoming handovers

NRC ERC NRC

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4163

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Types of Extended Range Cell

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Types of Extended Range Cell


Boundary Cell
A boundary extended range cell is an extended range cell that has overlapping neighbors in its normal range zone, and is needed to provide coverage between those cells. For a boundary extended range cell, if no extended TCHs are available, a normal range TCH will be used if available

4164

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Types of Extended Range Cell

Types of Extended Range Cell

Boundary Cell
S S S

Overlapping neighbors in its normal range zone. Boundary cell is required to provide coverage between those cells. If no extended TCHs are available for handover, a normal range TCH will be used. ( If available .)

NRC

ERC

NRC

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4165

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Extended Range Cell parameters

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Extended Range Cell parameters


The extended range cell feature is enabled using the parameter ext_range_cell. The range of the extended range cell is dictated by the timing advance applied to it. The parameter ms_max_range has an increased range, from 63 to 219. Each of these timing advances equates to 550m. If the extended range cell feature is activated, then the number of timeslots per carrier assigned to extended range use is assigned within the equip RTF command. A maximum of 4 extended range timeslots can be assigned per carrier, each consisting of a pair of normal range timeslots.

4166

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Extended Range Cell parameters

Extended Range Cell parameters

chg_cell_element ext_range_cell = <*><cell description> <*> 0 = extended range disabled 1 = extended range enabled chg_element ms_max_range = <*><location>cell =<cell desc> <*> = 0 to 63 Normal range cell = 0 to 219 Extended range cell equip <site> RTF . . enter the number of extended range timeslots allowed: 0 to 4

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4167

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Extended Range Cell parameters

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Extended Range Cell parameters


A maximum of 20 SDCCHs are allowed in the extended range cell feature. These must all reside on the BCCH carrier. This configuration will be spaced over 3 timeslots utilizing a combined multiframe. The priority of extended range cell carriers can be altered by use of the add_neighbor command. Carriers are classified as normal or extended range.

4168

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Extended Range Cell parameters

Extended Range Cell parameters

chg_element max_number_of_sdcchs = <*><location>cell=<cell desc> <*> = maximum of 20 for extended range cell add_neighbor <source><target><placement><list_type> . . Enter the range of the neighbor cell: normal or extended.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4169

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Multiband Inter-cell Handover

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Multiband Inter-cell Handover


Multiband inter-cell handover is an optional feature which allows a single Network Operator with licences in multiple frequency bands (GSM900, DCS1800, PCS1900) to support the use of multiband mobiles. By supporting transparent handovers between bands, Multiband inter-cell handover allows seamless operation of the mobile in a multiband environment. This feature includes the following: S S S Mutiband support at site level. (BTS site with GSM 900 and DCS1800 in homogeneous cabinets). Multiband Inter-cell handovers. Unique Traffic Management in a multiband network using Advanced Load Management.

Multiband includes Traffic Management features unique to Motorolas GSM product. These are collectively referred to as Advanced Load Management and allow an operator to retain or redirect mobile traffic to a preferred band, by setting band_preference and band_preference_mode parameters in each cell. A multiband network can be either single or multi-layer. So, for example, GSM900 macro cells can operate alongside DCS1800 macro cells. Alternatively DCS1800 micro cells could, for example, underlay GSM900 macro cells.

4170

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Multiband Inter-cell Handover

Multiband Handover supported in Mixed GSM 900/DCS 1800 Network

Denotes GSM900 CELL Denotes DCS1800 CELL band aware mobiles OMC

Mixed GSM900/DCS1800 BTS Mixed GSM900/DCS1800 BTS

GSM900 BTS

RXCDR
DCS1800 BTS DCS1800 BTS collocated with BSC GSM900 BTS

Mixed GSM900/DCS1800 BTS Mixed GSM900/DCS1800 BTS

MSC GSM900 to DCS1800 and DCS1800 to GSM900 HANDOVERS

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4171

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Multiband Inter-cell Handover

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

The feature supports the GSM 900, EGSM 900, DCS 1800 and PCS 1900 frequency bands. All handovers between bands are inter cell (intra-cell multiband handovers are not supported), with the exception of the normal intra-cell handovers between GSM and EGSM channels. Frequency hopping is still supported as before, that is that a mobile can hop within its own band. Hopping between bands is not supported.

4172

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Multiband Inter-cell Handover

Supported Frequency Bands:

S GSM 900 S EGSM 900 S DCS 1800 S PCS 1900

Frequency hopping in one band only

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4173

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Multiband Inter-cell Handover

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Multiband handover database parameters


In order to enable the multiband feature and all its functionality, the parameter mb_preference is used. Once this is done, the BSS will take notice of the add_cell prompt freq_type, which sets the frequency band for the cell. After a call is set up on a particular cell of course a handover may become necessary. It is possible to specify, for each cell, the frequency band(s) of the target cell for any handover that is made out of that cell. This is done by the interband_ho_allowed parameter. The system then chooses a particular band from within the interband_ho_allowed selection based on the preference set by subsequent parameters.

4174

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Multiband Inter-cell Handover

Multiband Handover Parameters

chg_element mb_preference < * > location <*> 0= multiband handovers disabled 1= multiband handovers enabled

freq_type (add_cell prompt) 1 or PGSM 2 or EGSM 4 or DCS 1800 8 or PCS 1900

chg_element interband_ho_allowed < * > <cell_desc>

<*> PGSM EGSM DCS1800 PCS 1900

1 n

2 n

3 n n

4 n

5 n n

6 n n

7 n n n

8 n

9 n n

10 n n

11 n n n

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4175

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Multiband Inter-cell Handover

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Multiband neighbour measurement


Multiband mobiles of course produce measurement reports relating to the serving cell and the best six neighbours when in dedicated mode, just as single band mobiles do. However, to ensure an equal chance of selecting each bands target cells, it is possible to reserve some of the six positions for neighbours in a measurement report for each available band. This is done via the multiband_reporting parameter as shown opposite. For example, consider the case with a mobile using a GSM 900 serving cell, the Motorola BSS can ask the MS to provide: <element_ value>=0 will do normal reporting of the six strongest neighbour Cells regardless of their band. <element_ value>=1 will report the strongest neighbour cell in the GSM 1800 band within the neighbour cell list, then use the remaining measurement slots to report firstly any other cells in the band of the serving cell, and then the next strongest identified neighbours in any of the bands. <element_ value>=2 will report the two strongest neighbour cells in the GSM 1800 band of the neighbour cell list, then use the remaining measurement slots for reporting the signals of cells in the band of the serving cell. And then by the next strongest identified neighbours in any frequency bands supported. <element_ value>=3 will report the three strongest cells in the GSM 1800 band within the neighbour cell list. Then use the remaining measurement slots for reporting the signals of cells in the band of the serving cell, and then by the next strongest identified neighbours in any of the bands.

4176

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Multiband Inter-cell Handover

Multiband neighbour measurements

multiband_reporting<element_value><location><cell_number> where: <element_value> 0 1 2 3 <location> <cell_number> Default. Normal reporting Report at least one neighbour in each freq. band Report at least two neighbours in each freq. band Report at least three neighbours in each freq. band Location ID Cell ID

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4177

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Multiband Inter-cell Handover

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Band preference
Having set the frequency bands to which a call in the cell can handover (interband_ho_allowed ) it is possible to specify a preference for a particular one. For example, if interband_ho_allowed= 11 then a call could handover to a PGSM, EGSM or PC1900 neighbour cell; it may be useful to try to hand most calls over to the PCS 1900 in a multilayer system. A preference for a particular band is set by the band_preference parameter. It is not, however, certain that all handovers out of this cell will always go to the preferred band, this depending upon another parameter, band_preference_mode. This parameter can cause the BSS to ignore the band_preference setting, or to take it into account when ordering target neighbour cells for inclusion in the handover_recognised message, as shown opposite.

4178

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Multiband Inter-cell Handover

Band Preference

S chg_ele band_preference<*><location><cell_desc> <*> 1= 2= 4= 8= PGSM EGSM DCS 1800 PCS 1900

S chg_ele band_preference_mode<*><location><cell_desc> <*> 0= 1= 2= 3= 4= 5= 6= Attempt HO to strongest reported neighbour. Attempt assignment to strongest preferred band reported neighbur (SDCCH TCH). Attempt HO to strongest preferred band reported neighbour. 1 and 2 above. Attempt assignment to strongest preferred band TCH immediately after initial assignment. 1 or 4 above. Attempt assignment to strongest preferred band neighbour only upon congestion

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4179

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Multiband Inter-cell Handover

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Classmark of mobile
If a handover becomes necessary in a multiband environment, the network must of course know the frequency band capabilities of the mobile so that a PGSM mobile is not handed over to a DCS 1800 cell for example. In internal handovers this discrimination is handled by the BSC as part of its normal handover control function, but in external handovers the target BSC must be told the mobiles capabilites. Moreover, the MSC must know the mobiles capabilities in case this affects its choice of BSC; in a multilayer configuration each layer could be controlled by a different BSC. There are 3 GSM-defined messages for informing the network of the mobiles capabilities

Classmark 1 Phase of MS Early classmark send ing enabled A5/1 support Power Class

Classmark 2 Phase of MS Early classmark send ing enabled A5/1/2/3 support Power Class Synchronization Supplementary Ser vices SMS support EGSM support Classmark 3 support

Classmark 3 PGSM/EGSM/DCS 1800 support A4/5/6/7 support Power class

Classmark 3 is the important message in multiband, but us normally only sent by the mobile when interrogated by the MSC. In order to save time it is possible to send classmark 3 spontaneously using the parameters opposite. This will happen within 40 ms if the initial layer 3 message at call setup unless specified otherwise, and is communicated to the target BSC of an external handover in the handover request message.

4180

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Multiband Inter-cell Handover

Classmark of Mobile

S chg_element early_classmark_sending 0 <*><cell_desc> <*> 0= 1= 2= 3= disabled enabled on A interface, disabled on air interface disabled on A interface, enabled on air interface enabled on A interface and air interface

S chg_element early_classmark_delay <*>0 <*> 0 to 100,000 ms

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4181

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Coincident Multiband Handover

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Coincident Multiband Handover


This feature enables operators to install new radios in a different frequency band. This installation will turn an operators network into a multiband network. One obstacle to this type of upgrade is the investment in time and money already made by the operator in optimizing the existing network. With the addition of a secondary network, with different propagation characteristics, this optimization effort would have to be repeated. This can deter some operators, who want the extra capacity, from installing a multiband network. To avoid this problem of optimizing two networks, it is logical that the new secondary network should complement the existing infrastructure. To achieve this, the software must be configurable enough to allow the new network to use the same cell boundaries established by the original network. This can be done by using mobile-reported measurement reports of the primary network while established on the secondary network. This allows the mobile to be handled as if it were on the primary network, using the primarys boundaries and minimizing propagation characteristics differences, whilst not taking any primary network resources. This feature is designed to complement the Multiband feature and the functionality described here is only available if that feature is enabled.

Feature objectives
This feature has two main objectives: S To ensure that the specific DCS 1800 cell will only unload the traffic from its coincident GSM cell and not take traffic away from surrounding GSM cells. This is achieved by defining the DCS cell boundaries by the underlying GSM cell boundaries. To maintain the quality in the GSM network and only have one network to optimize. This is achieved by having the same handover boundaries between the GSM and DCS cells.

The lower diagram opposite shows the enhanced functionality o handing over to an unreported neighbour. If the BSS decides that Cell D is a viable candidate for handover for a mobile occupying a traffic channel on Cell A, the BSS will detect that Cell C is a coincident cell of Cell D, and will redirect the handovers to Cell C.

4182

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Coincident Multiband Handover

Coincident Multiband Handover

DCS 1800 A

DCS 1800 C

GSM 900 B

GSM 900 D

GSM 900 E

NORMAL NEIGHBOUR RELATIONSHIP COINCIDENT NEIGHBOUR RELATIONSHIP

S Handover to unreported neighbour S Uses measurements from coincident cell instead

DCS 1800 A

DCS 1800 C

GSM 900 B HANDOVER PATH

GSM 900 D

MEASUREMENTS USED
EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems 4183

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Configuring Coincident Multiband

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Configuring Coincident Multiband


The parameters shown opposite are used to configure this feature. First, coincident_mb enables the feature and prompts for the GSM Cell ID of the coincident cell, the coincident_offset and the low signal threshold, low_sig_thresh. Coincident offset is an extra handover margin applied to a coincident multiband handover decision calculation when the serving cell measurements are from a cell of a different band from that of the actual serving cell. The low signal threshold compensates for the DCS1800 and GSM900 cells having different downlink Tx levels and different path losses.

4184

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Configuring Coincident Multiband

Configuring Coincident Multiband

chg_cell_ele coincident_mb <*> <site> cell >cell_desc> Enter the Co offset: -63 to +63

Enter the GSM Cell ID of the Host cell: Full GSM cell ID Enter the Low Signal Threshold: 0 to 63 <*> 0 = Disable coincident multiband handovers 1 = Better cell detection 2 = Cell redirection

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

4185

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Configuring Coincident Multiband

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

4186

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Chapter 5

Microcellular/Picocellular Optimization Procedures

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

ii

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Chapter 5 Microcellular/Picocellular Optimization Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


Microcellular/Picocellular Optimization Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Optimization Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System benchmarking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Benchmarking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handover benchmarking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . All Channels at Full Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Problem Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Coverage holes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Co-channel Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effects of interference of fast moving mobiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible solutions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guidelines to reduce interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Adjacent Channel Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OMC Support for the Microcellular Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Microcellular source / neighbour view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Separate SACCH and BCCH neighbours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power budget algorithm per neighbour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailed view template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning the In-Building Solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Planning the in-building solution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Talk to the customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial planning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Utilization of existing network connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Visit site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modify plan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Agree final plan with customer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Order and install equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Test and optimize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Run and maintain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
51 51 52 52 54 54 54 56 58 58 58 510 510 512 512 514 516 516 518 520 522 524 526 526 528 532 534 536 538 540 542 544 548

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

iii

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

iv

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Microcellular/Picocellular Optimization Procedures

Microcellular/Picocellular Optimization Procedures


Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student will be able to: S S Understand the basic microcellular optimization procedures. Understand the basic planning guidelines and optimization procedures for an in-building infrastructure.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

51

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Optimization Procedures

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Optimization Procedures
After system integration is complete, the optimization procedures for a combined cell architecture system aim to bring the system performance up to the standard defined by the quality criteria.

System benchmarking
The first step is to analyze the systems performance, and to identify areas where it falls short of the required performance. We refer to this process as system benchmarking. In order to test the system to benchmark it before optimization can start, a set of startup parameters are required. These will depend to some extent on the nature of the system in question, but some general guidelines can be given.

52

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Optimization Procedures

General Guidelines for System Startup Parameters

S Handovers enabled are only power budget and downlink RXQUAL. S Power budget handover of types 1-7 are used in different situations. S No uplink or downlink RXLEV triggered handovers (probably won't happen). S No timing advance triggered handovers.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

53

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

System Benchmarking

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

System Benchmarking
User testing
User testing consists of generating calls in much the same way as a user would. Typically an automatic call generator is set up for continually generating 2 minute calls, with a short interval between calls. The test mobile is driven or walked along specified routes in the coverage area. Data gathered includes failed call setups, dropped calls, RXQUAL distribution, handover rates.

Handover benchmarking
Handover benchmarking consists of setting up a continuous call and driving/walking the test routes. The output identifies areas where the handovers occur or dont occur, and where bad quality calls exist.

54

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

System Benchmarking

System Benchmarking

This consists of basically two types of test:

1. 2.

User testing. Handover benchmarking.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

55

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

All Channels at Full Power

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

All Channels at Full Power


This feature allows all channels in a site or cell to be broadcast at full power (max_tx_bts) regardless of traffic loading in the cell. This allows for network optimization with worst case interference monitoring. Once enabled this feature can only remain on for a timer period (from 1 minute to 24 hours) however, it can be disabled manually. The disp_cell_status command will display whether this feature is OFF for that cell. Call processing in the cell is not affected. When feature goes OFF to ON: 1. 2. 3. dl_pwr goes max_tx_bts. New calls will use dl_dtx. dl adaptive power control will be disabled.

When feature goes ON to OFF: 1. 2. dl adaptive power control will be enabled. dl_dtx will remain OFF for all active calls. New calls will use dl_dtx from establishment (MS and network permitting).

Should the operator enable the full power feature and the power based algorithm as defined for Concentric Cells has been selected for the cell, each inner zone carrier is set to transmit at the defined per carrier maximum power level. The BSS sets the transmit power level to max_tx_bts for all outer zone carriers.

56

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

All Channels at Full Power

All Channel at Full Power

Cell wide set_full_power cell_number= <cell number> * <minutes> * ON or OFF <cell number> - full global cell id <minutes> - 1 to 1440 (24hrs) minutes.

BSS wide set_full_power <site> * <minutes> * ON or OFF <minutes> - 1 to 1440 (24hrs) minutes

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

57

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Problem Resolution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Problem Resolution
Having benchmarked the system and identified problem areas, the next step is to resolve the problems by making changes to the system. It is impossible to give a comprehensive account here of all the problems that can occur, but we give a few common examples and methods for tackling them.

Coverage holes
This refers to areas where coverage is poor. Normally, balanced links will have been set up, so increasing the BTS transmit power is not an option. Normally, the only options available involve antenna adjustments:

Possible solutions
S S S Installation of an antenna with a different gain pattern. Azimuth change. Move antenna location (easier in microcells).

58

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Problem Resolution

Coverage Holes

Possible solutions S Installation of an antenna with a different gain pattern. S Azimuth change. S Move antenna location (easier in microcells).

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

59

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Co-channel Interference

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Co-channel Interference
This is interference from one channel to another channel, both channels being on the same frequency. In any cellular system neighbour cells must not be co-channel cells. However, with microcellular networks, care must also be taken to avoid the situation on the opposite page, where co-channel interference would prevent handover to a neighbour cell. In the diagram opposite, cells 1 and 3 are co-channel and handover from 3 to 2 is prevented by excessive co-channel interference from cell 1. This situation can be predicted with the planning tools and their occurance minimized. Provided the onset of co-channel interference is slow enough, problems can be avoided either by early handover to cell 2, or by the RXQUAL handover to the macrocell. As the mobile enters the interference zone, a handover based on RXQUAL is triggered to the macrocell. The macro to micro algorithm (5) is set up with sufficient delay to ensure a high probability of the mobile being out of the interference zone when hand-down occurs.

Effects of interference of fast moving mobiles


It must be emphasised that it is important to ensure that such a co-channel interference zone does not occur where there are fast moving mobiles, otherwise the onset of interference may be so fast as to cause the handover command not to be heard, resulting in a dropped call.

510

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Co-channel Interference

Co-channel Interface Scenario

Buildings Roadway

Buildings 1 2 Route taken by MS Buildings Microcells 3

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

511

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Co-channel Interference

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Co-channel interference is normally predictable by use of the planning tool, however, due to the possibility of inaccuracies in the prediction, co-channel interference can sometimes occur in the service area. It is identifiable by poor RXQUAL with good RXLEV where no significant adjacent channel is present.

Possible solutions
S S S S Change of frequency plan Change of antenna parameters Change of interference levels by adjustment of output powers Encouraging handover to another cell before interference encountered

Guidelines to reduce interference


When a cell is identified to be a cause of interference, care must be taken when solving the problem by reducing its output power, since; S S Reduction of output power will reduce the coverage area of that cell (assuming the coverage is already downlink limited). Reduction of the output power will move the interference zone for that cell (i.e. the zone where interference will be experienced by calls on that cell moving outwards, before handover occurs)closer to the cell. Reduction of the output power will change the handover positions if power budget or RXLEV handovers are used.

When adjusting the power budget parameters, care must be taken not to invoke the situation where ping-pong handovers occur. This can usually be avoided if sufficient total hysteresis is maintained (i.e. hysteresis into, plus, hysteresis out of, the cell).

512

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Co-channel Interference

Co-channel Interference

Possible Solutions

S Change of frequency plan. S Change of antenna parameters. S Change of interference levels by adjustment of output power. S Encouraging handover to another cell before interference encountered. S Move antenna location.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

513

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Adjacent Channel Interference

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Adjacent Channel Interference


A harder situation to avoid (particularly where frequency allocation is limited) is the case where a neighbour cell is located around the corner and uses an adjacent channel. This would correspond to the case where cell 2 and 3 used adjacent channels. The problem is caused by the rapid drop of signal from the serving cell, and the rapid rise in signal level from the neighbour cell. If the signal degradation is too great, the handover will be noisy or at worst the call will drop. There is always the safety net of the macrocell, defined as a type 2 neighbour, but if the adjacent channel degradation is too rapid, the handover command will not be heard. When constructing the frequency plan for the system, it is recommended that, in the case where the microcell frequency band contains adjacent channels, these should be assigned to neighbours which are LOS related (at least for the main traffic route between them). This leaves the designer more freedom to assign non adjacent channels to neighbours which are round the corner from each other. The presence of adjacent channel interference is normally obvious from TEMS measurements, where an over-strong neighbour is reported. The solutions are similar to those for co-channel interference. If no other measures are effective, handover to the macrocell can be encouraged earlier. This can be achieved by a reduction in the RXLEV_MIN(n) for the macrocell neighbour, and possibly a reduction in the RXQUAL threshold (within limits)

Note:
Algorithm Type 7 will be useful in this scenario.

514

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Adjacent Channel Interference

Adjacent Channel Interference Scenario

Buildings Roadway

Buildings 1 2 Route taken by MS Buildings Microcells 3

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

515

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

OMC Support for the Microcellular Environment

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

OMC Support for the Microcellular Environment


Microcellular source / neighbour view
In order to support the management and optimisation of a network incorporating the microcellular environment there is the requirement to be able to remotely optimise (fine-tune) the individual cells on a per neighbour basis. The diagram opposite shows how this can be done.

516

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

OMC Support for the Microcellular Environment

Microcellular Source/Neighbour View

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

517

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

OMC Support for the Microcellular Environment

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Separate SACCH and BCCH neighbours


The OMC has the functionality to support separate SACCH and BCCH Neighbour lists, in order to differentiate between those used in idle and those used in dedicated mode.

518

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

OMC Support for the Microcellular Environment

OMC Support for Separate SACCH and BCCH Neighbours

A neighbour may be specified to be: S SACCH Neighbour (Dedicated Mode) S S BCCH neighbour (Idle Mode) or both

This makes it possible to ensure that calls on a Combined Cell Architecture (Macrocellular & Microcellular) are originated on the Macro Layer.
EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems 519

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

OMC Support for the Microcellular Environment

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Power budget algorithm per neighbour


The OMC has the functionality to support the changing and addition (if required) of new neighbour attributes.

520

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

OMC Support for the Microcellular Environment

Power Budget Algorithm Per Neighbour

S S S

GUI Support for Power Budget Algorithm Editing GUI Maps to BSS MMI representation GUI provides support for Algorithm defaults
521

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

OMC Support for the Microcellular Environment

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Default templates
The OMC has the functionality to enable the operator to select a default set of microcellular parameters on a per neighbour instance basis from a selection list in the GUI in which the default values are visible to the user.

522

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

OMC Support for the Microcellular Environment

Microcellular Source/Neighbour View

3 4

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

523

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

OMC Support for the Microcellular Environment

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Detailed view template


The diagram opposite shows a detailed view template for a particular neighbour type.

524

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

OMC Support for the Microcellular Environment

Default Template Detailed View

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

525

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Planning the In-Building Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning the In-Building Solution


Planning the in-building solution
When considering the picocellular solution, certain factors have to be taken into account. The flow chart opposite highlights certain functions that will enable the identification of the requirements needed to oversee the picocellular installation. Also contained in the Appendices is: S In-Building Requirements Questionnaire

This questionnaire, when completed, will enable assessment of the customer requirements and should be sent prior to visiting the customer. The questionnaire forms the basis for initial discussions and will focus the customer to provide the information required. Let us consider each of the functions:

526

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning the In-Building Solution

In-Building Flow Chart

Send In-building requirement questionnaire (Appendix C)

Talk to Customer (Ref Appendix C)

Initial Planning

Visit Site

Modify Plan

Agree Final Plan with Customer

Order and Install Equipment

Test and Optimize

Run and Maintain

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

527

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Planning the In-Building Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Talk to the customer


Determine predicted traffic levels
Each picocell RF unit can offer a determined traffic capacity in Erlangs, which is dependent on the grade of service offered. Questions have to be asked to determine the required traffic levels from each of the users and an initial estimate of the position of those users within the building.

If the traffic levels are not known, then useful estimates are: S S S 100mE per Heavy user 30mE per Average user 10mE per Light user

Answers to these questions can also be resolved by use of: S S S S Current mobile billing information Number of incoming calls Existing PABX call records Identify geographically located groups by types of employment/mobile usage.

Determine Coverage Requirements


The primary goal for most systems will be excellent coverage. However, the greater the area, and the higher the probability of coverage within that area, the higher the cost of the final system. With this in mind, it will be useful to get rankings of importance of different areas within the building. This will aid decisions later on in the process.

Obtain Building Plans


These are required for planning the system. The more detail, the better, and in both paper and electronic format.

Obtain Contact Name for Building Cable


Installation of the system will need help from the in-building cable expert.

528

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning the In-Building Solution

Talk to the Customer

Determine predicted traffic levels

Determine coverage requirements

Get building plans

Get contact name for building cabling

Get surrounding cell information

Ask for statistics to be enabled on surrounding cells

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

529

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Planning the In-Building Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Get Surrounding Cell Information


The cellular operator should provide the details of the surrounding cells. This would normally be in the form of a map and a .CEL file, indicating: S S S S S S RF unit positions Antenna Orientation BSIC Cell ID Carrier Frequencies O/P Power Levels

Other cell-related information (e.g. RXLEV_ACCESS_MIN would also be useful).

Ask for Statistics to be enabled on Surrounding Cells


Traffic loads and interference levels (dropped calls and poor RXQUAL) are good indicators of a system performance. Knowledge of this before and after installation of the in-building system will help in diagnosing any problems that may occur later on. (A three week period may be necessary to give a valid statistical benchmark).

530

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning the In-Building Solution

Talk to the Customer

Determine predicted traffic levels

Determine coverage requirements

Get building plans

Get contact name for building cabling

Get surrounding cell information

Ask for statistics to be enabled on surrounding cells

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

531

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Planning the In-Building Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Initial planning
Coverage prediction needs two inputs: S S Path loss from the picocell RF units Minimum acceptable level for users

Mark High Traffic Areas


Used to determine the number of heads in a given area where traffic is a limiting factor. To determine this it is imperative that the peak hour is identified for the specific areas as it may differ. If congestion relief is likely to be employed a check must be undertaken to see that adjacent cells do not incurr the same peak hours/traffic loading.

Use Simple Coverage Rules to estimate Coverage


With application of the simple planning rules, and the knowledge of the minimum required signal levels, estimates of the cell radii can be made.

Mark Potential Head Positions on Plan


With the cell radius and traffic levels, initial estimates on the number of heads and their relative positions can be made. When selecting a potential Picocell RF Unit location, several factors should be considered: S Key Areas and VIP locations In an ideal implementation, all areas of the building would have excellent coverage. Providing such a system may prove to be costly and inefficient so establishing some sort of weighting could be important. S Interference from the macro/micro network will not be constant around the perimeter of the building. To meet the required C/I levels the Picocell RF Units may need to favour one area of the building. RF Leakage from the in-building system should be kept to a minimum. The Picocell RF Unit should be easily linked back to any existing fibreoptic or twisted pair backbone. Mounting restrictions and the availability of electrical connections will also need to be considered. If a single Picocell RF Unit can supply enough capacity for several areas, a distributed antenna solution may be considered. In areas of projected high traffic, coincide overlap of coverage from individual cells so that congestion relief/directed retry can be enabled.

S S

S S

The method for assessing the suitability of these locations is to set up a test transmitter on a clean frequency and record the downlink signal strength throughout that floor.

Check Traffic Coverage is Adequate


Re-address coverage requirements ensuring they meet the criteria defined.

532

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning the In-Building Solution

Initial Planning

Analyze outside levels to determine required levels on the internal system

Mark high traffic areas

Use simple coverage rules to estimate coverage

Mark potential head positions on plan

Check traffic coverage is adequate

Find space for controller

Explore possibility to utilize existing network connectivity

Suggest cable runs

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

533

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Planning the In-Building Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Utilization of existing network connectivity


Find Space for Controller
The cluster controller, because of its dimensions and operational requirements, will be required to be segregated from peoples normal working environment. The PBX room would be an ideal position. This may already contain a 48v power source, air conditioning and provide access to the core MDF.

Suggest Cable Runs


Once the position of the Picocell RF Units and the cluster controller are known cable runs have to be planned. With this in mind, the choice between HDSL and fibre have to be made.

534

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning the In-Building Solution

Initial Planning

Analyze outside levels to determine required levels on the internal system

Mark high traffic areas

Use simple coverage rules to estimate coverage

Mark potential head positions on plan

Check traffic coverage is adequate

Find space for controller

Explore possibility to utilize existing network connectivity

Suggest cable runs

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

535

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Planning the In-Building Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Visit site
Ensure RF Unit Site is Suitable
The planned site should be checked for suitability. Theoretically, it should be a flat surface, large and strong enough to support the Picocell RF Unit. Positions of nearby power, telephony and alarm cabling should be checked to ensure no accidents occur while drilling the mounting holes. Care should be taken to minimise environmental impact.

Check Coverage from Suggested Head Sites


In the initial planning of a system, a test transmitter and measurement receiver can be used to check the RF levels that can be achieved from the proposed sites. The transmitter can be placed at the proposed site, ensuring the antenna is mounted on a stand to get the correct proposed height. The coverage area can then be tested by measuring the signal levels.

Check Cable Runs with Site Expert


Go through plans with the building expert. Check that the proposed cable runs are free from potential interference from other telecommunication or electrical services and do not pass through electronic switching elements.

Check Controller Room is Suitable


Check the proposed location for: S S S S S availability of power cable access structural suitability E1 Line will have to be routed to this point, so talks with the provider may be needed. Future growth envisaged (i.e. will we need another cluster controller?)

536

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning the In-Building Solution

Visit Site

Ensure head site is suitable

Check coverage from suggested head sites

Take surveys on surrounding cell sites, and on suggested frequencies

Check cable runs with Site Expert

Check cluster controller room is suitable

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

537

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Planning the In-Building Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Modify plan
Analyze Outside Signal Levels
All surveys are processed to help determine the frequency plan and coverage requirements. If a specific set of frequencies have not been allocated to the in-building system, or macro/micro signals need identifying, a scan of the surrounding network can identify a list of potential candidates. The TEMS frequency scanning tool can be used to measure the signal strength of all GSM frequencies in a particular location. As the mobile is only guaranteed to see BCCH carriers, the BSIC of each frequency should be requested. A map of the surrounding cells can then be used to identify associated traffic channels. As the received signal strength will not remain constant around the building, the scan should be carried out at each of the extremities of the building. It is normally best to make these measurements on the upper floor, as well as intermediate floors, of a building as these are most open to interference. The scan should also be repeated several times at each location to provide a level of confidence, as well as coincide with peak busy hours. It is important to get close to the windows in perimeter offices as this is where the lowest C/I is expected. If a TCH frequency from a surrounding macro is re-used on the in-building system the associated BCCH must be scanned to determine worst case interference.

Determine Actual Coverage


Combining the measured path loss data and the analysed external signal levels will produce an excellent coverage prediction. This should be compared with the initial requirement to check that all important areas exceed the expectation. More (or less) heads may be needed as a result of this.

Move RF Unit Positions if Necessary


For coverage, traffic or interconnect reasons the heads may need to be replanned. This will result in at least a number of extra tasks and repeating a number of checks.

Draw Up Frequency Plan Generate Neighbour List

538

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning the In-Building Solution

Modify Plan

Analyze outside signal levels

Determine actual coverage

Move head positions if necessary

Draw up frequency plan

Generate neighbour list

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

539

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Planning the In-Building Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Agree final plan with customer


Revisit Customer Agree Final Plan
It is imperative that the following points are discussed with the customer: S S S S S Network architecture to fulfill the requirements Final hardware requirements Responsibilities Resourcing Acceptance criteria. This should be defined in terms of: Coverage Quality Call drop Call setup (originations) Call setup (failures) Handover failures

540

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning the In-Building Solution

Agree Final Plan with Customer

Revisit Customer

Agree Final Plan

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

541

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Planning the In-Building Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Order and install equipment


The flow diagram opposite shows the functional steps and requirements for ordering and installation of the proposed solution.

542

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning the In-Building Solution

Order and Install Equipment

Order Motorola Equipment

Order E1 line installation

Order Aux equipment

Generate database

Install RF Units

Install controller

Install DC power supply

Fit antennas and coax

Configure in-building cabling

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

543

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Planning the In-Building Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Test and optimize


The flow diagram opposite shows the functional steps and possible requirements for the testing and optimisation of the solution. The optimization process can be divided into three phases:

Phase 1
S S S S S Database configuration Neighbour list creation Algorithm selections Idle Mode Handover Strategy

Phase 2
In order to minimise disruption to cellular service quality in the building, as much optimisation as possible will be performed before commercial users are allowed to access the system. This will be achieved by setting the CELL_BAR_ACCESS_SWITCH, but retaining the ability to handover. Optimization will be performed with TEMS mobiles configured to ignore CELL_BAR_ACCESS. The picocells, at this stage, should be included in the neighbour lists of the external macrocells, but configured with maximum ho_margins in order to exclude the hand in of commercial mobiles. Tests will include: S coverage testing S individual floors lock onto cell under test and disable HO key offices all stairwells

interference testing frequency re-use within the building (NB. floors 1 & 4) external macro frequencies

handover testing floor to floor HO to macros at perimeter HO to macros at all exits

544

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning the In-Building Solution

Test and Optimize

Power up system

Activate CELL_BAR

Monitor OMC to ensure all equipment is in-service and no alarms are reported

Coverage Handover Tests

Call Testing

Connect to commercial system

Check internal to external handovers and originations

Customer sign-off against acceptance criteria

Remove CELL_BAR

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

545

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Planning the In-Building Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Tests will include: S idle mode operation testing S stairwells and areas of possible interference

enable call trace to examine all cells for path balance. This also gives a breakdown of handover causes, BSSMAP and DTAP message counts which are useful in assessing the system traffic character.

enable per neighbour cell stats for handover cause analysis. This will readily identify cells performance and effectiveness of the selected handover strategy.

handover testing HO from macros at perimeter HO from macros at all entrances

Full system testing for coverage acceptance.

As a result of the above tests, frequencies, cells power and handover parameters can be adjusted to meet the acceptance criteria. The system call performance should be established with all the picocells set to the correct handover margins in the neighbour lists of the external macrocells in order to allow full testing of the hand in process.

Phase 3
After this phase is completed successfully, CELL_BAR_ACCESS may be lifted and full commercial service may begin. Further coverage and interference testing will be required to address any issues, in the commercial environment, not carried out in earlier phases. Additionally, some system monitoring will be required to evaluate the effectiveness of the picocell system deployment. A subscriber fault reporting process should be put in place so that any faults may be isolated quickly. Once the picocell system has enough subscribers to generate reliable statistics, then a reduced statistical collection should be used for daily system assessment.

546

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning the In-Building Solution

Test and Optimize

Power up system

Activate CELL_BAR

Monitor OMC to ensure all equipment is in-service and no alarms are reported

Coverage Handover Tests

Call Testing

Connect to commercial system

Check internal to external handovers and originations

Customer sign-off against acceptance criteria

Remove CELL_BAR

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

547

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Planning the In-Building Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Run and maintain


The flow diagram opposite shows the functional steps and requirements for ensuring that the installed solution operates effectively and efficiently, as well as monitoring for potential failings.

548

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Planning the In-Building Solution

Run and Maintain

Check stats to ensure system is carrying traffic

Monitor OMC

Frequency replan if exterior system is replanned

Expand system if it starts to block

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

549

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Planning the In-Building Solution

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

550

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Chapter 6

Hardware for Multilayered Systems

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

ii

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Chapter 6 Hardware for Multilayered Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


M-Cellarena . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cellarena equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Enclosure overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cellarena Enclosure Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power consumption . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AC-DC power supply module (ac-dc PSM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cellarena RF Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cellarena RF equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual Transceiver Module (DTRX) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combiner/ isolator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RF output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cellarena Digital Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio Digital Interface System (RDIS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Battery backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transceiver Control Unit, Micro (TCU-m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Combiner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Duplexer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TX output power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Main Control Unit, Micro (MCU-m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Interface Unit, Micro (NIU-m) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Line Interface modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

i
62 62 64 64 66 66 66 66 68 68 68 68 68 68 68 610 610 612 612 614 614 616 616 616 616 618 618 618

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

iii

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BSU shelf layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cabinet capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACU Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACC interconnect panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACC line termination modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACC to ACU connection with fibre optics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ACC to ACU connection with copper wire twisted pairs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BTS hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Architecture overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cellaccess RF unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M-Cellaccess cluster controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features of M-Cellaccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Benefits of M-Cellaccess . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Static sharing of leased line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Voice quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HDSL within M-Cellaccess and HorizonOffice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Use of HDSL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-Building cabling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fibre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . In-Building cable requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . External features of CU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Internal features of CU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital hardware board equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

620 620 622 624 626 628 630 632 634 636 636 636 638 638 638 640 642 644 644 644 646 646 648 650 652 652 654 656 656 656

iv

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

61

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellarena

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellarena
Introduction
M-Cellarena has two RF carriers, with the added capability of synthesizer frequency hopping and can be used to target specific high traffic areas, or combined with other cellsites to provide high capacity across a wider area by creating a contiguous underlay. The M-Cellarena was specifically developed to cut the network operators costs by providing quick and easy installation and configuration. Configuration inputs can be pre-loaded at the OMC-R in advance on installation, using the fast integration system. Once a site is prepared with power and communications link, one person, typically taking just 30 minutes can install M-Cellarena. The unit is delivered to the site, lifted on to its mounting bracket, plugged in and powered up. The OMC-R, automatically identifies the adjacent cells and frequencies and integrates the new BTS into the network in around 10 minutes. The M-Cellarena base stations provide either E1/ T1 or internal HDSL as standard interfaces and alternative backhaul methods such as microwave are available as options. An integral antenna is also provided. M-Cellarena has a passive heat management system with no moving parts, providing virtually silent operation and enhanced reliability. Power requirements are 88264 volts AC and units can be supplied with integral battery back-up.

62

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellarena

M-Cellarena

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

63

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellarena

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellarena equipment
The M-Cellarena is a two carrier cell, which may be installed indoors or outdoors. An M-Cellarena consists of the following functional building blocks: S Radio Digital Interface System (RDIS) which is made up of a main control unit, micro (MCU-m) and two Olympus Radio Architecture Controllers (ORACs) and line termination unit (DINO/RHINO) which, together, form the complete mBCU. Dual Transceiver Module (DTRX) which is made up of two RF modules (TRXs) and incorporates a duplexer and combiner/isolator module. AC-DC power supply module (ac-dc PSM) which converts ac mains to all required dc voltages. Battery pack. DINO/RHINO interface to LTU, which is external to the enclosure.

S S S S

Enclosure overview
The M-Cellarena is designed to be wall or pole mounted. A mounting bracket is provided, and once this is in place, the complete M-Cellarena can easily be installed onto the bracket. The M-Cellarena is provided with a moulded solar cover which, when removed, allows access for maintenance purposes. Using the wall mounting bracket as a template; a clear area of 300 mm Top, 500 mm Bottom, 10 mm Side and 1000 mm Forward is required around the M-Cellarena enclosure to allow for installation and maintenance. 100mm side space (each side) is required if the carrying/lifting handles are fitted and used. All input and output cables (for example, ac power, external antenna, HDSL and E1/T1 lines) enter the enclosure via the underside. The external antenna has an alternative cable route up through the top of the enclosure. All cables have specified routes between the enclosure body and solar cover to each connector.

64

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellarena

Enclosure overview

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

65

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellarena Enclosure Power Supply

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellarena Enclosure Power Supply


Power consumption
An M-Cellarena enclosure can operate from any of the following supplies: S S A nominal 230 V ac supply. A nominal 110 V ac supply. NOTE The ac-dc power supply module (ac-dc PSM) will accept voltage input in the range 88 to 264 V ac. Table 6-1 provides a summary of M-Cellarena power requirements. The figures in Table 6-1 are maximum requirements given in kilo Watts (kW). Table 6-1 M-Cellarena power requirements (kW) Equipment M-Cellarena (2 carrier) 25 _C to 50 _C 40 _C to 10 _C (Heater ON) 900 0.322 0.902 1800 0.322 0.902

AC-DC power supply module (ac-dc PSM)


The ac-dc PSM converts the single phase ac mains, in the range 88 V to 264 V rms to the required dc voltages. The alarm signals relating to mains fail and power supply overheat are generated within the unit and fed to the main controller board.

Battery backup
5 minutes battery backup time is provided by an attached lead acid battery pack. If extended battery time is required it can be implemented using a external uninterrupted power supply to power the M-Cellarena.

66

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellarena Enclosure Power Supply

Power Supply System

AC-DC PSM

DISTRIBUTION BOARD

BATTERY

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

67

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellarena RF Equipment

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellarena RF Equipment
Introduction
This section describes the RF components used in the M-Cellarena.

M-Cellarena RF equipment
The RF modules used in the M-Cellarena enclosure: S S S Dual Transceiver module (DTRX). Duplexer. Combiner/isolator.

Dual Transceiver Module (DTRX)


The DTRX is a radio transceiver that provides the air interface between the BSS RF sub-system and mobile stations. A DTRX consists of two TRX modules. An M-Cellarena enclosure contains one DTRX. Both the duplexer and combiner/isolator module are contained in the DTRX. The DTRX also supports synthesizer frequency hopping.

Duplexer
The M-Cellarena has an integrated (low power) duplexer, which allows both transmitters and receivers to use its single antenna connector. A duplexer is always fitted.

Combiner/ isolator
The wideband Tx combiner/isolator combines two transmit signals onto one output connector. A combiner/isolator module is always fitted.

RF output
The output of the M-Cellarena depends on the frequency band chosen: S S 1.2 w 900 MHz 1.0 w 1800 MHz

68

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellarena RF Equipment

M-Cellarena enclosure

AC-DC POWER SUPPLY MODULE

RDIS MODULE

DTRX MODULE (INCORPORATING THE DUPLEXER AND COMBINER/ISOLATOR MODULE)

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

69

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellarena Digital Equipment

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellarena Digital Equipment


The digital modules used in the M-Cellarena are: S S Radio Digital Interface System (RDIS). Line termination modules (DINO or RHINO).

Radio Digital Interface System (RDIS)


The RDIS is the main digital control module in the M-Cellarena and can be split into two main functions: S S Main control unit, micro (MCU-m). Olympus Radio Architecture Controller (ORAC).

The RDIS contains one MCU-m and two ORACs. The main site control functions for an M-Cellarena site are accommodated in the RDIS. It provides a processing platform for the site control software; the main software functions being: S S S S S Call Processing (CP). Cell Resource Manager (CRM). Radio Resource State Machine (RRSM). Switching. Support of DTRX connection is made to two ORACs.

The maximum number of carriers is limited to two and the RDIS is designed to drive both carrier units directly. The MCU-m is customized to drive two ORACs.

610

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellarena Digital Equipment

Digital Module layout

RX

TX Combiner

TRX

RX

TRX

DTRX

ORAC
inc . l RSS

ORAC
inc . l RSS

MCU
incl . CP CRM RRSM Switching Clock

RDIS

NIU

HDSL

Rhino/Dino
T43/BIB

To/From Network
EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems 611

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+


Introduction
The M-Cellcity is a two carrier microcellular Base Transceiver Station (BTS) which operates in frequency bands that adopt the GSM standard (GSM900 and DCS1800). The M-Cellcity+ adds High bit rate Digital Subscriber Line (HDSL) modems, and air combining providing an improved RF output power. The M-Cellcity+ HDSL is an alternative to Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) which uses an E1 2 Mbit/s link. HDSL operates over existing, or newly deployed, inexpensive voice grade telephone twisted copper pair wire, where unlike E1 leased lines, there are often no monthly rental charges. The M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ can be deployed in or out of doors and can be operated over a wide temperature range The M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ are designed for wall or pole mounting. A mounting bracket is provided, and once this is in place, the complete M-Cellcity or M-Cellcity+ can easily be installed onto the bracket. The M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ are provided with a moulded solar cover which, when removed, allows access for maintenance purposes. A clearance of 0.5 metres is required around an M-Cellcity or M-Cellcity+ to allow for installation, commissioning and maintenance. All input and output interconnections (for example, ac power, antenna, E1/T1/HDSL lines) are via the underside of the enclosure For heat management purposes, the unit utilises natural convection over finned heat sinks and a solar cover (to prevent excessive radiant heat absorption) for cooling. In addition, heater mats are incorporated for operation in cold weather and a power up, reducing start up time and giving M-Cellcity an operating range from 33 to 50C. The single unit is offered as a two carrier cell. The building blocks for the M-Cellcity are: S S S S S S Main Control Unit, micro (MCU-m) Network Interface Unit, micro (NIU-m) Transceiver Control Unit(s), micro (TCU-m) RF combiner and duplexer Power Supply Battery Backup

All inputs and output interconnections (i.e. ac power, antenna and E1/T1 links) are via the underside of the enclosure.

612

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

TCU-m MODULE (1st CARRIER) TCU-m MODULE (2nd CARRIER)

AC-DC POWER SUPPLY MODULE

MCU-m DC-DC POWER SUPPLY MODULE

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

613

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Power supply
The M-Cellcity power supply consists of: S AC/DC power supply module provides +25V from a single phase ac mains supply in the normal ranges: S 110v to 230v 8.2A to 3.9A 45Hz to 66Hz

DC/DC power supply module provides: +5v +3.4v +12v 12v

from the 25v supply. Alarm signals are generated for mains failure, over temperature and for low voltage disconnect imminent.

Battery backup
The power system incorporates a lead acid battery backup supply pack in the event of an ac power failure. The battery is float charged from the mains supply and is able to provide sufficient power for approximately five minutes to enable the system to perform the necessary tasks prior to complete system power down.

614

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

Power Supplies

AC-DC PSM

BATTERY
(MOUNTED FROM UNDERSIDE)

DC-DC PSM

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

615

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Transceiver Control Unit, Micro (TCU-m)


The TCU-m consists of: S Olympus Radio Architecture Controller (ORAC) module A single board designed to support a single dual rate EGSM or DCS 1800 carrier. It provides Radio Sub-system (RSS) processing, channel equalisation and channel coding. Transmitter/Receiver (TRX) module The module supports a single RF carrier and can operate in both the primary and extended GSM frequency bands, as well as DCS1800. The TRX provides GMSK modulation, up conversion and power amplification but does not support frequency hopping, dynamic power control or receive spatial diversity. A maximum of two TRX modules can be supported.

Combiner
The combiner is used to combine two RF transmit signal outputs from a pair of TRXs prior to the duplexer. It is only used on the M-Cellcity.

Duplexer
The duplexer routes the transmit signal from the combiner (or direct from the TRX on a M-Cellcity+ site) onto a single antenna and routes the receive signal from the antenna to the first TRX. The first TRX performs low noise amplification and switching to a second TRX, if fitted. M-Cellcity has two duplexers, one for each TRX transmit section to improve power output.

TX output power
Table 61 shows the output power of the M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

Table 6-2 Tx output power (W) Enclosure M-Cellcity M-Cellcity+ NOTE The M-Cellcity+ doubling of Tx output power is achieved by there being no combining, ie, the M-Cellcity+ has separate outputs for the two radios. 1.2 2.5 GSM900 1 2 DCS1800

616

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+ Rf Modules

M-Cellcity Combiner and duplexer

M-Cellcity+ Duplexers

M-Cellcity RF Configuration

M-Cellcity+ RF Configuration

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

617

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Main Control Unit, Micro (MCU-m)


The main site control functions for an M-Cellcity site are accommodated in the MCU-m. It provides the following functions: S S S Control Processing Crosspoint Switching BTS master clock synchronisation and timing

The control processing supports BTS site processing and fault management, together with BTS call processing (i.e. RRSM, RSS and CRM). The crosspoint switch provides switching for the network interfaces and up to two TCU-Ms. The maximum number of carriers is limited to two and the MCU-m is designed to drive both carrier units directly. There is no provision for MCU-m redundancy.

Network Interface Unit, Micro (NIU-m)


The network interface unit micro module provides the functionality required to terminate the network to the site. This function is separated from the MCU-m due to the wide range of interfaces that can be provided, though the MCU-m still supervises the NIU-m and its network interface configuration. The NIU-m supports the network termination of two E1 or two T1 links. Two micro network interface units are available, the NIUm and the NIUHDSLm: S S The network interface unit micro (NIUm) module provide the functionality required to connect up (terminate) the network, enabling E1 or T1 communication links. The network interface unit high bit rate digital subscriber line micro (NIUHDSLm) module (M-Cellcity+ only) with two high bit rate subscriber line (HDSL) modules, provides the functionality required to connect up (terminate) the network, enabling E1 and HDSL communication links.

The MCUm controls the NIUm (or NIUHDSLm) provision of network interface configuration and supervision.

Line Interface modules


The following modules terminate either the 2.048 Mbit/s (E1) or 1.544 Mbit/s (T1) links and two also provide High bitrate digital subscriber line (HDSL) links: S S S S
618

E1 T43 interface module 75 ohm. T1 or E1 (BIB) interface module 120 ohm. HDSL interface module 120 ohm (HIM120 module). HDSL interface module 75 ohm (HIM75 module).

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellcity and M-Cellcity+

Locations of Digital Components

M-Cellcity NIUm

M-Cellcity+ NIUHDSLm

M-Cellcity T43/BIB (CIM/BIM)

M-Cellcity+ HIM120 / HIM75

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

619

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess
Overview
The M-Cellaccess system comprises a controller for the RF heads contained in a standard BSSC cabinet capable of supporting 12 RF heads each of which represents a cell in the in-building system. The controller is referred to as the Access Cluster Controller (ACC) and the RF heads are designated Access Carrier Units (ACU). The standard ACC will contain a single BSU cage capable of supporting up to 6 RF heads mounted up to 1Km away from the controller. This first BSU in the system is capable of being configured as a co-located BSS with local transcoding in order to make integration into the network easier. As demand increases a further BSU cage can be added to the ACC to support 6 more ACUs, which will be configured as a remote BTS. Further expansion is easily accommodated by the addition of more ACCs. A special feature of the ACC is its ability to support sub-rate switching on the terrestrial links back to the MSC/RXCDR allowing dynamic allocation and sharing of the available backhaul resources. The ACUs are field replaceable units and can be easily changed by a single person. They comprise of a low power radio capable of supporting a single GSM carrier with 8 timeslots. Since each ACU operates as a single cell timeslot zero is reserved for control signalling (BCCH/CCCH & DCCH) leaving 7 timeslots for traffic. If required two cells can be used to cover the same geographical area with careful planning and database optimisation. The link between the cluster controller and the RF heads can be provided by a standard High Level Data Link Control (HDLC) format using fibre optics or a High Bit-rate Digital Subscriber Line (HDSL) using copper wire twisted pairs. The advantage of using HDSL is to make use of already installed telephone wiring or network fibre-optics without the need for costly installation work. The use of either fibre or copper is transparent to the operation of the ACU and ACC although in the case of the controller different interface cards will be required.

620

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess

Picocell equipment

ACC CABINET

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems


ACC CABINET BSU BSU

ACU ENCLOSURE

SITE B ACU ACU ACU ACU ACU ACU

ACU ACU ACU ACU ACU ACU SITE A

621

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

BSU shelf layout


The BSU cage used in the ACC is a standard cage as used in the BSC and RXCDR. The diagram opposite shows the layout used and the slot positions for each type of card. Full size modules used are as follows: S S S S S S S S S S S S S S Bus Terminator Card (BTC) Generic Processor card (GPROC) Generic Clock (GCLK) Digital Radio Interface and extended Memory (DRIM) Multiple Serial Interface (MSI) Timeslot Switch (TSW) Kiloport Switch Transcoder (XCDR) Generic Digital signal Processor (GDP)

Half size modules: Local Area Network Extender (LANX) Battery Backup Board Extender (BBBX) Parallel Interface Extender (PIX) HDSL Radio Interface Extender (HRIX) Digital Radio Interface Extender (DRIX)

622

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess

BSU shelf

AI0 AI1 AI2

KS0 MS0

DR5

DR4 MS1

DR3

DR2 MS2

DR1

DR0 MS3

KS1 GK0

U28 U27 U26 U25 U24 U23 U22 U21 U20 U19 U18 U17 U16 U15 U14

MSI 3

MSI 7

MSI 9

KSW/TSW B
L1

KSW/TSW A

GPROC 5

GPROC 4

GPROC 3

GPROC 2

GPROC 1

GPROC 7

GPROC 6

GPROC 0

XCDR 3

XCDR 7

XCDR 9

GCLK B

GCLK A

BTC 0

DRIM 5

DRIM 4

DRIM 3

DRIM 2

L28 L27 L26

L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20

L19

L18

L17 L16

L15 L14 L13 L12

L11 L10

L9

DRIM 1

L8

L7

DRIM 0

MSI 1

L6

L5

L3

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

623

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

BTC 1
L0

spare


HRIX 5 DRIX 5 BBBX

HRIX 3 DRIX 3

HRIX 4 DRIX 4

HRIX 2 DRIX 2

HRIX 1 DRIX 1

HRIX 0 DRIX 0

LANX A

U13 U12 U11 U10

U9

U8

U7

U6

U5

U4

U3

U2 U1

U0

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Cabinet capacities
The ACC is designed for indoor installation and can operated in the temperature range 5 to +45 degrees C. The cabinet is a standard BSSC cabinet as used for BSC and RXCDR sites, standing 2100mm high with a width of 720mm and a depth of 410mm. A fully cabinet equipped capable of controlling 12 ACUs weighs 230Kg and can be operated from DC supplies of either +27V or 48V with a power consumption of nominally 1500W. Each BSU cage fitted in an ACC will be configured as separate sites and the table opposite shows the standard equipment fit for each site. The first cage in an in-building system will typically be configured as a co-located BSC and so will have a requirement for KSW switch cards and XCDR/GDP cards to support the switching and transcoding requirement. The KSW and GDP cards provide the ACC with the ability to support dynamic allocation of terrestrial backhaul resources and also support of sharing of leased lines to the MSC for both cellular and PABX traffic. The sharing of leased lines for both types of traffic allows the cellular operator to offer reduced rates for calls to and from mobiles in its network and the buildings fixed landline telephones. The DRIM cards are full size cards operating in the lower slot positions of the BSU to provide the channel coding, interleaving and encryption functions required by each of the ACUs and therefore there will be a DRIM card physically and logically associated with each ACU in the system. Site planning will decide whether to support HDSL (over twisted copper lines) or HDLC (over fibre optics) to the ACUs and dictate the line termination cards to be used. T43/BIB cards will be used where fibre is chosen whilst HIM75 or HIM120 will be used to support both E1 connections to other network elements (MSC/BSC/RXCDR or BTS) and the ACUs controlled by each ACC. The decision on HDSL or HDLC will also affect the cards used to interface the ACUs to the DRIMs. HDSL will require HRIX cards to be fitted in the upper slot positions whilst HDLC will use DRIX cards in the same way as an InCell BTS site.

624

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess

Access Cluster Controller Cabinet Capacities

Cabinet type Digital modules GPROC GCLK MSI DRIM LANX DRIX3/HRIX TSW KSW XCDR T43/HIM-75 BIB/HIM-120 Power modules IPSM/EPSM

1-6 ACU

7-12 ACU

Collocated BSC 2

3 1 1 6 1 6 1

3 1 1 6 1 6 1 (1)

1 (1) (1) 1/3 (2) 1/3 (3) 1/3 (2) 1/3 (3)

1 (4)

Fans

NOTE (1) A collocated BSC will require the TSW to be replaced by a KSW. (2) HIM-75 modules will replace T43 modules if HDSL is used. (3) HIM-120 modules will replace BIB modules if HDSL is used. (4) The third IPSM is required, in the bottom cage, for redundancy.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

625

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

ACU Capacity
The ACU is designed for wall or pillar mounting and comes with a moulded cover to protect all connections made to the unit. The ACU can be fitted with either an integrated or external antenna depending on site coverage plans. The external antenna provides extra gain for increased coverage or when the carrier unit cannot be sited in the correct spot because of building or installation restrictions. The ACU is designed for indoor operation in the temperature range 5 to +35 degrees C, weighs approximately 10 kg and therefore can easily be installed by a single person in either a landscape or portrait orientation. Both 900MHz and 1800MHz versions are available with power outputs of +12dBm (16mW) and +17dBm (50mW) respectively. The low power of the RF heads ensures that interference to the external network and mobiles using the external network is kept to a minimum whilst ensuring a level to provide high quality indoor coverage. Each ACU will require an ac supply and connection to the controller by either twisted copper wire pairs or fibre optics. No other connections are required. This allows each head to provide coverage for a single in-building cell with one air timeslot used for a combined control channel configuration with 7 timeslots available for traffic.

626

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess

ACU enclosure

AC/DC PSU

BACKPLATE

ACU

ANTENNA

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

627

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

ACC interconnect panel


All connections to the ACC cabinet are made at the top panel in the same manner as with BSC/RXCDR cabinets. The interconnection panel provides connection for: S S S S DC input power E1/HDSL interconnection modules Battery backup input for DRAM Customer defined external alarms

Note: Since each BSU cage is a site in its own right there is no requirement to use the fibre optic feed-through tubes for cabinet extension or expansion and so they will only be used in a system using fibre optics for ACU connection. The E1/HDSL line inter-connection modules are: S S S S Type 43 interconnect module (T43, coaxial E1 connection only) HDSL interface module 75ohm (HIM75, T43 coaxial unbalanced E1 and HDSL) Balanced-line Interconnect Board (BIB twisted pair E1 only) HDSL interface module 120ohm (HIM120, BIB twisted pair E1 and HDSL)

Due to the internal configuration of the ACC cabinet connectors MS0 and MS4 are not required.

628

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess

Interconnect panel

FIBRE OPTIC CABLES FEED-THROUGH TUBE

FIBRE OPTIC CABLES FEED-THROUGH TUBE

MS4 NOT USED

MS5 T43/BIB or HIM-75/ HIM-120

MS6 HIM-75 or HIM-120

MS7 T43/BIB or HIM-75/ HIM-120 GROUND STUD +27V BATTERY BACKUP

MS0 NOT USED

MS1 T43/BIB or HIM-75/ HIM-120

MS2 HIM-75 or HIM-120

MS3 T43/BIB or HIM-75/ HIM-120

PIX1

PIX0

VIN

48/60 V DC +27 V

0V

Connector Battery Backup MS1 and MS3 (T43 or BIB only) MS5 and MS7 (T43 or BIB only) MS1 to MS3 (HIM-75 or HIM-120)

Function DRAM backup battery.

Internal destination DAB connector PC4 and BBBX connector PC2.

External destination Backup battery.

Up to four E1 circuits MS1 and MS3 E1 circuits source or at each connector; connectors on lower BSU termination equipment four Tx and four Rx. backplane. (via a T43 or BIB). MS5 and MS7 connectors on upper BSU backplane. Up to four E1 circuits at each connector; two Tx and four Rx. Up to two HDSL circuits at each connector. connector MS1 and MS3 connectors on lower BSU backplane (E1). HRIX modules in slots U10 to U15 (HDSL). MS5 and MS7 connectors on upper BSU backplane (E1). HRIX modules in slots U10 to U15 (HDSL). E1/HDSL circuits source or termination equipment (via a HIM-75 or HIM-120).

MS5 to MS7 (HIM-75 or HIM-120)

PIX0 and PIX1

Not used

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

629

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

ACC line termination modules


T43 module
A T43 module provides the impedance matching between the 75ohm E1 circuit lines and the BSU backplane 120ohm connections to MSI, XCDR or GDP cards. T43 cards will only be used in configurations using fibre optics for connection to the ACUs.

HIM75 module
A HIM75 module provides the impedance matching between the 75ohm E1 circuit lines and the BSU backplane 120ohm connections to either MSI, XCDR or GDP cards and the HDSL connections to the ACUs on configurations which use twisted copper wire pairs for ACU connection. T43 modules can only be used on MS1 and MS5.

BIB module
A BIB module provides the impedance matching between the 120ohm balanced E1 circuit lines and the BSU backplane 120ohm connections to MSI, XCDR or GDP cards. BIB modules will only be used in configurations using fibre optics for connection to the ACUs.

HIM 120 module


A HIM120 module provides the impedance matching between the 120 ohm E1 circuit lines and the BSU backplane 120ohm connections to either MSI, XCDR or GDP cards and the HDSL connections to the ACUs on configurations which use twisted copper wire pairs for ACU connection. BIB modules can only be used on MS1 and MS5.

Default E1 connections for initialisation Co-located BSC

Cage 0 0 0

Slot 16 16 14

MMS 0 1 0

Timeslot 1 1 1

Standalone BTS

Cage 15 15 15

Slot 16 16 14

MMS 0 1 0

Timeslot 1 2 2

630

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess

Line Termination modules

T43

HIM-75

J0 J8 J14 J16 J13 J7 J17 J5 J11 J1 J10 J2 J11 J8 J4 J10

J0 J4 J5 J2

J7

J1

J6

J3

BIB

HIM-120

J6 J1 J1 J3

J0

J0

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

631

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

ACC to ACU connection with fibre optics


The diagram opposite shows how 6 ACUs can be connected to a single BSU in a BSU using fibre optic cables and DRIX modules. The DRIX modules occupy upper slot positions U10 to U15 inclusive and each one is physically associated with a DRIM slot position. For example the DRIX in U10 serves the DRIM in lower slot position L7.

632

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess

ACC cabinet to ACU enclosure fibre optic intercabling

PCU 6 (PCU 12)

PCU 4 (PCU 10)

PCU 2 (PCU 8)

PCU 5 (PCU 11)

PCU 3 (PCU 9)

PCU 1 (PCU7)

NOTE: FIBRES FEEDTHROUGH FBR0 FOR LOWER CAGE. FBR1 USED FOR UPPER CAGE
INTERCONNECT PANEL (TOP OF CABINET)
OPT FBR1 OPT FBR0

DRIX5

DRIX4

DRIX3

DRIX2

DRIX1

DRIX0

U15

U14

U13

U12

U11

U10

LOWER BSU SHELF (UPPER BSU SHELF)

NOTE: THE UPPER BSU SHELF, IF FITTED, AND THE ACUs IT CONTROLS ARE IN ().

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

633

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

ACC to ACU connection with copper wire twisted pairs


The diagram opposite shows how 6 ACUs can be connected to a single BSU in a BSU using copper wire twisted pairs and HRIX modules. The HRIX modules occupy upper slot positions U10 to U15 inclusive and as with the DRIX modules each one is physically associated with a DRIM slot position. For example the HRIX in U10 serves the DRIM in lower slot position L7. The use of HDSL or HDLC is transparent to the DRIM card and the ACU and taken care of by the DRIX/HDSL modules and the line interface in the ACU. There is no impact on the database configuration of the site and in fact a mixture of HDLC and HDSL could be used within the same site if required.

634

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess

ACC cabinet digital cabling


INTERCONNECT PANEL (TOP OF CABINET)
OPT FBR1 MS4 PX1 PX0 MS5 MS6 MS7 BATT BACKUP MS0 MS1 MS2 MS3 ELCAP PANEL VIN 0V OPT FBR0

AI0 AI1 AI2 MS0 MS1 MS2 MS3

HRIX5

HRIX4 HRIX3 HRIX2 HRIX1 HRIX0

UPPER BSU BACKPLANE

AI0 AI1 AI2 MS0 MS1 MS2 MS3

HRIX5

HRIX4 HRIX3 HRIX2 HRIX1 HRIX0

LOWER BSU BACKPLANE

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

635

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

BTS hardware Introduction


The M-Cellaccess solution has been developed specifically to meet the requirements of the high capacity in-building demand. This infrastructure provides more cost-effective solutions than the traditional BTS Infrastructure due to the very low output powers and very specific environmental conditions.

Requirements
S S S S S Low cost solution to enable widespread deployment Small, inconspicuous units designed for office environments Low RF power to provide focussed indoor coverage without adversely affecting surrounding network and maximise efficient use of available spectrum Low cost, rapid installation Simple operation and maintenance.

636

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

637

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Architecture overview Hardware


The diagram below shows the architecture of the in-building system. Interconnection between a cluster controller and the RF Unit is via twisted pair or fibre optic. A dedicated link (pair) to each RF unit is required.

Software
The GSR2 software release will support M-Cellaccess with additional options available to tailor the performance of the in-building system to meet operators requirements. S S S Motorola multi-layer handover algorithms (mandatory). Directed retry/Congestion relief Drop and insert

638

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess

Distributed BTS Architecture

RF Units
Cluster Controller

RF Units

MSC

X C D R

E1/T1

BSC

E1/T1

Cluster Controller

RF Units

E1/T1

OMC

HLR/ VLR

PSTN

Macro- and/or Microcell BTS

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

639

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess RF unit
The RF Unit electrical parameters are based upon the receiver and transmitter performance specifications defined within GSM Specifications under Class M3. The RF Unit is a self-contained GSM Transceiver with integrated power supply, antenna and optional twisted pair and fibre communications ports. The RF units can be connected to the controller unit over a distance of up to 1km via either fibre optic cable or HDSL over copper. The HDSL interface module within the RF unit is connected to another HDSL modem at the controller unit via two pairs of twisted wire telephone lines. The RF unit will not support Rx diversity, frequency hopping or dynamic power control (Downlink).

640

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess

RF Unit

RF configuration: RF Output Power: Antenna: Dimensions: Weight: Installation: Power: Cooling: Battery Back-up:

One sector BCCH operation only EGSM900 16mW (12dbm at Antenna Connector) GSM1800 50mW (17dbm at Antenna Connector) Internal or external antenna 56cm x 35cm x 10cm (WxHxD) 10 kg Indoor only, wall/pole/column mount (landscape or portrait) 88264V AC, 4566 Hz 90 Watts Natural Convection External UPS (uninterrupted power supply)

HDSL or Fibre Interconnect Mains Supply

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

641

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess cluster controller


The controller has the capacity to control up to twelve RF units (6 RF units with one BSU card cage fitted in the cabinet or twelve RF units with a second card cage added). In both cases the controller can be configured as a co-located BSC. The controller is a 24 inch RFI shielded indoor cabinet of dimension 2.1 x 0.7 x 0.41m (M x W x D) and a maximum weight of less than 230kg. There are up to six cooling fans drawing ambient air into the enclosure through dust filters. The fans are speed controlled, depending on ambient temperature, to reduce acoustic noise. The optional HDSL interface module to support the Controller to RF Unit interconnect can be accommodated in the BCU card slot normally reserved for the DRIX. Up to eight E1 interfaces are supported per controller. The controllers support drop and insert, ie. only one E1 is required from BSC to the controller cabinet when 12 RF units (two sites) are supported from one cabinet. The Digital Modules that fit into the BSU shelves can comprise the following:

Full-Sized Modules:
S S S S S S S S Bus Terminator Card (BTC) Generic Processor (GPROC) Generic Clock (GCLK) Digital Radio Interface extended Memory (DRIM) Multiple Serial Interface (MSI) Timeslot Switch (TSW) Kiloport Switch (KSW) Transcoder (XCDR)

Half-Sized Modules:
S S S S S Local Area Network Extender (LANX) Digital Radio Interface Extender (DRIX) HDSL Radio Interface (HRIX) Battery Backup Board (BBBX) PIX

642

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess

M-Cellaccess Cluster Controller

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems


AC/DC PSU
643

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Features of M-Cellaccess
The implementation of a Distributed BTS solution will offer the operator the features which are listed below: S S S S S Fibre optic remote connection up to 1km HDSL using standard twisted pair telephone lines Full compatibility with existing Motorola BSC and OMC Underlay with any macrocellular or microcellular network Drop and insert networking

Benefits of M-Cellaccess
The implementation of a Distributed BTS infrastructure will also offer the operator the benefits listed below: S S S S S S S S S Rapid deployment Low installation cost due to usage of existing cabling Minimal disruption through installation Focussed capacity to match geographic distribution of traffic Allows high quality coverage in-building Coverage into stairwells, elevator shafts Minimal environmental impact Efficient use of Frequency Spectrum Ease of capacity expansion

Static sharing of leased line


In the implementation of these in-building solutions the cost of backhaul can significantly be reduced by use of static sharing of leased lines. By using compression, and nailed connections, a 30 circuit PBXMSC link can be compressed into 16 or even 9 circuits, (it is not possible to compress the PBX signalling channel) and piped through the BSS backhaul on nailed connections. With this method, the cost of backhaul from the Cellular Wireless Office System can be reduced by sharing the existing E1 link from the PABX to MSC. Compression: 16kbits G728 voice compression on all calls between PABX and MSC Nailed Connections: allows unused circuits on the BSS backhaul links to be permanently reserved and allocated for other purposes.

644

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess

Static Sharing of Leased Lines

PBX

Voice Compressor

BTS

PBX/MSC circuits piped through (spare) BTS/BSC links

Corporate Site
Example: 2 E1 links each 30 voice channel + 1 signalling

Restored to original 64 kbit format

BSC

X C D R

MSC

E X P A N D E R

Network Operators Site

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

645

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Voice quality
Enhanced Full Rate coder (EFR)
The EFR feature provides a speech service that has a better voice quality than the existing full rate speech service. Enhanced Full Rate still utilises the same air interface bandwidth, however, it employs a new speech coding algorithm and additions to full rate channel coding algorithm to accomplish this improved speech service. To ensure that the feature can be enabled on a BSS basis, the following upgrades have to be made: All XCDR cards associated with BSSs, where Enhanced Full Rate is enabled, must be replaced with the new GDP (Generic Digital Signal Processor) card, whether at an RXCDR or a BSS with local transcoding. Enhanced Full Rate must be enabled consistently at the BSS and the RXCDR.

HDSL within M-Cellaccess and HorizonOffice


High bit rate Digital Subscriber Line is a method of carrying data rates of up to 2.048 Mbit/s over a voice-grade twisted pair copper circuit normally used for 64 Kbit/s. It can be considered as a replacement for dedicated E1 or T1 links. By placing the modern internal to the BTS it is not necessary to provide external modems and their associated power supply requirements. In fact HDSL is already in use in several countries, particularly in Asia where regulation of the copper wiring installed to support the fixed network is not so strict as in Europe and other parts of the world. Many PTTs use HDSL as a transport mechanism for their E1/T1 links so that they gain the benefits of using existing copper wire whilst retaining the access premiums for actual E1/T1 connections chargeable to the customers. That is, you may think you are using an E1 or T1 link when in fact HDSL is used overa ll or part of the link. Where do we use HDSL in M-Cellaccess? Firstly, we do not use it for the backhaul E1/T1 connections between the M-Cellaccess BTS and the BSC (or RXCDR in the case of a collocated BSC configuration). Although this will surely be implemented in later products it is not supported by M-Cellaccess. Rather than design specific hardware to support HDSL we can reduce the cost of backhaul by using the existing Nailed Timeslots and Reserved Timeslots features currently supported by our BSS equipment. Many companies now employ a leased line in order to reduce calling costs to mobiles. The leased line usually consists of an E1/T1 link between the PABX and the cellular network MSC. In this way, the network operator can reduce charges to mobiles because it is not necessary to route calls via the PSTN. M-Cellaccess can make use of this leased line using the nailed and reserved timeslot features to manage the link, allowing the PABX and Picocell BTS to share the leased line, each using dedicated timeslots.

646

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess

HSDL Architecture

PSTN

PABX

LEASED LINE

PCU

PCU

PICOCELL CLUSTER CONTROLLER

LEASED LINE TO MSC

MSC

BSS

PCU

PCU PCU

PCU MS MS

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

647

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Use of HDSL
So where do we use HDSL? HDSL is used with M-Cellaccess as an alternative to HDSL used over fibre optic cable between the Cluster Controller and the RF Units. Fibre optic cable is expensive in comparison with telephone wiring and in many cases buildings will have cabling already available to support HDSL to the heads. In older buildings we may have no choice but to install new cabling or fibre, however, in most new buildings the installed telephone cabling is capable of data rates that will support HDSL communications. This will reduce installation costs and made expansion and re-configuration easier and quicker. In an office environment topology changes to meet business requirements and any in-building installation must be capable of adapting to these changing conditions.

648

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess

HDSL System Overview

2 x Twisted pairs To a second ACU

ACC HIM

2 x Twisted pairs

ACU

HRIX

AHAB

DRIM

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

649

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Transmission medium
The transmission medium over which the digital transmission system is expected to operate is the local line distribution network. A local line distribution network will employ cables consisting of pairs to provide the required service to the customers. This local line distribution network must be able to simultaneously carry bi-directional digital information in the appropriate HDSL format. In order to permit the use of HDSL transmission systems on the maximum number of local lines, the restrictions imposed by HDSL requirements are kept to the minimum necessary to guarantee acceptable operation. These minimum requirements are: no loading coils only twisted pair no additional shielding necessary when bridged taps are present the maximum number shall be limited to two and the length of each 500m.

650

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

651

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

In-Building cabling
Cabling standards have been improving for a number of years. In Europe, all new European buildings should comply to the European Standards for Structured Cabling. ANSI/EIA/TIA Standards Committees have split the cable types into five categories which are being accepted by European Organisations. The five types of cable categories are: S Category 1 Typically 22AWG or 24AWG untwisted wire. Used for voice and low speed data transmission rates up to 56kbps. S Category 2 Typically 22AWG or 24AWG solid wire, twisted pairs. Used for low speed LAN data communications up to 1mbps. S Category 3 24AWG solid wire, twisted pairs. Characteristics of these cables are specified up to 16mhz used up to 10mbps. Typical impedance is 100 ohms. S Category 4 22AWG or 24AWG solid wire, twisted pairs. Characteristics of these cables are specified up to 20mhz. Used up to and including 16mbps. Typical impedance is 100ohms. S Category 5 22AWG or 24AWG unshielded twisted pair. Characteristics of these cables are specified up to 100mhz. Used up to and including 100 mbps. Typical impedance is 100ohms.

Fibre
Fibre will allow one kilometre of transmission link distance, dependant upon the quality of the fibre. Remember, fibre can be used for direct connectivity to the RF Carrier Unit without the requirement of HDSL.

652

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

653

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

In-Building cable requirements


The tables below highlight different cables with a brief description and whether they are recommended for HDSL or not. Fibre is not included as this is an alternative solution to HDSL. It is important that the following cable requirements are satisfied: Cable must be twisted pair For In-building solutions the cable run-length of 1km is the rated maximum for all gauges. Non-loaded cable only. Loop Resistance must be between 350-680 ohms, depending on the gauge used (0.9mm0.4mm). 400 ohms should be used as a general rule.

654

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess

Cable Types

Cable Type Description

Performance and Recommendations Excellent. Use 2-pair (4 wire) cable.

Unshielded BT CW1308 cable and Twisted similar. Pair (UTP) Telephone cable UTP Ethernet Ethernet Cable CAT-3 CAT-4 CAT-5 Normally available as 4 pair cables. 120 ohm E1 cable. Conductors usually 0.9mm (19 AWG) plus sheild. Large bundles with 4 conductors spiralled together. Two parallel conductors (0.9mm) with supporting steel cable.

Excellent. Cables highly specified. Approved.

Shielded Twisted Pair Twisted Quad Drop Wire

Meant for E1. Performance excellent. Approved. Not approved.

Not approved.

Information 8 wire, non-twisted. Con- Not approved. Cable ductors usually rainbow coloured, not striped.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

655

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

External features of CU
The cabinet door is hinged on the left side of the cabinet and has inlet and outlet air vents in the door. The door incorporated a key lock. All connections to the cabinet are on the interconnect panel, which is the cabinet top panel. All cabinets are RF/EMI shielded.

Internal features of CU
The CU contains the following elements.

Power distribution
The power distribution is located at the top of the CU and comprises 48 V dc and +27 V dc circuit breaker distribution, distribution alarm board (DAB) and cabinet protection board (CPB).

HDSL module
The upper most part of the CU cabinet contains the HDSL modem shelf. This shelf accommodates up to 16 line termination units (LTU) high-bit-rate digital subscriber line (HDSL) boards.

NOTE
Only the first 12 LTU slots out of the 16 slots are utilized. BSU shelf
The BSU shelf assembly consist of: S S S A backplane. Two vertical slot shelves containing either full size or half size digital boards. A compartment for three integrated power supplies (IPSMs).

Fan tray
The fan tray contains three axial fans. The CU can tolerate a single fan failure within the tray.

Digital hardware board equipment


The exact digital hardware board equipment in the cabinet depends on the number of RF heads supported and redundancy option. Chapter 3 of this category 323 contains descriptions of the digital hardware boards used in the CU cabinet.

656

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess

Digital boards, power modules and fans


Listed below is the standard equipment fit, the number is dependent on the required configuration and redundancy.

Table 6-3 Standard equipment fit Cabinet type


Full size boards

6 RF heads
2 1 2 2 2 1

12 RF heads
2 1 3 2 3 1

18 RF heads
2 1 4 2 5 1

24 RF heads
2 1 5 2 6 1

BTC KSW GPROC2 MSI MSI RF GCLK


Half size boards

LANX MIX PIX BBBX


HDSL modem

1 1 2 1

1 1 2 1

1 1 2 1

1 1 2 1

EMU LTU
Top panel

1 3

1 6

1 9

1 12

T43 (E1) or BIB (E1) HIB (HDSL lines)


Power modules

1 1 2

1 1 2

1 1 2

1 1 2

IPSM Fans
Protection

2 3 3 1 1

2 3 3 1 1

2 3 3 1 1

2 3 3 1 1

CPB DAB

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

657

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

658

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

M-Cellaccess

Cabinet door inside labelling

The location of labels on the inside cabinet door:

HDSL MODEM SHELF LAYOUT LABEL

DOOR IDENTIFICATION LABEL

BSU LAYOUT LABEL

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

659

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

M-Cellaccess

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

660

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Appendix A (Erlang B Tables)

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

A1

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Erlang B
Offered Erl Carried Erl

No of Traffic Channels 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

Grade of Service 0.01% 0.0001 0.0001 0.0142 0.0142 0.0868 0.0868 0.2347 0.2347 0.4520 0.4519 0.7282 0.7282 1.0541 1.0540 1.4219 1.4218 1.8256 1.8254 2.2601 2.2599 2.7216 2.7214 3.2069 3.2066 3.7133 3.7130 4.2387 4.2383 4.7811 4.7806 5.3389 5.3384 5.9109 5.9103 6.4958 6.4952 7.0927 7.0920 7.7005 7.6997 8.3186 8.3177 8.9462 8.9453 9.5826 9.5817 0.1% 0.0010 0.0010 0.0458 0.0457 0.1938 0.1936 0.4393 0.4388 0.7621 0.7614 1.1459 1.1448 1.5786 1.5770 2.0513 2.0493 2.5575 2.5549 3.0920 3.0890 3.8511 3.8474 4.2314 4.2272 4.8305 4.8257 5.4464 5.4409 6.0772 6.0711 6.7215 6.7148 7.3781 7.3707 8.0459 8.0378 8.7239 8.7152 9.4115 9.4020 10.1077 10.0978 10.8121 10.8013 11.5241 11.5126 0.5% 0.0050 0.0050 0.1054 0.1049 0.3490 0.3473 0.7012 0.6977 1.1320 1.1264 1.6218 1.6137 2.1575 2.1467 2.7299 2.7163 3.3326 3.3159 3.9607 3.9409 4.6104 4.5874 5.2789 5.2525 5.9638 5.9340 6.6632 6.6299 7.3755 7.3387 8.0995 8.0590 8.8340 8.7898 9.5780 9.5301 10.3308 10.2791 11.0916 11.0362 11.8598 11.8005 12.6349 12.5718 13.4164 13.3493 1.0% 0.0101 0.0100 0.1526 0.1511 0.4555 0.4509 0.8694 0.8607 1.3608 1.3472 1.9090 1.8899 2.5009 2.4759 3.1276 3.0963 3.7825 3.7447 4.4612 4.4166 5.1599 5.1083 5.8760 5.8172 6.6072 6.5411 7.3517 7.2782 8.1080 8.0270 8.8750 8.7863 9.6516 9.5551 10.4369 10.3325 11.2301 11.1178 12.0306 11.9103 12.8378 12.7095 13.6513 13.5148 14.4705 14.3257 2.0% 0.0204 0.0200 0.2235 0.2190 0.6022 0.5902 1.0923 1.0704 1.6571 1.6240 2.2759 2.2304 2.9354 2.8767 3.6271 3.5545 4.3447 4.2578 5.0840 4.9823 5.8415 5.7247 6.6147 6.4824 7.4015 7.2535 8.2003 8.0363 9.0096 8.8294 9.8284 9.6319 10.6558 10.4427 11.4909 11.2611 12.3330 12.0863 13.1815 12.9179 14.0360 13.7553 14.8959 14.5980 15.7609 15.4457 4.0% 0.0417 0.0400 0.3333 0.3200 0.8120 0.7795 1.3994 1.3435 2.0573 1.9750 2.7649 2.6543 3.5095 3.3691 4.2830 4.1116 5.0796 4.8765 5.8954 5.6596 6.7272 6.4581 7.5727 7.2698 8.4300 8.0928 9.2977 8.9258 10.1745 9.7675 11.0594 10.6170 11.9516 11.4736 12.8504 12.3364 13.7552 13.2050 14.6654 14.0788 15.5807 14.9574 16.5005 15.8405 17.4245 16.7276 5.0% 0.0526 0.0500 0.3813 0.3622 0.8994 0.8544 1.5246 1.4484 2.2185 2.1075 2.9603 2.8123 3.7378 3.5509 4.5430 4.3158 5.3702 5.1017 6.2157 5.9049 7.0764 6.7226 7.9501 7.5526 8.8349 8.3932 9.7295 9.2430 10.6327 10.1011 11.5436 10.9664 12.4613 11.8382 13.3852 12.7159 14.3147 13.5989 15.2493 14.4868 16.1885 15.3791 17.1320 16.2754 18.0795 17.1756

A2

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Erlang B
Offered Erl Carried Erl

No of Traffic Channels 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47

Grade of Service 0.01% 10.2274 10.2264 10.8800 10.8789 11.5400 11.5388 12.2069 12.2057 12.8803 12.8791 13.5600 13.5587 14.2456 14.2442 14.9367 14.9352 15.6332 15.6317 16.3348 16.3332 17.0412 17.0395 17.7523 17.7505 18.4678 18.4660 19.1876 19.1857 19.9115 19.9095 20.6392 20.6372 21.3708 21.3686 22.1059 22.1037 22.8446 22.8423 23.5867 23.5843 24.3319 24.3295 25.0804 25.0779 25.8318 25.8293 26.5862 26.5836 0.1% 12.2432 12.2309 12.9689 12.9559 13.7008 13.6871 14.4385 14.4241 15.1818 15.1667 15.9304 15.9144 16.6839 16.6672 17.4420 17.4246 18.2047 18.1865 18.9716 18.9526 19.7426 19.7228 20.5174 20.4969 21.2960 21.2747 22.0781 22.0560 22.8636 22.8407 23.6523 23.6287 24.4442 24.4197 25.2391 25.2138 26.0369 26.0108 26.8374 26.8106 27.6407 27.6131 28.4466 28.4181 29.2549 29.2257 30.0657 30.0357 0.5% 14.2038 14.1328 14.9968 14.9218 15.7949 15.7160 16.5980 16.5150 17.4057 17.3187 18.2177 18.1267 19.0339 18.9387 19.8540 19.7547 20.6777 20.5743 21.5050 21.3975 22.3356 22.2239 23.1694 23.0536 24.0063 23.8863 24.8461 24.7219 25.6887 25.5603 26.5340 26.4013 27.3818 27.2449 28.2321 28.0910 29.0848 28.9394 29.9397 29.7900 30.7969 30.6429 31.6562 31.4979 32.5175 32.3549 33.3807 33.2138 1.0% 15.2950 15.1421 16.1246 15.9633 16.9588 16.7892 17.7974 17.6195 18.6402 18.4538 19.4869 19.2920 20.3373 20.1339 21.1912 20.9792 22.0483 21.8278 22.9087 22.6796 23.7720 23.5342 24.6381 24.3917 25.5070 25.2519 26.3785 26.1147 27.2525 26.9799 28.1288 27.8475 29.0074 28.7174 29.8882 29.5894 30.7712 30.4634 31.6561 31.3395 32.5430 32.2175 33.4317 33.0974 34.3223 33.9791 35.2146 34.8625 2.0% 16.6306 16.2980 17.5046 17.1545 18.3828 18.0151 19.2648 18.8795 20.1504 19.7474 21.0394 20.6186 21.9316 21.4929 22.8268 22.3703 23.7249 23.2504 24.6257 24.1332 25.5291 25.0185 26.4349 25.9062 27.3431 26.7963 28.2536 27.6885 29.1661 28.5828 30.0808 29.4791 30.9973 30.3774 31.9158 31.2775 32.8360 32.1793 33.7580 33.0828 34.6817 33.9880 35.6069 34.8948 36.5337 35.8030 37.4619 36.7127 4.0% 18.3526 17.6185 19.2842 18.5128 20.2193 19.4105 21.1576 20.3113 22.0988 21.2149 23.0429 22.1212 23.9896 23.0300 24.9388 23.9413 25.8904 24.8548 26.8442 25.7705 27.8002 26.6882 28.7581 27.6078 29.7180 28.5292 30.6796 29.4525 31.6431 30.3773 32.6081 31.3038 33.5748 32.2318 34.5430 33.1613 35.5126 34.0921 36.4837 35.0243 37.4560 35.9578 38.4297 36.8925 39.4046 37.8284 40.3807 38.7655 5.0% 19.0307 18.0792 19.9853 18.9860 20.9430 19.8959 21.9037 20.8085 22.8672 21.7238 23.8333 22.6416 24.8018 23.5617 25.7726 24.4840 26.7457 25.4084 27.7207 26.3347 28.6978 27.2629 29.6767 28.1928 30.6573 29.1245 31.6397 30.0577 32.6236 30.9924 33.6090 31.9286 34.5960 32.8662 35.5843 33.8050 36.5739 34.7452 37.5648 35.6866 38.5570 36.6291 39.5503 37.5728 40.5447 38.5175 41.5403 39.4633

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

A3

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Erlang B
Offered Erl Carried Erl

No of Traffic Channels 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71

Grade of Service 0.01% 27.3435 27.3407 28.1035 28.1006 28.8661 28.8632 29.6313 29.6284 30.3991 30.3980 31.1693 31.1661 31.9418 31.9386 32.7166 32.7134 33.4937 33.4904 34.2730 34.2695 35.0543 35.0508 35.8377 35.8342 36.6232 36.6195 37.4105 37.4068 38.1998 38.1960 38.9910 38.9871 39.7839 39.7800 40.5787 40.5746 41.3751 41.3710 42.1733 42.1691 42.9631 42.9888 43.7745 43.7701 44.5775 44.5730 45.3820 45.3775 0.1% 30.8789 30.8480 31.6943 31.6626 32.5119 32.4793 33.3316 33.2982 34.1533 34.1192 34.9771 34.9422 35.8028 35.7670 36.6305 36.5938 37.4599 37.4224 38.2911 38.2528 39.1241 39.0849 39.9587 39.9187 40.7950 40.7542 41.6328 41.5912 42.4723 42.4298 43.3132 43.2699 44.1557 44.1115 44.9995 44.9545 45.8448 45.7990 46.6915 46.6448 47.5395 47.4920 48.3888 48.3404 49.2394 49.1902 50.0913 50.0412 0.5% 34.2459 34.0747 35.1129 34.9374 35.9818 35.8018 36.8523 36.6680 37.7245 37.5359 38.5983 38.4053 39.4737 39.2763 40.3506 40.1489 41.2290 41.0229 42.1089 41.8983 42.9901 42.7752 43.8727 43.6534 44.7566 44.5329 45.6418 45.4136 46.5283 46.2957 47.4160 47.1789 48.3049 48.0633 49.1949 48.9489 50.0861 49.8356 50.9783 50.7234 51.8717 51.6123 52.7661 52.5022 53.6615 53.3932 54.5579 54.2851 1.0% 36.1086 35.7475 37.0042 36.6342 37.9014 37.5224 38.8001 38.4121 39.7003 39.3033 40.6019 40.1959 41.5049 41.0898 42.4092 41.9851 43.3149 42.8817 44.2218 43.7795 45.1299 44.6786 46.0392 45.5788 46.9497 46.4802 47.8613 47.3827 48.7740 48.2863 49.6878 49.1909 50.6026 50.0966 51.5185 51.0033 52.4353 51.9109 53.3531 52.8196 54.2718 53.7291 55.1915 54.6396 56.1120 55.5509 57.0335 56.4631 2.0% 38.3916 37.6238 39.3227 38.5363 40.2551 39.4500 41.1889 40.3651 42.1238 41.2813 43.0600 42.1988 43.9973 43.1174 44.9358 44.0371 45.8754 44.9579 46.8160 45.8797 47.7577 46.8026 48.7004 47.7264 49.6441 48.6512 50.5887 49.5769 51.5342 50.5036 52.4807 51.4311 53.4280 52.3594 54.3762 53.2887 55.3252 54.2187 56.2750 55.1495 57.2256 56.0811 58.1770 57.0134 59.1291 57.9465 60.0820 58.8803 4.0% 41.3580 39.7036 42.3363 40.6428 43.3157 41.5831 44.2962 42.5243 45.2776 43.4665 46.2600 44.4098 47.2434 45.3538 48.2278 46.2985 49.2127 47.2442 50.1987 48.1907 51.1854 49.1380 52.1730 50.0861 53.1613 51.0349 54.1504 51.9844 55.1403 52.9346 56.1308 53.8856 57.1220 54.8371 58.1139 55.7893 59.1064 58.7422 60.0996 57.8956 61.0934 58.6496 62.0878 59.6042 63.0827 60.5594 64.0783 61.5151 5.0% 42.5369 40.4100 43.5345 41.3578 44.5331 42.3064 45.5326 43.2559 46.5330 44.2063 47.5343 45.1576 48.5364 46.1096 49.5394 47.0624 50.5431 48.0160 51.5477 48.9703 52.5529 49.9253 53.5589 50.8810 54.5656 51.8373 55.5730 52.7943 56.5810 53.7519 57.5897 54.7102 58.5989 55.6690 59.6088 56.6284 60.6193 57.5883 61.6304 58.5488 62.6420 59.5099 63.6541 60.4714 64.6668 61.4335 65.6800 62.3960

A4

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Erlang B
Offered Erl Carried Erl

No of Traffic Channels 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95

Grade of Service 0.01% 46.1881 46.1835 46.9956 46.9909 47.8046 47.7998 48.6150 48.6101 49.4268 49.4218 50.2399 50.2349 51.0544 51.0493 51.8701 51.8650 52.6872 52.6819 53.5055 53.5002 54.3251 54.3197 55.1458 55.1403 55.9678 55.9622 56.7909 56.7852 57.6152 57.6094 58.4406 58.4347 59.2671 59.2611 60.0946 60.0886 60.9233 60.9172 61.7530 61.7468 62.5837 62.5775 63.4155 63.4091 64.2482 64.2418 65.0819 65.0754 0.1% 50.9444 50.8935 51.7987 51.7469 52.6542 52.6015 53.5108 53.4573 54.3685 54.3142 55.2274 55.1722 56.0873 56.0313 56.9483 56.8914 57.8104 57.7526 58.6734 58.6147 59.5375 59.4779 60.4025 60.3421 61.2685 61.2072 62.1354 62.0733 63.0033 62.9403 63.8721 63.8082 64.7417 64.6770 65.6123 65.5467 66.4837 66.4172 67.3559 67.2886 68.2290 68.1608 69.1029 69.0338 69.9776 69.9076 70.8531 70.7822 0.5% 55.4554 55.1781 56.3537 56.0720 57.2530 56.9668 58.1533 57.8625 59.0544 58.7591 59.9564 59.6566 60.8593 60.5550 61.7630 61.4542 62.6676 62.3542 63.5729 63.2551 64.4791 64.1567 65.3860 65.0591 66.2937 65.9622 67.2021 66.8661 68.1113 67.7708 69.0212 68.6761 69.9318 69.5822 70.8431 70.4889 71.7551 71.3963 72.6677 72.3044 73.5811 73.2132 74.4950 74.1225 75.4096 75.0326 76.3248 75.9432 1.0% 57.9558 57.3762 58.8789 58.2901 59.8028 59.2048 60.7276 60.1203 61.6531 61.0366 62.5794 61.9536 63.5065 62.8714 64.4343 63.7899 65.3628 64.7091 66.2920 65.8290 67.2219 66.5496 68.1524 67.4709 69.0837 68.3928 70.0156 69.3154 70.9481 70.2386 71.8812 71.1624 72.8150 72.0868 73.7494 73.0119 74.6843 73.9375 75.6198 74.8636 76.5560 75.7904 77.4926 76.7177 78.4298 77.6455 79.3676 78.5739 2.0% 61.0355 59.8148 61.9898 60.7500 62.9448 61.6859 63.9004 62.6224 64.8567 63.5596 65.8136 64.4973 66.7712 65.4357 67.7293 66.3747 68.6881 67.3143 69.6474 68.2545 70.6073 69.1952 71.5678 70.1364 72.5288 71.0783 73.4904 72.0206 74.4525 72.9634 75.4151 73.9068 76.3782 74.8506 77.3418 75.7950 78.3059 76.7398 79.2705 77.6851 80.2356 78.6309 81.2011 79.5771 82.1671 80.5237 83.1335 81.4708 4.0% 65.0744 62.4714 66.0710 63.4282 67.0682 64.3855 68.0659 65.3432 69.0641 66.3015 70.0628 67.2603 71.0619 68.2195 72.0616 69.1791 73.0617 70.1392 74.0622 71.0998 75.0632 72.0607 76.0647 73.0221 77.0665 73.9839 78.0688 74.9460 79.0715 75.9086 80.0745 76.8716 81.0780 77.8349 82.0818 78.7986 83.0861 79.7626 84.0906 80.7270 85.0956 81.6917 86.1009 82.6568 87.1065 83.6222 88.1125 84.5880 5.0% 66.6937 63.3590 67.7079 64.3225 68.7225 65.2864 69.7377 66.2508 70.7532 67.2156 71.7693 68.1808 72.7857 69.1464 73.8026 70.1125 74.8199 71.0789 75.8376 72.0457 76.8557 73.0129 77.8742 73.9805 78.8930 74.9484 79.9123 75.9167 80.9319 76.8853 81.9518 77.8542 82.9721 78.8235 83.9927 79.7931 85.0137 80.7630 86.0350 81.7333 87.0566 82.7038 88.0786 83.6746 89.1008 84.6458 90.1233 85.6172

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

A5

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Erlang B
Offered Erl Carried Erl

No of Traffic Channels 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119

Grade of Service 0.01% 65.9166 65.9100 66.7522 66.7456 67.5888 67.5820 68.4263 68.4194 69.2647 69.2578 70.1040 70.0970 70.9441 70.9370 71.7852 71.7780 72.6270 72.6198 73.4698 73.4624 74.3133 74.3059 75.1577 75.1501 76.0028 75.9952 76.8488 76.8411 77.6955 77.6878 78.5430 78.5352 79.3913 79.3834 80.2403 80.2323 81.0901 81.0820 81.9405 81.9324 82.7917 82.7835 83.6437 83.6353 84.4963 84.4878 85.3496 85.3410 0.1% 71.7294 71.6576 72.6064 72.5338 73.4842 73.4107 74.3627 74.2884 75.2420 75.1667 76.1220 76.0458 77.0026 76.9258 77.8840 77.8061 78.7661 78.6873 79.6488 79.5692 80.5322 80.4517 81.4163 81.3349 82.3010 82.2187 83.1863 83.1031 84.0723 83.9882 84.9588 84.8739 85.8460 85.7602 86.7338 86.6471 87.6222 87.5346 88.5112 88.4227 89.4007 89.3113 90.2908 90.2005 91.1815 91.0903 92.0727 91.9806 0.5% 77.2407 76.8545 78.1571 77.7663 79.0741 78.6787 79.9917 79.5918 80.9099 80.5054 81.8287 81.4195 82.7480 82.3342 83.6678 83.2495 84.5882 84.1653 85.5092 85.0816 86.4306 85.9985 87.3526 86.9158 88.2750 87.8337 89.1980 88.7520 90.1215 89.6709 91.0454 90.5902 91.9698 91.5100 92.8947 92.4303 93.8201 93.3510 94.7459 94.2722 95.6722 95.1938 96.5989 96.1159 97.5260 97.0384 98.4536 97.9613 1.0% 80.3059 79.5028 81.2447 80.4322 82.1840 81.3622 83.1238 82.2926 84.0642 83.2235 85.0050 84.1549 85.9463 85.0868 86.8880 86.0191 87.8303 86.9519 88.7729 87.8852 89.7161 88.8189 90.6597 89.7531 91.6037 90.6876 92.5481 91.6226 93.4930 92.5580 94.4383 93.4939 95.3840 94.4301 96.3301 95.3668 97.2766 96.3038 98.2235 97.2412 99.1707 98.1790 100.1184 99.1172 101.0664 100.0558 102.0148 100.9947 2.0% 84.1003 82.4183 85.0676 83.3663 86.0353 84.3146 87.0035 85.2634 87.9720 86.2125 88.9409 87.1621 89.9102 88.1120 90.8800 89.0624 91.8500 90.0130 92.8205 90.9641 93.7914 91.9155 94.7626 92.8673 95.7341 93.8194 96.7060 94.7719 97.6783 95.7247 98.6509 96.6779 99.6238 97.6313 100.5971 98.5851 101.5707 99.5393 102.5446 100.4937 103.5188 101.4484 104.4934 102.4035 105.4682 103.3588 105.4434 104.3145 4.0% 89.1188 85.5540 90.1254 86.5204 91.1324 87.4871 92.1396 88.4540 93.1472 89.4213 94.1551 90.3889 95.1633 91.3567 96.1717 92.3249 97.1805 93.2933 98.1895 94.2619 99.1988 95.2309 100.2084 96.2001 101.2183 97.1696 102.2284 98.1393 103.2388 99.1093 104.2494 100.0795 105.2603 101.0499 106.2715 102.0206 107.2829 102.9915 108.2945 103.9627 109.3063 104.9341 110.3184 105.9057 111.3308 106.8775 112.3433 107.8476 5.0% 91.1462 86.5889 92.1693 87.5608 93.1927 88.5331 94.2164 89.5056 95.2404 90.4784 96.2646 91.4514 97.2891 92.4247 98.3139 93.3982 99.3389 94.3719 100.3642 95.3460 101.3897 96.3202 102.4154 97.2947 103.4414 98.2694 104.4677 99.2443 105.4941 100.2194 106.5208 101.1948 107.5477 102.1703 108.5748 103.1461 109.6022 104.1221 110.6297 105.0983 111.6575 106.0748 112.6855 107.0512 113.7136 108.0280 114.7420 109.0049

A6

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Erlang B
Offered Erl Carried Erl

No of Traffic Channels 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 127 128 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143

Grade of Service 0.01% 86.2036 86.1949 87.0582 87.0495 87.9135 87.9047 88.7695 88.7606 89.6261 89.6172 90.4834 90.4743 91.3413 91.3322 92.1998 92.1906 93.0589 93.0496 93.9187 93.9093 94.7790 94.7696 95.6400 95.6304 96.5015 96.4919 97.3636 97.3539 98.2263 98.2165 99.0896 99.0797 99.9534 99.9434 100.8178 100.8077 101.6827 101.6725 102.5481 102.5379 103.4141 103.4038 104.2807 104.2702 105.1477 105.1372 106.0153 106.0047 0.1% 92.9645 92.8715 93.8568 93.7629 94.7496 94.6549 95.6430 95.5473 96.5369 96.4403 97.4312 97.3338 98.3261 98.2278 99.2215 99.1223 100.1174 100.0173 101.0138 100.9128 101.9106 101.8087 102.8080 102.7052 103.7058 103.6021 104.6040 104.4994 105.5028 105.3972 106.4019 106.2955 107.3015 107.1942 108.2016 108.0934 109.1021 108.9930 110.0030 109.8930 110.9044 110.7935 111.8062 111.6944 112.7084 112.5957 113.6110 113.4974 0.5% 99.3816 98.8847 100.3100 99.8085 101.2389 100.7327 102.1681 101.6573 103.0978 102.5823 104.0279 103.5077 104.9583 104.4335 105.8892 105.3597 106.8204 106.2863 107.7520 107.2132 108.6840 108.1405 109.6163 109.0682 110.5490 109.9963 111.4821 110.9247 112.4155 111.8534 113.3493 112.7826 114.2834 113.7120 115.2179 114.6418 116.1527 115.5720 117.0879 116.5024 118.0234 117.4332 118.9592 118.3644 119.8953 119.2958 120.8318 120.2276 1.0% 102.9638 101.9340 103.9128 102.8736 104.8622 103.8136 105.8121 104.7540 106.7623 105.6947 107.7128 106.6357 108.6637 107.5771 109.6149 108.5187 110.5664 109.4608 111.5183 110.4031 112.4705 111.3458 113.4230 112.2887 114.3758 113.2320 115.3289 114.1756 116.2823 115.1195 117.2360 116.0637 118.1900 117.0081 119.1443 117.9529 120.0989 118.8980 121.0538 119.8433 122.0090 120.7889 122.9645 121.7348 123.9202 122.6810 124.8762 123.8274 2.0% 107.4188 105.2704 108.3945 106.2267 109.3706 107.1832 110.3469 108.1400 111.3235 109.0970 112.3004 110.0544 113.2775 111.0120 114.2549 111.9698 115.2326 112.9280 116.2106 113.8864 117.1888 114.8450 118.1673 115.8039 119.1460 116.7631 120.1250 117.7225 121.1042 118.6821 122.0836 119.6420 123.0633 120.6021 124.0433 121.5624 125.0234 122.5230 126.0038 123.4838 126.9845 124.4448 127.9653 125.4060 128.9464 126.3675 129.9277 127.3292 4.0% 113.3561 108.8218 114.3691 109.7943 115.3823 110.7670 116.3957 111.7398 117.4093 112.7129 118.4231 113.6862 119.4372 114.6597 120.4514 115.6333 121.4658 116.6072 122.4805 117.5812 123.4953 118.5555 124.5103 119.5299 125.5255 120.5045 126.5409 121.4792 127.5564 122.4542 128.5722 123.4293 129.5881 124.4045 130.6042 125.3800 131.6204 126.3556 132.6369 127.3314 133.6535 128.3073 134.6702 129.2834 135.6872 130.2597 136.7043 131.2361 5.0% 115.7706 109.9821 116.7993 110.9594 117.8283 111.9369 118.8574 112.9146 119.8868 113.8924 120.9163 114.8704 121.9459 115.8486 122.9758 116.8270 124.0058 117.8055 125.0360 118.7842 126.0664 119.7631 127.0970 120.7421 128.1277 121.7213 129.1585 122.7006 130.1896 123.6801 131.2207 124.6597 132.2521 125.6395 133.2836 126.6194 134.3152 127.5994 135.3470 128.5796 136.3789 129.5600 137.4110 130.5405 138.4432 131.5211 139.4756 132.5018

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

A7

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Erlang B
Offered Erl Carried Erl

No of Traffic Channels 151 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 152 153 154 155 156 157 158 159 160 161 162 163 164 165 166 167

Grade of Service 0.01% 112.9739 112.9626 106.8834 106.8727 107.7520 107.7412 108.6211 108.6102 109.4906 109.4797 110.3607 110.3497 111.2313 111.2202 112.1024 112.0911 113.8459 113.8345 114.7184 114.7069 115.5913 115.5797 116.4647 116.4530 117.3385 117.3268 118.2128 118.2010 119.0875 119.0756 119.9627 119.9507 120.8383 120.8262 121.7144 121.7022 122.5908 122.5788 123.4877 123.4554 124.3450 124.3326 125.2228 125.2102 126.1009 126.0883 126.9795 126.9668 0.1% 120.8482 120.7253 114.5140 114.3995 115.4174 115.3020 116.3212 116.2049 117.2255 117.1082 118.1301 118.0119 119.0351 118.9160 119.9404 119.8205 121.7523 121.6306 122.6588 122.5362 123.5657 123.4421 124.4729 124.3485 125.3805 125.2551 126.2885 126.1622 127.1968 127.0696 128.1054 127.9773 129.0144 128.8854 129.9238 129.7938 130.8335 130.7028 131.7435 131.6117 132.6538 132.5212 133.5645 133.4309 134.4755 134.3410 135.3868 135.2514 0.5% 128.3345 127.6928 121.7685 121.1597 122.7056 122.0921 123.6430 123.0248 124.5807 123.9578 125.5187 124.8911 126.4570 125.8247 127.3956 126.7586 129.2737 128.6273 130.2131 129.5621 131.1529 130.4971 132.0929 131.4325 133.0332 132.3681 133.9738 133.3040 134.9147 134.2401 135.8558 135.1765 136.7972 136.1132 137.7389 137.0502 138.6808 137.9874 139.6230 138.9249 140.5654 139.8628 141.5081 140.8006 142.4510 141.7388 143.3942 142.6773 1.0% 132.5337 131.2083 125.8325 124.5741 126.7890 125.5211 127.7458 126.4683 128.7029 127.4158 129.6602 128.3636 130.6178 129.3116 131.5756 130.2598 133.4920 132.1571 134.4506 133.1061 135.4094 134.0553 136.3684 135.0047 137.3277 135.9544 138.2872 136.9044 139.2470 137.8545 140.2070 138.8049 141.1672 139.7555 142.1276 140.7063 143.0883 141.6574 144.0491 142.6086 145.0102 143.5601 145.9715 144.5118 146.9330 145.4637 147.8948 146.4158 2.0% 137.7858 135.0301 130.9092 128.2911 131.8910 129.2532 132.8729 130.2155 133.8551 131.1780 134.8375 132.1407 135.8200 133.1036 136.8028 134.0667 138.7690 135.9936 139.7523 136.9573 140.7359 137.9212 141.7196 138.8852 142.7036 139.8495 143.6877 140.8140 144.6720 141.7786 145.6565 142.7434 146.6412 143.7084 147.6261 144.6736 148.6111 145.6389 149.5963 146.6044 150.5817 147.5701 151.5673 148.5360 152.5530 149.5020 153.5389 150.4682 4.0% 144.8466 139.0527 137.7215 132.2126 138.7389 133.1894 139.7565 134.1662 140.7742 135.1432 141.7921 136.1204 142.8101 137.0977 143.8282 138.0751 145.8650 140.0304 146.8836 141.0083 147.9024 141.9863 148.9212 142.9644 149.9403 143.9426 150.9594 144.9210 151.9787 145.8995 152.9981 146.8782 154.0177 147.8570 155.0374 148.8359 156.0572 149.8149 157.0771 150.7940 158.0972 151.7733 159.1174 152.7527 160.1377 153.7322 161.1581 154.7118 5.0% 147.7394 140.3525 140.5081 133.4827 141.5408 134.4637 142.5736 135.4449 143.6065 136.4261 144.6395 137.4075 145.6727 138.3891 146.7060 139.3707 148.7730 141.3343 149.8067 142.3164 150.8405 143.2985 151.8744 144.2807 152.9085 145.2631 153.9426 146.2455 154.9769 147.2281 156.0113 148.2108 157.0459 149.1936 158.0805 150.1765 159.1152 151.1595 160.1501 152.1426 161.1850 153.1258 162.2201 154.1091 163.2553 155.0925 164.2906 156.0760

A8

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Erlang B
Offered Erl Carried Erl

No of Traffic Channels 168 169 170 171 172 173 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 182 183 184 185 186 187 188 189 190 191

Grade of Service 0.01% 127.8584 127.8456 128.7378 128.7249 129.6175 129.6045 130.4976 130.4846 131.3782 131.3650 132.2591 132.2459 133.1404 133.1271 134.0221 134.0087 134.9041 134.8906 135.7865 135.7730 136.6693 136.6557 137.5525 137.5387 138.4360 138.4222 139.3199 139.3060 140.2041 140.1901 141.0887 141.0746 141.9737 141.9595 142.8590 142.8447 143.7446 143.7302 144.6306 144.6161 145.5169 145.5023 146.4035 146.3889 147.2905 147.2758 148.1778 148.1630 0.1% 136.2985 136.1622 137.2104 137.0732 138.1227 137.9846 139.0353 138.8962 139.9482 139.8082 140.8614 140.7205 141.7749 141.6331 142.6887 142.5460 143.6028 143.4592 144.5172 144.3727 145.4319 145.2864 146.3468 146.2005 147.2621 147.1148 148.1776 148.0295 149.0935 148.9444 150.0096 149.8596 150.9260 150.7750 151.8426 151.6908 152.7595 152.6068 153.6768 153.5231 154.5942 154.4396 155.5120 155.3564 156.4299 156.2735 157.3482 157.1909 0.5% 144.3377 143.6160 145.2814 144.5549 146.2253 145.4942 147.1694 146.4336 148.1138 147.3733 149.0585 148.3132 150.0033 149.2533 150.9484 150.1937 151.8938 151.1343 152.8393 152.0751 153.7851 153.0162 154.7311 153.9574 155.6773 154.8989 156.6237 155.8406 157.5704 156.7825 158.5172 157.7247 159.4643 158.6670 160.4116 159.6096 161.3591 160.5523 162.3068 161.4953 163.2547 162.4385 164.2028 163.3818 165.1511 164.3254 166.0997 165.2692 1.0% 148.8567 147.3681 149.8189 148.3207 150.7812 149.2734 151.7438 150.2263 152.7065 151.1795 153.6695 152.1328 154.6326 153.0863 155.5960 154.0400 156.5595 154.9939 157.5232 155.9480 158.4872 156.9023 159.4513 157.8567 160.4156 158.8114 161.3800 159.7662 162.3447 160.7212 163.3095 161.6764 164.2746 162.6318 165.2397 163.5874 166.2051 164.5431 167.1707 165.4990 168.1364 166.4550 169.1023 167.4113 170.0684 168.3677 171.0346 169.3242 2.0% 154.5250 151.4345 155.5112 152.4010 156.4976 153.3677 157.4842 154.3345 158.4709 155.3015 159.4578 156.2686 160.4448 157.2359 161.4320 158.2034 162.4194 159.1710 163.4069 160.1387 164.3945 161.1066 165.3823 162.0747 166.3702 163.0428 167.3583 164.0112 168.3466 164.9796 169.3350 165.9483 170.3235 166.9170 171.3121 167.8859 172.3009 168.8549 173.2899 169.8241 174.2790 170.7934 175.2682 171.7628 176.2575 172.7324 177.2470 173.7021 4.0% 162.1787 155.6915 163.1993 156.6713 164.2201 157.6513 165.2410 158.6314 166.2620 159.6116 167.2832 160.5918 168.3044 161.5722 169.3258 162.5527 170.3472 163.5334 171.3688 164.5141 172.3905 165.4949 173.4123 166.4758 174.4342 167.4568 175.4562 168.4380 176.4783 169.4192 177.5005 170.4005 178.5228 171.3819 179.5452 172.3634 180.5678 173.3450 181.5904 174.3268 182.6131 175.3086 183.6359 176.2904 184.6588 177.2724 185.6818 178.2545 5.0% 165.3260 157.0597 166.3615 158.0434 167.3970 159.0272 168.4327 160.0111 169.4685 160.9951 170.5044 161.9792 171.5404 162.9634 172.5765 163.9477 173.6127 164.9320 174.6490 165.9165 175.6853 166.9011 176.7218 167.8857 177.7583 168.8704 178.7950 169.8552 179.8317 170.8401 180.8686 171.8251 181.9055 172.8102 182.9425 173.7953 183.9795 174.7806 185.0167 175.7659 186.0540 176.7513 187.0913 177.7367 188.1287 178.7223 189.1662 179.7079

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

A9

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Erlang B
Offered Erl Carried Erl

No of Traffic Channels 192 193 194 195 196 197 198 199 200 201 202 203 204 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 213 214 215

Grade of Service 0.01% 149.0655 149.0506 149.9535 149.9385 150.8418 150.8267 151.7304 151.7152 152.6193 152.6040 153.5086 153.4932 154.3981 154.3827 155.2880 155.2725 156.1782 156.1625 157.0686 157.0529 157.9594 157.9436 158.8505 158.8346 159.7419 159.7259 160.6336 160.6175 161.5256 161.5094 162.4178 162.4016 163.3104 163.2941 164.2032 164.1868 165.0964 165.0798 165.9898 165.9732 166.8835 166.8668 167.7774 167.7607 168.6717 168.6548 169.5662 169.5493 0.1% 158.2667 158.1085 159.1855 159.0263 160.1045 159.9444 161.0238 160.8628 161.9433 161.7814 162.8631 162.7002 163.7831 163.6194 164.7034 164.5387 165.6239 165.4583 166.5447 166.3781 167.4657 167.2982 168.3869 168.2185 169.3084 169.1390 170.2301 170.0598 171.1520 170.9808 172.0741 171.9021 172.9965 172.8235 173.9191 173.7452 174.8420 174.6671 175.7650 175.5893 176.6883 176.5116 177.6118 177.4342 178.5355 178.3570 179.4595 179.2800 0.5% 167.0484 166.2131 167.9973 167.1573 168.9464 168.1017 169.8957 169.0462 170.8452 169.9909 171.7948 170.9359 172.7447 171.8810 173.6948 172.8263 174.6450 173.7718 175.5954 174.7174 176.5460 175.6833 177.4968 176.6093 178.4478 177.5555 179.3989 178.5019 180.3502 179.4485 181.3017 180.3952 182.2534 181.3421 183.2052 182.2892 184.1572 183.2364 185.1094 184.1839 186.0618 185.1315 187.0143 186.0792 187.9670 187.0271 188.9198 187.9752 1.0% 172.0010 170.2810 172.9675 171.2379 173.9343 172.1949 174.9012 173.1522 175.8682 174.1095 176.8354 175.0671 177.8028 176.0248 178.7703 176.9826 179.7380 177.9406 180.7059 178.8988 181.6739 179.8571 182.6420 180.8158 183.6103 181.7742 184.5787 182.7330 185.5473 183.6919 186.5161 184.6509 187.4850 185.6101 188.4540 186.5695 189.4232 187.5290 190.3925 188.4886 191.3620 189.4483 192.3316 190.4083 193.3013 191.3683 194.2712 192.3285 2.0% 178.2366 174.6719 179.2264 175.6419 180.2153 176.6119 181.2063 177.5821 182.1964 178.5525 183.1867 179.5229 184.1771 180.4935 185.1676 181.4642 186.1582 182.4350 187.1490 183.4060 188.1398 184.3770 189.1308 185.3482 190.1219 186.3195 191.1132 187.2909 192.1045 188.2624 193.0960 189.2341 194.0876 190.2058 195.0793 191.1777 196.0711 192.1497 197.0630 193.1218 198.0551 194.0940 199.0472 195.0663 200.0395 196.0387 201.0318 197.0112 4.0% 186.7049 179.2367 187.7280 180.2189 188.7513 181.2013 189.7747 182.1837 190.7981 183.1662 191.8217 184.1488 192.8453 185.1315 193.8690 186.1143 194.8929 187.0971 195.9168 188.0801 196.9407 189.0631 197.9648 190.0482 198.9890 191.0294 200.0132 192.0127 201.0375 192.9960 202.0619 193.9794 203.0864 194.9829 204.1109 195.9465 205.1356 196.9302 206.1603 197.9139 207.1851 198.8977 208.2100 199.8816 209.2349 200.8655 210.2599 201.8495 5.0% 190.2038 180.6936 191.2415 181.6794 192.2792 182.6653 193.3170 183.6512 194.3549 184.6372 195.3929 185.6233 196.4310 186.6094 197.4691 187.5957 198.5073 188.5820 199.5456 189.5683 200.5839 190.5548 201.6224 191.5413 202.6609 192.5278 203.6994 193.5145 204.7381 194.5012 205.7768 195.4880 206.8156 198.4748 207.8544 197.4617 208.8933 198.4487 209.9323 199.4357 210.9714 200.4228 212.0105 201.4100 213.0497 202.3972 214.0889 203.3845

A10

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Erlang B
Offered Erl Carried Erl

No of Traffic Channels 216 217 218 219 220 221 222 223 224 225 226 227 228 229 230 231 232 233 234 235 236 237 238 239

Grade of Service 0.01% 170.4610 170.4440 171.3561 171.3390 172.2514 172.2342 173.1470 173.1297 174.0429 174.0255 174.9391 174.9216 175.8354 175.8179 176.7321 176.7144 177.6290 177.6113 178.5262 178.5083 179.4236 179.4057 180.3213 180.3033 181.2192 181.2011 182.1174 182.0992 183.0158 182.9975 183.9145 183.8961 184.8134 184.7950 185.7126 185.6940 186.6120 186.5933 187.5117 187.4929 188.4115 188.3927 189.3116 189.2927 190.2120 190.1930 191.1126 191.0935 0.1% 180.3836 180.2032 181.3080 181.1267 182.2326 182.0503 183.1573 182.9742 184.0823 183.8983 185.0075 184.8225 185.9329 185.7470 188.8585 186.6717 187.7844 187.5966 188.7104 188.5217 189.6366 189.4469 190.5630 190.3724 191.4896 191.2981 192.4164 192.2240 193.3434 193.1501 194.2706 194.0763 195.1980 195.0028 196.1256 195.9294 197.0533 196.8563 197.9813 197.7833 198.9094 198.7105 199.8377 199.6379 200.7662 200.5655 201.6949 201.4932 0.5% 189.8728 188.9235 190.8260 189.8719 191.7793 190.8204 192.7328 191.7691 193.6865 192.7180 194.6403 193.6671 195.5942 194.6163 196.5484 195.5658 197.5026 196.5151 198.4571 197.4648 199.4116 198.4146 200.3664 199.3645 201.3212 200.3146 202.2763 201.2649 203.2314 202.2153 204.1868 203.1658 205.1422 204.1165 206.0978 205.0673 207.0536 206.0183 208.0095 206.9694 208.9655 207.9207 209.9217 208.8721 210.8780 209.8236 211.8345 210.7753 1.0% 195.2412 193.2888 196.2114 194.2492 194.1816 195.2098 198.1521 196.1705 199.1226 197.1314 200.0933 198.0924 201.0641 199.0535 202.0351 200.0147 203.0061 200.9761 203.9774 201.9376 204.9487 202.8992 205.9201 203.8609 206.8917 204.8228 207.8634 205.7848 208.8353 206.7469 209.8072 207.7091 210.7793 208.6715 211.7515 209.6340 212.7238 210.5966 213.6962 211.5593 214.6688 212.5221 215.6415 213.4850 216.6143 214.4481 217.5872 215.4113 2.0% 202.0243 197.9838 203.0169 198.9585 204.0096 199.9294 205.0023 200.9023 205.9952 201.8753 206.9882 202.8485 207.9813 203.8217 208.9745 204.7950 209.9678 205.7685 210.9612 206.7420 211.9547 207.7157 212.9483 208.6894 213.9421 209.6632 214.9358 210.6371 215.9297 211.6111 216.9237 212.5853 217.9178 213.5595 218.9120 214.5338 219.9063 215.5081 220.9006 216.4826 221.8951 217.4572 222.8897 218.4319 223.8843 219.4066 224.8790 220.3814 4.0% 211.2850 202.8336 212.3102 203.8178 213.3355 204.8021 214.3608 205.7864 215.3862 206.7707 216.4117 207.7552 217.4372 208.7397 218.4628 209.7243 219.4885 210.7090 220.5143 211.6937 221.5401 212.6785 222.5660 213.6633 223.5919 214.6483 224.6180 215.6332 225.6441 216.6183 226.6702 217.6034 227.6965 218.5886 228.7227 219.5738 229.7491 220.5591 230.7755 221.5445 231.8020 222.5299 232.8286 223.5154 233.8552 224.5010 234.8819 225.4866 5.0% 215.1283 204.3718 216.1676 205.3593 217.2071 206.3467 218.2466 207.3343 219.2862 208.3218 220.3258 209.3095 221.3655 210.2972 222.4052 211.2850 223.4450 212.2728 224.4849 213.2607 225.5248 214.2486 226.5648 215.2366 227.6049 216.2246 228.6450 217.2128 229.6852 218.2009 230.7254 219.1981 231.7657 220.1774 232.8060 221.1657 233.8464 222.1541 234.8868 223.1425 235.9273 224.1310 236.9679 225.1195 238.0085 226.1081 239.0492 227.0967

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

A11

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Erlang B
Offered Erl Carried Erl

No of Traffic Channels 240 241 242 243 244 245 246 247 248 249 250 251 252 253 254 255 256 257 258 259 260 261 262 263

Grade of Service 0.01% 192.0134 191.9942 192.9145 192.8952 193.8157 193.7963 194.7172 194.6978 195.6190 195.5994 196.5209 196.5013 197.4231 197.4034 198.3255 198.3057 199.2281 199.2082 200.1310 200.1109 201.0340 201.0139 201.9373 201.9171 202.8408 202.8205 203.7445 203.7241 204.6484 204.6279 205.5525 205.5320 206.4568 206.4362 207.3614 207.3407 208.2661 208.2453 209.1711 209.1502 210.0763 210.0553 210.9816 210.9605 211.8872 211.8660 212.7930 212.7717 0.1% 202.6238 202.4212 203.5528 203.3493 204.4821 204.2776 205.4115 205.2061 206.3411 206.1347 207.2708 207.0636 208.2008 207.9926 209.1309 208.9218 210.0612 209.8511 210.9916 210.7806 211.9222 211.7103 212.8530 212.6402 213.7840 213.5702 214.7151 214.5004 215.6484 215.4308 216.5779 216.3613 217.5095 217.2920 218.4413 218.2228 219.3732 219.1539 220.3053 220.0850 221.2376 221.0164 222.1700 221.9479 223.1026 222.8795 224.0354 223.8113 0.5% 212.7911 211.7271 213.7478 212.6790 214.7046 213.6311 215.6616 214.5833 216.6188 215.5357 217.5760 216.4882 218.5334 217.4408 219.4910 218.3935 220.4486 219.3464 221.4064 220.2994 222.3643 221.2525 223.3224 222.2058 224.2806 223.1591 225.2388 224.1127 226.1973 225.0663 227.1558 226.0200 228.1145 226.9739 229.0733 227.9279 230.0322 228.8820 230.9912 229.8383 231.9504 230.7906 232.9097 231.7451 233.8691 232.6997 234.8286 233.6544 1.0% 218.5602 218.3746 219.5333 217.3380 220.5066 218.3015 221.4799 219.2651 222.4534 220.2288 223.4270 221.1927 224.4007 222.1566 225.3745 223.1207 226.3484 224.0849 227.3224 225.0492 228.2965 226.0135 229.2707 226.9780 230.2451 227.9426 231.2195 228.9073 232.1941 229.8721 233.1687 230.8370 234.1435 231.8020 235.1183 232.7671 236.0933 233.7323 237.0683 234.6977 238.0435 235.6631 239.0188 236.6288 239.9941 237.5942 240.9696 238.5599 2.0% 225.8739 221.3564 226.8688 222.3314 227.8638 223.3065 228.8589 224.2817 229.8540 225.2569 230.8493 226.2323 231.8446 227.2077 232.8401 228.1833 233.8356 229.1589 234.8312 230.1346 235.8269 231.1103 236.8226 232.0862 237.8185 233.0621 238.8144 234.0381 239.8104 235.0142 240.8065 235.9904 241.8027 236.9667 242.7990 237.9430 243.7953 238.9194 244.7917 239.8959 245.7882 240.8724 246.7848 241.8491 247.7814 242.8258 248.7781 243.8026 4.0% 235.9086 226.4723 236.9354 227.4580 237.9623 228.4436 238.9892 229.4296 240.0162 230.4155 241.0432 231.4015 242.0703 232.3875 243.0975 233.3736 244.1247 234.3597 245.1520 235.3459 246.1793 236.3321 247.2067 237.3184 248.2341 238.3048 249.2616 239.2912 250.2892 240.2776 251.3168 241.2641 252.3445 242.2507 253.3722 243.2373 254.4000 244.2240 255.4278 245.2107 256.4557 246.1975 257.4836 247.1843 258.5116 248.1712 259.5397 249.1581 5.0% 240.0899 228.0854 241.1307 229.0741 242.1715 230.0629 243.2123 231.0517 244.2533 232.0406 245.2942 233.0295 246.3353 234.0185 247.3763 235.0075 248.4175 235.9966 249.4586 236.9857 250.4999 237.9749 251.5411 238.9641 252.5824 239.9533 253.6238 240.9426 254.6652 241.9320 255.7067 242.9213 258.7482 243.9103 257.7897 244.9003 258.8313 245.8898 259.8730 246.8793 260.9147 247.8689 261.9564 248.8586 262.9982 249.8483 264.0400 250.8380

A12

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Erlang B
Offered Erl Carried Erl

No of Traffic Channels 264 265 266 267 268 269 270 271 272 273 274 275 276 277 278 279 280 281 282 283 284 285 286 287

Grade of Service 0.01% 213.6989 213.6776 214.6051 214.5836 215.5115 215.4899 216.4180 216.3964 217.3248 217.3030 218.2317 218.2099 219.1389 219.1170 220.0462 220.0242 220.9537 220.9316 221.8614 221.8393 222.7694 222.7471 223.6774 223.6551 224.5857 224.5633 225.4942 225.4716 226.4028 226.3802 227.3117 227.2889 228.2207 228.1979 229.1299 229.1070 230.0393 230.0162 230.9488 230.9257 231.8585 231.8354 232.7685 232.7452 233.6785 233.6552 234.5888 234.5653 0.1% 224.9683 224.7433 225.9013 225.6754 226.8345 226.6077 227.7679 227.5401 228.7014 228.4727 229.6351 229.4054 230.5689 230.3383 231.5029 231.2714 232.4370 232.2045 233.3712 233.1379 234.3056 234.0713 235.2402 235.0050 236.1749 235.9387 237.1098 236.8726 238.0447 237.8067 238.9799 238.7409 239.9152 239.6752 240.8506 240.6097 241.7861 241.5444 242.7218 242.4791 243.6577 243.4140 244.5936 244.3491 245.5298 245.2842 246.4680 246.2195 0.5% 235.7882 234.6093 236.7480 235.5642 237.7078 236.5193 238.6678 237.4745 239.6279 238.4298 240.5881 239.3852 341.5485 240.3407 242.5089 241.2963 243.4694 242.2521 244.4301 243.2080 245.3909 244.1639 246.3518 245.1200 247.3127 246.0762 248.2738 247.0325 249.2351 247.9889 250.1964 248.9454 251.1578 249.9020 252.1193 250.8587 253.0809 251.8155 254.0427 252.7725 255.0045 253.7295 255.9665 254.6866 256.9285 255.6439 257.8907 256.6012 1.0% 241.9451 239.5257 242.9208 240.4916 243.8965 241.4576 244.8724 242.4237 245.8483 243.3898 246.8244 244.3581 247.8005 245.3225 248.7767 246.2889 249.7530 247.2555 250.7294 248.2221 251.7059 249.1889 252.6825 250.1557 253.6592 251.1226 254.6360 252.0896 255.6129 253.0567 256.5898 254.0239 257.5669 254.9912 258.5440 255.9585 259.5212 256.9260 260.4985 257.8935 261.4759 258.8611 262.4534 259.8288 263.4309 260.7966 264.4086 261.7645 2.0% 249.7749 244.7794 250.7718 245.7564 251.7687 248.7334 252.7658 247.7105 253.7629 248.6875 254.7600 249.6648 255.7573 250.6421 256.7546 251.6195 257.7520 252.5969 258.7494 253.5744 259.7470 254.5520 260.7445 255.5297 261.7422 256.5074 262.7400 257.4852 263.7378 258.4630 264.7357 259.4409 265.7336 260.4189 266.7316 261.3970 267.7297 262.3751 268.7279 263.3533 269.7261 264.3316 270.7244 265.3099 271.7227 266.2883 272.7211 267.2667 4.0% 260.5678 250.1451 261.5959 251.1321 262.6241 252.1192 263.6524 253.1063 264.6807 254.0934 265.7090 255.0807 266.7374 256.0679 267.7659 257.0552 268.7944 258.0426 269.8229 259.0300 270.8515 260.0175 271.8802 261.0050 272.9089 261.9925 273.9376 262.9801 274.9664 263.9677 275.9952 264.9554 277.0241 265.9431 278.0530 266.9309 279.0820 267.9187 280.1110 268.9066 281.1401 269.8945 282.1692 270.8824 283.1983 271.8704 284.2275 272.8584 5.0% 265.0819 251.8278 266.1238 252.8176 267.1658 253.8075 268.2078 254.7974 269.2498 255.7873 270.2919 258.7773 271.3340 257.7673 272.3762 258.7574 273.4184 259.7475 274.4606 260.7376 275.5029 261.7278 276.5453 262.7180 277.5876 263.7083 278.6301 264.6986 279.6725 265.6889 280.7150 266.6793 281.7575 267.6697 282.8001 268.6601 283.8427 269.6506 284.8854 270.6411 285.9281 271.6316 286.9708 272.6222 288.0135 273.6129 289.0563 274.6035

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

A13

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Erlang B
Offered Erl Carried Erl

No of Traffic Channels 288 289 290 291 292 293 294 295 296 297 298 299 300 301 302 303 304 305 306 307 308 309 310 311

Grade of Service 0.01% 235.4992 235.4757 236.4099 236.3862 237.3206 237.2969 238.2316 238.2078 239.1427 239.1188 240.0540 240.0300 240.9655 240.9414 241.8771 241.8529 242.7889 242.7647 243.7009 243.6765 244.6130 244.5886 245.5253 245.5008 246.4378 246.4132 247.3504 247.3257 248.2632 248.2384 249.1762 249.1512 250.0893 250.0643 251.0025 250.9774 251.9160 251.8908 252.8296 252.8043 253.7433 253.7179 254.6572 254.6317 255.5713 255.5457 258.4855 258.4598 0.1% 247.4024 247.1550 248.3389 248.0906 249.2756 249.0263 250.2124 249.9622 251.1493 250.8981 252.0863 251.8343 253.0235 252.7705 253.9608 253.7069 254.8983 254.6434 255.8359 255.5800 256.7736 256.5168 257.7114 257.4537 258.6494 258.3907 259.5875 259.3279 260.5257 260.2652 261.4640 261.2026 262.4025 262.1401 263.3411 263.0777 264.2798 264.0155 265.2186 264.9534 266.1576 265.8914 267.0967 266.8296 268.0359 267.7678 268.9752 268.7062 0.5% 258.8529 257.5587 259.8153 258.5162 260.7777 259.4739 261.7403 260.4316 262.7030 261.3894 263.6657 262.3474 264.6286 263.3054 265.5915 264.2636 266.5546 265.2218 267.5177 266.1801 268.4810 267.1385 269.4443 268.0971 270.4077 269.0557 271.3713 270.0144 272.3349 270.9732 273.2986 271.9321 274.2624 272.8911 275.2263 273.8502 276.1903 274.8094 277.1544 275.7686 278.1186 276.7280 279.0828 277.6874 280.0472 278.6470 281.0117 279.6066 1.0% 265.3863 262.7325 266.3641 263.7005 267.3420 264.6686 268.3200 265.6368 269.2981 266.6051 270.2762 267.5735 271.2545 268.5419 272.2328 269.5104 273.2112 270.4791 274.1896 271.4477 275.1682 272.4165 276.1468 273.3854 277.1255 274.3543 278.1043 275.3233 279.0832 276.2924 280.0621 277.2615 281.0412 278.2308 282.0203 279.2001 282.9994 280.1694 283.9787 281.1389 284.9580 282.1084 285.9374 283.0780 286.9169 284.0477 287.8985 285.0175 2.0% 273.7196 268.2452 274.7181 269.2238 275.7168 270.2024 276.7154 271.1811 277.7142 272.1599 278.7130 273.1387 279.7118 274.1176 280.7108 275.0965 281.7097 276.0755 282.7088 277.0546 283.7079 278.0337 284.7071 279.0129 285.7063 279.9922 286.7056 280.9715 287.7050 281.9509 288.7044 282.9303 289.7038 283.9098 290.7034 284.8893 291.7030 285.8689 292.7026 286.8486 293.7023 287.8283 294.7021 288.8080 295.7019 289.7879 296.7018 290.7677 4.0% 285.2588 273.8465 286.2861 274.8346 287.3154 275.8228 288.3447 276.8110 289.3742 277.7992 290.4036 278.7875 291.4331 279.7758 292.4627 280.7642 293.4922 281.7526 294.5219 282.7410 295.5515 283.7295 296.5812 284.7180 297.6110 285.7066 298.6408 286.8951 299.6708 287.6838 300.7005 288.6725 301.7304 289.6612 302.7603 290.6499 303.7903 291.6387 304.8203 292.6275 305.8504 293.6164 306.8805 294.6053 307.9107 295.5942 308.9408 296.5832 5.0% 290.0992 275.5942 291.1420 276.5849 292.1850 277.5757 293.2279 278.5665 294.2709 279.5573 295.3139 280.5482 296.3570 281.5391 297.4001 282.5300 298.4432 283.5210 299.4863 284.5120 300.5295 285.5031 301.5728 286.4941 302.6160 287.4852 303.6593 288.4764 304.7027 289.4675 305.7460 290.4587 306.7894 291.4500 307.8329 292.4412 308.8763 293.4325 309.9198 294.4238 310.9633 295.4152 312.0069 296.4066 313.0505 297.3980 314.0941 298.3894

A14

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Erlang B
Offered Erl Carried Erl

No of Traffic Channels 312 313 314 315 316 317 318 319 320 321 322 323 324 325 326 327 328 329 330 331 332 333 334 335

Grade of Service 0.01% 257.3998 257.3741 258.3144 258.2885 259.2290 259.2031 260.1439 260.1178 261.0588 261.0327 261.9740 261.9478 262.8892 262.8629 263.8047 263.7783 264.7202 264.6938 265.6359 265.6094 266.5518 266.5252 267.4678 267.4411 268.3840 268.3571 269.3003 269.2734 270.2167 270.1897 271.1333 271.1062 272.0501 272.0228 272.9669 272.9396 273.8839 273.8566 274.8011 274.7736 275.7184 275.6908 276.6358 276.6082 277.5534 277.5257 278.4711 278.4433 0.1% 269.9146 269.6447 270.8542 270.5833 271.7939 271.5221 272.7337 272.4609 273.6738 273.3999 274.6138 274.3390 275.5538 275.2782 276.4940 276.2175 277.4344 277.1570 278.3749 278.0965 279.3155 279.0362 280.2562 279.9760 281.1970 280.9159 282.1380 281.8559 283.0791 282.7960 284.0202 283.7362 284.9615 284.6765 285.9029 285.6170 286.8444 286.5575 287.7860 287.4962 288.7277 288.4390 289.6695 289.3799 290.6115 290.3209 291.5535 291.2619 0.5% 281.9762 280.5663 282.9408 281.5261 283.9055 282.4860 284.8703 283.4480 285.8352 284.4061 286.8002 285.3662 287.7653 286.3265 288.7304 287.2868 289.6957 288.2472 290.6610 289.2077 291.6264 290.1683 292.5919 291.1289 293.5575 292.0897 294.5231 293.0505 295.4889 294.0114 296.4547 294.9724 297.4206 295.9335 298.3866 296.8947 299.3527 297.8559 300.3188 298.8172 301.2851 299.7786 302.2514 300.7401 303.2178 301.7017 304.1843 302.6633 1.0% 288.8761 285.9873 289.8558 286.9572 290.8355 287.9272 291.8154 288.8972 292.7953 289.8674 293.7753 290.8375 294.7554 291.8078 295.7355 292.7781 298.7157 293.7485 297.6960 294.7190 298.6763 295.6895 299.6567 296.6602 300.6372 297.6308 301.6178 298.6016 302.5984 299.5724 303.5791 300.5433 304.5598 301.5142 305.5407 302.4852 306.5215 303.4563 307.5025 304.4275 308.4835 305.3987 309.4646 306.3700 310.4458 307.3413 311.4270 308.3127 2.0% 297.7017 291.7477 298.7017 292.7277 299.7017 293.7077 300.7018 294.6878 301.7020 295.6680 302.7022 296.6482 303.7025 297.6284 304.7028 298.6087 305.7032 299.5891 306.7036 300.5695 307.7041 301.5500 308.7046 302.5305 309.7052 303.5111 310.7059 304.4917 311.7066 305.4724 312.7073 306.4532 313.7081 307.4339 314.7089 308.4148 315.7099 309.3957 316.7108 310.3766 317.7118 311.3576 318.7129 312.3386 319.7140 313.3197 320.7151 314.3008 4.0% 309.9711 297.5722 311.0013 298.5613 312.0316 299.5503 313.0619 300.5395 314.0923 301.5286 315.1227 302.5178 316.1532 303.5070 317.1836 304.4963 318.2141 305.4856 319.2447 306.4749 320.2753 307.4653 321.3059 308.4537 322.3366 309.4431 323.3672 310.4326 324.3980 311.4221 325.4287 312.4116 326.4595 313.4011 327.4904 314.3907 328.5212 315.3804 329.5521 316.3700 330.5830 317.3597 331.6140 318.3494 332.6450 319.3392 333.6760 320.3290 5.0% 315.1378 299.3809 316.1815 300.3724 317.2252 301.3639 318.2690 302.3555 319.3127 303.3471 320.3566 304.3387 321.4004 305.3304 322.4443 306.3221 323.4882 307.3138 324.5321 308.3055 325.5761 309.2973 326.6201 310.2891 327.6641 311.2809 328.7082 312.2728 329.7523 313.2646 330.7964 314.2566 331.8405 315.2485 332.8847 316.2405 333.9289 317.2324 334.9731 318.2245 336.0174 319.2165 337.0617 320.2086 338.1060 321.2007 339.1503 322.1928

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

A15

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Erlang B
Offered Erl Carried Erl

No of Traffic Channels 336 337 338 339 340 341 342 343 344 345 346 347 348 349 350 351 352 353 354 355 356 357 358 359

Grade of Service 0.01% 279.3890 279.3610 280.3070 280.2789 281.2251 281.1970 282.1433 282.1151 283.0617 283.0334 283.9803 283.9519 284.8989 284.8704 285.8177 285.7891 286.7366 286.7080 287.6557 287.6269 288.5749 288.5460 289.4942 289.4653 290.4137 290.3846 291.3332 291.3041 292.2530 292.2237 293.1728 293.1435 294.0928 294.0633 295.0128 294.9833 295.9331 295.9035 296.8534 296.8237 297.7739 297.7441 298.6945 298.6646 299.6152 299.5852 300.5360 300.5060 0.1% 292.4956 292.2032 293.4379 293.1445 294.3803 294.0859 295.3227 295.0274 296.2653 295.9690 297.2079 296.9107 298.1507 297.8526 299.0936 298.7945 300.0366 299.7365 300.9797 300.6787 301.9228 301.6209 302.8661 302.5633 303.8095 303.5057 304.7530 304.4482 305.6966 305.3909 306.6403 306.3336 307.5840 307.2765 308.5279 308.2194 309.4719 309.1624 310.4160 310.1056 311.3602 311.0488 312.3044 311.9921 313.2488 312.9356 314.1933 313.8791 0.5% 305.1508 303.6251 306.1174 304.5869 307.0842 305.5487 308.0510 306.5107 309.0178 307.4727 309.9848 308.4348 310.9518 309.3970 311.9189 310.3593 312.8861 311.3216 313.8533 312.2840 314.8206 313.2465 315.7880 314.2091 316.7555 315.1717 317.7231 316.1344 318.6907 317.0972 319.6584 318.0601 320.6262 319.0230 321.5940 319.9860 322.5619 320.9491 323.5299 321.9123 324.4980 322.8755 325.4661 323.8388 326.4343 324.8021 327.4026 325.7656 1.0% 312.4083 309.2842 313.3896 310.2557 314.3711 311.2273 315.3525 312.1990 316.3341 313.1707 317.3157 314.1425 318.2974 315.1144 319.2791 316.0863 320.2609 317.0583 321.2428 318.0303 322.2247 319.0024 323.2067 319.9746 324.1887 320.9468 325.1708 321.9191 326.1530 322.8915 327.1352 323.8639 328.1175 324.8363 329.0999 325.8089 330.0823 326.7814 331.0647 327.7541 332.0473 328.7268 333.0298 329.6996 334.0125 330.6724 334.9952 331.6452 2.0% 321.7163 315.2820 322.7176 316.2632 323.7189 317.2445 324.7202 318.2258 325.7216 319.2072 326.7231 320.1886 327.7246 321.1701 328.7261 322.1516 329.7277 323.1332 330.7294 324.1148 331.7310 325.0964 332.7328 326.0781 333.7346 327.0599 334.7364 328.0417 335.7383 329.0235 350.1769 336.1698 351.2084 337.1601 352.2400 338.1504 353.2717 339.1408 354.3033 340.1312 355.3350 341.1216 356.3667 342.1121 343.7549 336.8798 344.7572 337.8620 4.0% 334.7071 321.3188 335.7382 322.3087 336.7693 323.2986 337.8007 324.2885 338.8317 325.2784 339.8629 326.2684 340.8942 327.2584 341.9255 328.2484 342.9568 329.2385 343.9881 330.2286 345.0195 331.2187 345.0509 332.2089 347.0824 333.1991 348.1138 334.1893 349.1453 335.1795 350.1769 336.1698 351.2084 337.1601 352.2400 338.1504 353.2717 339.1408 354.3033 340.1312 355.3350 341.1216 356.3667 342.1121 357.3985 343.1025 358.4302 344.0930 5.0% 340.1947 323.1949 341.2391 324.1771 342.2835 325.1693 343.3279 326.1615 344.3724 327.1538 345.4169 328.1461 346.4614 329.1384 347.5060 330.1307 348.5506 331.1230 349.5952 332.1154 350.6398 333.1078 351.6845 334.1003 352.7292 335.0927 353.7739 336.0852 354.8186 337.0777 355.8634 338.0702 356.9082 339.0627 357.9530 340.0553 358.9978 341.0479 360.0427 342.0405 361.0875 343.0332 362.1325 344.0258 363.1774 345.0185 364.2223 346.0112

A16

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Erlang B
Offered Erl Carried Erl

No of Traffic Channels 360 361 362 363 364 365 366 367 368 369 370 371 372 373 374 375 376 377 378 379 380 381 382 383

Grade of Service 0.01% 301.4570 301.4269 302.3781 302.3479 303.2993 303.2690 304.2207 304.1902 305.1421 305.1116 306.0637 306.0331 306.9854 306.9547 307.9072 307.8764 308.8291 308.7983 309.7512 309.7202 310.6734 310.6423 311.5957 311.5645 312.5181 312.4868 313.4406 313.4092 314.3632 314.3318 315.2860 315.2545 316.2089 316.1772 317.1319 317.1001 318.0550 318.0231 318.9782 318.9463 319.9015 319.8695 320.8249 320.7929 321.7485 321.7163 322.6722 322.6399 0.1% 315.1378 314.8227 316.0825 315.7664 317.0272 316.7102 317.9721 317.6541 318.9170 318.5981 319.8620 319.5422 320.8072 320.4863 321.7524 321.4306 322.6977 322.3750 323.6431 323.3194 324.5886 324.2640 325.5341 325.2086 326.4798 326.1533 327.4256 327.0982 328.3714 328.0431 329.3174 328.9881 330.2634 329.9331 331.2095 330.8783 332.1557 331.8236 333.1020 332.7689 334.0484 333.7144 334.9949 334.6599 335.9414 335.6055 336.8881 336.5512 0.5% 328.3709 326.7291 329.3393 327.6926 330.3078 328.6563 331.2764 329.6200 332.2450 330.5838 333.2137 331.5476 334.1825 332.5116 335.1513 333.4755 336.1202 334.4396 337.0892 335.4037 338.0582 336.3679 339.0273 337.3322 339.9965 338.2965 340.9657 339.2609 341.9350 340.2253 342.9044 341.1899 343.8738 342.1545 355.8433 343.1191 345.8129 344.0838 346.7825 345.0486 347.7522 346.0135 348.7220 346.9784 349.6918 347.9433 350.6617 348.9084 1.0% 335.9780 332.6182 336.9608 333.5912 337.9437 334.5642 338.9266 335.5373 339.9098 336.5105 340.8926 337.4837 341.8757 338.4570 342.8589 339.4303 343.8421 340.4037 344.8254 341.3771 345.8087 342.3506 346.7921 343.3242 347.7755 344.2978 348.7590 345.2714 349.7426 348.2451 350.7262 347.2189 351.7098 348.1927 352.6935 349.1668 353.6773 350.1405 354.6811 351.1145 355.6450 352.0885 356.6289 353.0626 357.6129 354.0367 358.5969 355.0109 2.0% 345.7595 338.8443 346.7618 339.8266 347.7643 340.8092 348.7667 341.7914 349.7692 342.7738 350.7717 343.7563 351.7743 344.7388 352.7770 345.7214 353.7796 346.7040 354.7823 347.6867 355.7851 348.6694 356.7879 349.6521 357.7907 350.6349 358.7936 351.6177 359.7965 352.6006 360.7995 353.5835 361.8025 354.5664 362.8055 355.5494 363.8086 356.5324 264.8117 357.5155 365.8149 358.4986 366.8181 359.4817 367.8213 360.4649 368.8246 361.4481 4.0% 359.4620 345.0836 360.4939 346.0741 361.5257 347.0647 362.5576 348.0553 363.5895 349.0459 364.6215 350.0366 365.6534 351.0273 366.6854 352.0180 367.7175 353.0088 368.7495 353.9995 369.7813 354.9903 370.8137 355.9812 371.8458 356.9720 372.8780 357.9629 373.9102 358.9538 374.9424 359.9447 375.9747 360.9357 377.0069 361.9267 378.0392 362.9177 379.0715 363.9087 380.1039 364.8997 381.1363 365.8908 382.1687 366.8819 383.2011 367.8730 5.0% 365.2673 347.0040 366.3123 347.9967 367.3574 348.9895 368.4024 349.9823 369.4475 350.9751 370.4926 351.9680 371.5388 352.9608 372.5829 353.9537 373.6280 354.9466 374.6732 355.9396 375.7184 356.9325 376.7637 357.9255 377.8089 358.9185 378.8542 359.9115 379.8995 360.9045 380.9448 361.8976 381.9902 362.8907 383.0356 363.8838 384.0810 364.8769 385.1264 365.8701 386.1718 366.8632 387.2173 367.8564 388.2627 368.8496 389.3082 369.8428

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

A17

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Erlang B
Offered Erl Carried Erl

No of Traffic Channels 384 385 386 387 388 389 390 391 392 393 394 395 396 397 398 399 400

Grade of Service 0.01% 323.5959 323.5636 324.5198 324.4874 325.4438 325.4113 326.3679 326.3353 327.2922 327.2594 328.2165 328.1837 329.1409 329.1080 330.0655 330.0325 330.9901 330.9570 331.9149 331.8817 332.8398 332.8065 333.7648 333.7314 334.6898 334.6564 335.6150 335.5815 336.5403 336.5067 337.4657 337.4320 338.3912 338.3574 0.1% 337.8348 337.4970 338.7816 338.4429 339.7285 339.3888 340.6755 340.3348 341.6226 341.2810 342.5698 342.2272 343.5170 343.1735 344.4643 344.1198 345.4117 345.0663 346.3592 346.0129 347.3068 346.9595 348.2544 347.9062 349.2022 348.8530 350.1500 349.7998 351.0979 350.7468 352.0459 351.6938 352.9939 352.6409 0.5% 351.6316 349.8735 352.6017 350.8386 353.5717 351.8039 354.5419 352.7692 355.5121 353.7345 356.4823 354.6999 357.4527 355.6654 358.4231 356.6310 359.3935 357.5965 360.3640 258.5622 361.3346 359.5279 362.3052 360.4937 363.2759 361.4596 364.2467 362.4255 365.2175 363.3914 366.1884 364.3574 367.1593 365.3235 1.0% 359.5810 355.9852 360.5651 356.9595 361.5493 357.9338 362.5335 358.9082 363.5178 359.8826 364.5021 360.8571 365.4865 361.8317 366.4710 362.8063 367.4555 363.7809 368.4400 364.7556 369.4246 365.7303 370.4092 366.7051 371.3939 367.6800 372.3786 368.6548 373.3634 369.6298 374.3483 370.6048 375.3331 371.5798 2.0% 369.8279 362.4313 370.8312 363.4146 371.8346 364.3979 372.8381 365.3813 373.8415 366.3647 374.8451 367.3482 375.8486 368.3316 376.8522 369.3152 377.8558 370.2987 378.8595 371.2823 379.8632 372.2659 380.8669 373.2496 381.8707 374.2333 382.8745 375.2170 383.8784 376.2008 384.8822 377.1846 385.8862 378.1684 4.0% 384.2335 368.8642 385.2660 369.8554 386.2985 370.8466 387.3310 371.8378 388.3636 372.8291 389.3962 373.8203 390.4288 374.8116 391.4614 375.8029 392.4940 376.7943 393.5267 377.7857 394.5594 378.7770 395.5921 379.7685 396.6249 380.7599 397.6577 381.7514 398.6905 382.7428 399.7233 383.7343 400.7561 384.7259 5.0% 390.3538 370.8361 391.3993 371.8293 392.4449 372.8226 393.4904 373.8159 394.5360 374.8092 395.5817 375.8026 396.6273 376.7960 397.6730 377.7893 398.7187 378.7827 399.7644 379.7762 400.8101 380.7696 401.8558 381.7631 402.9016 382.7565 403.9474 383.7500 404.9932 384.7435 406.0390 385.7371 407.0849 386.7306

A18

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

A19

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

A20

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Appendix B (Hotspot Survey)

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

B1

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Hotspot Survey

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Hotspot Survey
The objective is to provide a cost-effective method of confirming the location for microcells. Once a search area is defined for a potential microcell site then test transmitters will be set up in the search areas. The points at which the transmitter is sited must: S S S S be practical for installation of BTS equipment be practical in terms of antenna mounting be practical in terms of acquirement, both on cost, environmental and likelihood of lease it should be capable of capturing identified potential traffic

The test cell is then used as a target, by neighbouring cells, for the collection of large volumes of subscriber-generated measurement reports, using the call-trace BSS feature and then analyzed using the Call Trace Product (CTP). The Hotspot/Neighbour Analysis facility produces a series of graphs and reports that analyzes neighbour data. It allows several neighbour reports to be produced summarising neighbour information.

B2

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Hotspot Survey

Hotspot Sit Equipment

Typical equipment required for Hotspot transmitter site.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

B3

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Hotspot Survey

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Pre-requisites (local office)


Search areas have been defined based upon: S S S S S S S S S Neighbouring cell traffic/blocking statistics Potential traffic capture areas have been identified (e.g. pedestrian areas, shopping centres and business areas). Maps of appropriate area, are available, to approximate scale of 1:12000. Dummy neighbour definitions, for the test transmitters have been defined in the surrounding cells neighbour lists. Microcell design requirements have been agreed with customer. Suitable vehicles and manpower are available. CTP is installed. Clean frequency available for hotspot sites. Authority is obtained from local authorities/police to conduct hotspot activity.

Equipment loaned by Swindon (less optional items)


The following equipment is required:

Equipment 900MHz TEMS Hotspot Generator Bird Wattmeter Portable lightweight, sectioned 5metre mast Pneumatic telescopic 8 metre mast kit (optional) Portable mast tripod 0dBd and 3dBd Katrein omni antennas 5dB directional antennas with 65 and 120 degree beam width (one of each) 10 and 20m feeder cables portable generator (optional) mains inverter charger for TEMS batteries Digital camera Compass Total Cost
B4

Initial Cost() 8000 300 350

2000
100 260 300

150 600 100 50 500 70 12780

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Hotspot Survey

Initial deployment
It is proposed that an engineer from Swindon will travel to a certain country, with the required test equipment, for up to a maximum of two weeks. He will be responsible for training the local office in hotspot work for the microcellular trial/rollout. He will work with the local office engineers, in reviewing the pre-planning work, deployment of the hotspot transmitter and analysis of the CTP data so that the local office is capable of providing hotspot work, as cost effective sold service to the customer.

Post initial deployment


The TEMS transmitter and ancillaries necessary for the hotspot work will be rented to the local office for the microcell trial period until the local office can source their own equipment.

Practical deployment of hotspot survey


1. Identify hotspot test transmitter sites from 2. high traffic/blocking macro cells Identifed areas under cells identified above, which, will potentially relieve traffic from macro layer areas likely to generate high mobile microcell usage (e.g. pedestrian areas, office areas) Areas required to maintain contiiguous microcell layer or to link areas of high traffic Buildings of strategic importance

As many test transmitters as possible should be deployed to ensure the best possible comparison, of potential microcell sites, simultaneously thus removing the uncertainty and inaccuracy incurred with different sample periods. The duration of the data collection will depend on the traffic levels on the surrounding cells, The test transmitter will require mains power to maintain continuous RF output , from the TEMS transmitter, over extended periods. This can be supplied by a 12v driven, car mounted, mains inverter or a separate portable mains generator (normal ring mains supply is often unavailable in test locations). For security, the test site should not be unattended and thus a vehicle should be used to transport equipment, provide power for the test transmitter and provide a secure location for the equipment. An alternative to the lightweight mast would be to use a 58metre pneumatic mast attached to the vehicle, (a van would provide a suitable platform). This would speed up the mast erection process but would prevent access to some sites where vehicular access is restricted.

3. 4.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

B5

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Hotspot Survey

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

5.

Testneighbour insertion, in all macro cells neighbour lists likely to provide coverage to test transmitter hotspot sites . The basic is not defined in test neighbours. When test transmitters are set up at different locations then the transmitter can be set with a different bsic so that CTP can differentiate between the two sites during post-processing.

Normal neighbour syntax add_neighbor <src_gsm_cell_id or src_cell_name> <neighbor_gsm_cell_id> <placement> [<list_type>] Test neighbour syntax add_neighbor <src_gsm_cell_id or src_cell_name> <test> <num> <placement> [<list_type>] Note : The string test <num> may be entered for this field where <num> is a value from 1 to 64. This permits test neighbours to be added to the BA_SACCH and/or BA_BCCH lists. When a test neighbour is added, the value entered in the placement field will be ignored and the frequency will be the only prompted parameter. 6. Trace-call should be enabled on all cells surrounding the test site(s) but care should be taken to prevent overloading of resources.

GPROC loading can be assessed from the raw stat cpu_usage, over a number of days, real-time monitoring can be achieved via RAM EMON see Note 1 The trace-call data has a relatively low priority, in BSS link terms, to prevent the potential loss of data, the following should be considered: GPROC loading (LCF, BSP, OML) Data collection: Data type No. of MRs No. of simultaneous calls per LCF No. of cells/sites per LCF Trace-call (nth call/IMSI/SCCP) Note1. : to monitor GPROC loading remote login to GPROC, set Executive Monitor mode <set_mmi exec_mon> monitor GPROC loading, every half second, with command <perf> < ENTER> Exit from RAM EMON mode with command <set_mmi cust_mmi> alternatively check loading with ps command within RAM EMON range 1255(1=all MRs) max 4 as config. In database range 1255(1=all calls)

B6

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Hotspot Survey

CTP analysis
The data analysis will vary dependant on the type of microcell and the reason for the microcell implementation. << ANNEXE Guidelines for using 1500 Call Trace The user should be aware that care must be taken when using call trace. If an excessive amount of trace data is requested by the user, the BSS and OMC performance will degrade and some trace data will be discarded in order to preserve system integrity. Worst case scenario full data: The heaviest burden is placed on the network when the user specifies all data types, a measurement report interval of 1, and 16 simultaneous calls traced per LCF. We therefore recommend that the following guidelines not be exceeded when requesting full data (that is, all data with measurement report interval=1): Max. # of calls simultaneously traced at the OMC <= 8 Max. # of calls simultaneously traced per BSS* <= 4 to be continued >>

Max. # of calls simultaneously traced per MMI TTY <= 2 Note: This limit must be enforced by the user, since the Maximum simultaneous calls traced per LCF limit specified during trace creation is the limit per LCF, and a BSC will typically contain several LCFs. Other factors: The user is advised to avoid sending trace data to the OMC when other significant OML activities, such as uploads and downloads, are occuring. A high call load on the BSS will also adversely affect call trace performance.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

B7

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Hotspot Survey

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Tracing more calls In general, users may trace a larger number of calls simultaneously by limiting the amount of data requested for each call. For example: For a moderately loaded (2500 cph, 10 sec hold time) single LCF system, the following criteria would not normally result in loss of trace data: Measurement Report Interval = 10 Data Types: all Nth call interval = 1 Max. simultaneous calls per LCF = 8 Note, however, if the number of calls traced simultaneously were increased to 16, and the load increased to 4000cph, 12 sec hold time, data would start to be lost at around the 13th call. Tips: 1. Specify only the data types that you need. RSS data produces the most output. Abis data can also produce a lot of data, particularly during call creation, handover, and completion. Use the Total number of calls to be traced field to limit the total amount of data collected. When specifying RSS (measurement report) data, choose a Measurement Report Interval greater than 1 (the default is 10). For Nth call traces, specify a large number for N (e.g. 50). For Nth call traces, specify a small number for the maximum number of traces per LCF (e.g. 2). Trace on a particular mobile, subscriber or call whenever possible. Use the trace_disp MMI command to monitor the number of calls being traced. Trace outside of peak call periods if possible. Stop or reduce tracing when performing code/database uploads and downloads. Delete unwanted trace logs from the OMC. A cron task periodically deletes old logs. However heavy call trace usage may necessitate more frequent attention.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

B8

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Hotspot Survey

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

B9

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Hotspot Survey

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

B10

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Appendix C (In-Building Requirements Questionnaire)

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

C1

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

In-Building Requirements Questionnaire

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

In-Building Requirements Questionnaire


The following questionnaire should be given to the operator/customer as soon as the location has been selected for an in-building system. The information obtained can then be used as a foundation for discussion of the system requirements. Building plans should be used to indicate the location of any requested information. Operator: Customer:

General Information:
1. Which of the following criteria define the requirements of this system: a) b) c) d) e) f) Equipment trial Improve on poor cellular coverage levels Provide high capacity for in-building users In-building mobile calls originating on this system must be maximized To replace the existing PABX system Other please specify

2.

Are there any deadlines for installation/optimization which have to be met?

3.

Can building plans be supplied in both paper and electronic formats?

Capacity If possible, a sample of PABX and existing macro statistics should be used to determine the estimated traffic loading of the in-building system.
1. How many mobile users are expected to use this system?

2.

What is the expected growth of the system?

C2

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

In-Building Requirements Questionnaire

3.

Estimate the average busy hour figure in Erlangs per user?

4.

Where the high capacity solution is required: i) estimate peak traffic for each grouping of users

ii)

estimate time of peak busy hour for each group.

5.

Identify areas which are expected to have high capacity requirements.

6.

Identify the type of users (job description) in each area.

7.

What is the required target blocking probability?

Coverage
1. Identify all areas of the building(s) requiring coverage.

2.

Are there any key areas which are particularly important from a coverage point of view?

3.

Identify all entrances and exits , including to and from parking areas.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

C3

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

In-Building Requirements Questionnaire

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

4.

Is coverage required in any lifts/stairwells? Specify.

5.

Describe the general structure of the building. Indicate: internal/external wall materials; brickwork, glass, partition walls if glass is used, is it metallic/tinted? floor layout - open plan or enclosed rooms? is there an atrium or other building feature which may require special consideration? number of floors in the building are all floors required to have in-building coverage?

Installation
1. Is there a suitable location to install the in-building system control unit (210 by 72 by 41cm)?

2.

Is 48V (27V) available in this location? (Additional space for a power supply may be needed).

3.

Are there existing 2Mbit links to the external network? (Indicate location or proposed location).

4.

Do leased lines exist between PABX and Cellular Operators Switching Platform?

5.

What capacity is available on these links?

C4

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

In-Building Requirements Questionnaire

6.

Will this system be configured as a co-located BSC or connected to an existing BSC?

7.

Are there are restrictions on mounting silent RF units of 33 x 15 x 11cm and 10kg in weight within the building?

8.

Are there any positions where there would be difficulty in supplying mains power (110V/220V/240V) for the above units?

9.

Are there any restrictions on using coax to feed distributed antenna?

10.

Can any cabling be routed through false ceilings?

11.

Does the building have an existing fibre optic or twisted pair backbone which could be used to connect the RF units to the cluster controller? (Attach cable specification if available). Note: HDSL links require twisted pairs without any electronic switching

12.

Identify the location of patch panels where this system can be connected to. (Indicate the type of connectors used).

13.

Are there limitations on access times for measurements, installation or optimisation?

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

C5

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

In-Building Requirements Questionnaire

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

14.

Are there any common/public areas in the building where instalklation would be prohibited?

15.

Are there any specific equipment types you wish to use or avoid in this site?

Network Operator/RF Environment


1. Which frequency spectrum will be used, and how many frequencies will be available? (Identify specific frequencies if possible).

2.

What is the signal level inside the building perimeter from the existing macro Network?

3.

Identify the location of the surrounding macro sites on a map. Indicate cell name, BCCH/TCH carrier frequencies, BSICs, antenna orientations and output power levels.

4.

How much tolerance is there towards mobiles external to the building originating on the in-building system?

5.

How near are other buildings containing picocell systems?

C6

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

In-Building Requirements Questionnaire

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

C7

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

In-Building Requirements Questionnaire

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

C8

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Glossary of Terms

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

G1

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Numbers

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Numbers
# 2 Mbit/s link Number. As used in this manual set, the term applies to the European 4-wire 2.048 Mbit/s digital line or link which can carry 30 A-law PCM channels or 120 16 kbit/s GSM channels. Fourth Generation Language.

4GL

A
A interface A3 A5 A8 AB A-bis interface Interface between MSC and BSS. Authentication algorithm that produces SRES, using RAND and Ki. Stream cipher algorithm, residing on an MS, that produces ciphertext out of plaintext, using Kc. Ciphering key generating algorithm that produces Kc using RAND and Ki. Access Burst. Interface between BSC and BTS. Motorola offers a GSM standard and a unique Motorola A-bis interface. The Motorola interface reduces the amount of message traffic and thus the number of 2 Mbit/s lines required between BSC and BTS. Answer Bid Ratio. Alternating Current. Access Class (C0 to C15). Application Context. Automatic Congestion Control. Associated Control Channel. ACKnowledgement. Address Complete Message. Associated Control Service Element. Antenna Combining Unit. Analogue to Digital (converter). ADvanced Communications Control Protocol. ADMinistration processor. ADMINistration. Abbreviated Dialling Number. Adaptive Differential Pulse Coded Modulation. Application Entity. Additional Elementary Functions. Automatic Frequency Control. Absolute Frame Number.

ABR ac AC AC ACC ACCH ACK ACM ACSE ACU A/D ADCCP ADM ADMIN ADN ADPCM AE AEF AFC AFN
G2

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

AGC AGCH Ai AI AIB Air interface AM AMA AM/MP AOC AP ARFCN ARQ ARP ASCE

Automatic Gain Control. Access Grant CHannel. A GSM common control channel used to assign MS to a SDCCH or a TCH. Action indicator. Artificial Intelligence. Alarm Interface Board. The radio link between the BTS and the MS. Amplitude Modulation. Automatic Message Accounting (processor). Cell broadcast mobile terminated message. A message broadcast to all MSs in a cell. Automatic Output Control. Application Process. Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number. An integer which defines the absolute RF channel number. Automatic ReQuest for retransmission. Address Resolution Protocol. Association Control Service Element. An ASE which provides an AP with the means to establish and control an association with an AP in a remote NE. Maps directly onto the Presentation layer (OMC). Application Service Element (OMC) Application Specific Entity (TCAP). Abstract Syntax Notation One. Alarm and Status Panel. Answer Seizure Ratio. All Trunks Busy. Antenna Transceiver Interface. Attach. Automatic Trunk Testing Subsystem. Access Unit. AUthentication Centre. A GSM network entity which provides the functionality for verifying the identity of an MS when requested by the system. Often a part of the HLR. Authentication. AUTOmatic mode.

ASE ASE ASN.1 ASP ASR ATB ATI ATT (flag) ATTS AU AUC

AUT(H) AUTO

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

G3

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

B
BA BBBX BBH BCC BCCH BCCH Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated in a cell for BCCH transmission. Battery Backup Board. Base Band Hopping. BTS Colour Code. Broadcast Control CHannel. A GSM control channel used to broadcast general information about a BTS site on a per cell or sector basis. Binary Coded Decimal. Base station Control Function. The GSM term for the digital control circuitry which controls the BTS. In Motorola cell sites this is a normally a BCU which includes DRI modules and is located in the BTS cabinet. Bearer Capability Information Element. Base station Control Unit. A functional entity of the BSS which provides the base control function at a BTS site. The term no longer applies to a type of shelf (see BSC and BSU). Bit Error Ratio. A measure of signal quality in the GSM system. Business Exchange Services. Bad Frame Indication. Busy Hour Call Attempt. Balanced-line Interconnect Board. Provides interface to 12 balanced (6-pair) 120 ohm (37-pin D-type connector) lines for 2 Mbit/s circuits (See also T43). BiLLiNG. Bits per second (bps). Traffic Channel (full rate). Bit Number. Number which identifies the position of a particular bit period within a timeslot. Bandpass Filter. BCU Power Supply Module. Basic Service (group). Bearer Service. A type of telecommunication service that provides the capability for the transmission of signals between user-network interfaces. The PLMN connection type used to support a bearer service may be identical to that used to support other types of telecommunication service. Base Station Controller. A network component in the GSM PLMN which has the digital control function of controlling all BTSs. The BSC can be located within a single BTS cabinet (forming a BSS) but is more often located remotely and controls several BTSs (see BCF, BCU, and BSU).

BCD BCF

BCIE BCU

BER BES BFI BHCA BIB

BLLNG bit/s Bm BN BPF BPSM BS BS

BSC

G4

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

BSG BSIC

Basic Service Group. Base Transceiver Station Identity Code. A block of code, consisting of the GSM PLMN colour code and a base station colour code. One Base Station can have several Base Station Colour Codes. BSIC of an adjacent cell. Base Site control Processor. Base Station System. The system of base station equipment (Transceivers, controllers and so on) which is viewed by the MSC through a single interface as defined by the GSM 08 series of recommendations, as being the entity responsible for communicating with MSs in a certain area. The radio equipment of a BSS may cover one or more cells. A BSS may consist of one or more base stations. If an internal interface is implemented according to the GSM 08.5x series of recommendations, then the BSS consists of one BSC and several BTSs. BSS Application Part (of Signalling System No. 7) (DTAP + BSSMAP). Base Station System Control cabinet. The cabinet which houses one or two BSU shelves at a BSC or one or two RXU shelves at a remote transcoder. Base Station System Management Application Part. BSS Operation and Maintenance Application Part (of Signalling System No. 7). Base Station Unit shelf. The shelf which houses the digital control modules for the BTS (p/o BTS cabinet) or BSC (p/o BSSC cabinet). British Telecom. Bus Terminator. Bus Terminator Card. Base Transceiver Function. Base Transceiver Processor. One of the six basic task groups within the GPROC. Base Transceiver Station. A network component in the GSM PLMN which serves one cell, and is controlled by a BSC. The BTS contains one or more Transceivers (TRXs). A period of modulated carrier less than one timeslot. The physical content of a timeslot.

BSIC-NCELL BSP BSS

BSSAP BSSC

BSSMAP BSSOMAP BSU

BT BT BTC BTF BTP BTS

Burst

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

G5

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

C
C7 CA CA CAI CB CBC CBCH CBF CBL CBSMS CC CC CCCH CCITT Signalling System #7 (SS7). Cell Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated to a particular cell. Central Authority. Charge Advice Information. Circuit Breaker. Cell Broadcast Centre. Cell Broadcast CHannel. Combining Bandpass Filter. Cell Broadcast Link Cell Broadcast Short Message Service. Country Code. Call Control. Common Control Channels. A class of GSM control channels used to control paging and grant access. Includes AGCH, PCH, and RACH. Group of MSs in idle mode. Cavity Combining Block. (The CCB is equivalent to the Remote Tune Combiner (RTC)). Common Channel Distributor. Channel Coding Digital Signal Processor. Conditional Call Forwarding. Control channel. Control channels are channels which carry system management messages. Council for Communications Harmonization (referred to in GSM Recommendations). Comit Consultative International de Telegraphy et Telephone. This term has been superceded by ITUTSS (International Telecommunications Union Telecommunications Sector). Control Channel Protocol Entity. Hundred call-seconds. The unit in which amounts of telephone traffic are measured. A single call lasting one hundred seconds is one CCS. See also erlang. Circuit. Control Driver Board. Call Detail Records. Control Equalizer Board (BTS).

CCCH_GROUP CCB CCD CCDSP CCF CCH CCH CCITT

CCPE CCS

Cct CDB CDR CEB


G6

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Cell

By GSM definition, a cell is an RF coverage area. At an omni-site, cell is synonymous with site; at a sectored site, cell is synonymous with sector. This differs from analogue systems where cell is taken to mean the same thing as site. (See below).

1 Cell = 1 Sector

Omni Site 1-Cell Site (1 BTS)

6-Sector Site or 6-Cell Site (6 BTSs)

CEPT CF CF CFC Channel

Confrence des administrations Europn des Postes et Tlcommunications. Conversion Facility. All Call Forwarding services. Conditional Call Forward. A means of one-way transmission. A defined sequence of periods (for example, timeslots) in a TDMA system; a defined frequency band in an FDMA system; a defined sequence of periods and frequency bands in a frequency hopped system. Card Holder Verification. Ciphering Key Sequence Number. Carrier to Interference ratio. Cell Identity. A block of code which identifies a cell within a location area. CUG Index. Unintelligible data produced through the use of encipherment. Ciphering Key Sequence Number. Calling Line Identity. Clock. Clock Extender half size board. The fibre optic link that distributes GCLK to boards in system (p/o BSS etc). Connectionless Manager. CLeaR. Configuration Management. An OMC application. Connection Management. Command. Channel Mode Modify. Common Management Information Protocol.

CHV CKSN C/I, CIR CI CI Ciphertext CKSN CLI CLK CLKX CLM CLR CM CM CMD CMM CMIP

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

G7

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

CMISE

Common Management Information Service Element. An ASE which provides a means to transfer management information via CMIP messages with another NE over an association established by ASCE using ROSE (OMC). Cellular Manual Revision. Manufacturers name for a type of multiplexer and packet switch commonly installed at the Motorola OMC-R. Placed together; two or more items together in the same place. Code Object Manager. Complete. COMMunications. CONFerence circuit. CONFIGuration Control Program. Call Processing. Central Processing Unit. Command/Response field bit. Carriage Return (RETURN). Cyclic Redundancy Check (3 bit). Call RE-establishment procedure. Cell Resource Machine. Cellular Radio Modem-Low Speed/High Speed. Low speed modem used to interwork 300 to 2400 bit/s data services under V.22bis, V.23, or V.21 standards. High speed modem used to interwork 1200 to 9600 bit/s data services under V.22bis, V.32, or V.29/V.27ter/V.21 standards. Cathode Ray Tube (video display terminal). Code Storage Facility Processor. Central Statistics Process. The statistics process in the BSC. Circuit Switched Public Data Network. Channel Tester. Closed User Group supplementary service.

CMR CODEX Collocated COM COM COMM, comms CONF CONFIG CP CPU C/R CR CRC CRE CRM CRM-LS/HS

CRT CSFP CSP CSPDN CT CUG

G8

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

D
D/A DAN DAS dB DB DB DBA DBMS dc DCB DCCH Digital to Analogue (converter). Digital Announcer (for recorded announcements on MSC). Data Acquisition System. Decibel. A unit of power ratio measurement. DataBase. Dummy Burst (see Dummy burst). DataBase Administration/Database Administrator. DataBase Management System. Direct Current. Diversity Control Board (p/o DRCU). Dedicated Control Channels. A class of GSM control channels used to set up calls and report measurements. Includes SDCCH, FACCH, and SACCH. Data Circuit terminating Equipment. Data Communications Function. Data Communications Network. A DCN connects Network Elements with internal mediation functions or mediation devices to the Operations Systems. Digital Communication System. A cellular phone network using digital techniques similar to those used in GSM 900, but operating on frequencies of 1710 1785 MHz and 1805 1880 MHz. Direct Digital Synthesis. Diversity Equalizer Board. Detach. Decision Feedback Equalizer. Digital Host Processor. Drum Intercept Announcer. Diversity In phase and Quadrature phase. Device Interface Routine. DISConnect. Data Link (layer). Data Link Connection Identifier. Data Link Discriminator. Diversity Low Noise Block. Data Link Service Process Control Channel (ISDN terminology applied to mobile service).

DCE DCF DCN

DCS1800

DDS DEQB DET DFE DHP DIA DIQ DIR DISC DL DLCI DLD DLNB DLSP Dm

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

G9

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

DMA DMA DMX DN DNIC Downlink DP DPC

Deferred Maintenance Alarm. An alarm report level; an immediate or deferred response is required (see also PMA). Direct Memory Access Distributed Electronic Mobile Exchange (Motorolas networked EMX family). Directory Number. Data Network Identifier. Physical link from the BTS towards the MS (BTS transmits, MS receives). Dial/Dialled Pulse. Destination Point Code. A part of the label in a signalling message that uniquely identifies, in a signalling network, the (signalling) destination point of the message. Digital Processing and Control board Digital Private Network Signalling System (BT standard for PABX interface). Dual Path Preselector. Digital Power Supply Module. Dynamic Random Access Memory. Data Rate Converter board. Provides data and protocol conversion between PLMN and destination network for 8 circuits (p/o IWF). Diversity Radio Channel Unit. Contains transceiver, digital control circuits, and power supply (p/o BSS) (see RCU). Generic term for radio channel unit. May be standard RCU or diversity radio channel unit DRCU. Digital Radio Interface. Provides encoding/decoding and encryption/decryption for radio channel (p/o BSS). Digital Radio Interface extended Memory. A DRI with extra memory. DRI Extender half size board. Fibre optic link from DRI to BCU (p/o BSS). Discontinuous Reception. A means of saving battery power (for example in hand-portable units) by periodically and automatically switching the MS receiver on and off. German term for 2 Mbit/s line (PCM interface). Data Switching Exchange. Digital Signal Processor. Digital Subscriber Signalling No 1. Diversity Signal Strength Indication. Direct Transfer Application Part. Data Terminal Equipment.

DPC DPNSS DPP DPSM DRAM DRC

DRCU (D)RCU DRI DRIM DRIX DRX, DRx

DS-2 DSE DSP DSS1 DSSI DTAP DTE


G10

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

DTF DTI DTMF DTX, DTx

Digital Trunk Frame. Digital Trunk Interface. Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (tone signalling type). Discontinuous Transmission. A means of saving battery power (for example in hand-portable units) and reducing interference by automatically switching the transmitter off when no speech or data are to be sent. A period of carrier less than one timeslot whose modulation is a defined sequence that carries no useful information. A dummy burst fills a timeslot with an RF signal when no information is to be delivered to a channel.

Dummy burst

E
E EA EAS Eb/No EBSG EC ECB ECID ECM Ec/No EEPROM EGSM900 EIR EIRP EIRP EM EMC EMF EMI EMX en bloc See Erlang. External Alarms. External Alarm System. Energy per Bit/Noise floor. Elementary Basic Service Group. Echo Canceller. Provides echo cancelling for telephone trunks for 30 channels (EC). The Motorola European Cellular Infrastructure Division. Error Correction Mode (facsimile). Ratio of energy per modulating bit to the noise spectral density. Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. Extended GSM900. Equipment Identity Register. Effective Isotropic Radiated Power. Equipment Identity Register Procedure. Event Management. An OMC application. Electro Magnetic Compatibility. Electro Motive Force. Electro Magnetic Interference. Electronic Mobile Exchange (Motorolas MSC family). Fr. all at once (a CCITT #7 Digital Transmission scheme); En bloc sending means that digits are sent from one system to another ~ (that is, all the digits for a given call are sent at the same time as a group). ~ sending is the opposite of overlap sending. A system using ~ sending will wait until it has collected all the digits for a given call before it attempts to send digits to the next system. All the digits are then sent as a group. End of Tape.

EOT

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

G11

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

EPROM EPSM EQB EQ DSP Erlang

Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. Enhanced Power Supply Module (+27 V). Equalizer Board. Control circuit for equalization for 8 time slots each with equalizing circuitry and a DSP (p/o RCU). Equalizer Digitizer Signal Processor. International (dimensionless) unit of traffic intensity defined as the ratio of time a facility is occupied to the time it is available for occupancy. One erlang is equal to 36 ccs. In the US this is also known as a traffic unit (TU). Effective Radiated Power. Electro-static Point. Embedded SQL (Structured Query Language). An RDBMS programming interface language. Extended TACS (analogue cellular system, extended). ETSI Technical Report. European Telecommunication Standard. European Telecommunications Standards Institute. End of Transmission. Executive Process.

ERP ESP ESQL E-TACS ETR ETS ETSI ETX EXEC

F
FA FA FA FAC FACCH Fax Adaptor. Full Allocation. Functional Area. Final Assembly Mode. Fast Associated Control Channel. A GSM dedicated control channel which is associated with a TCH and carries control information after a call is set up (see SDCCH). Full rate Fast Associated Control Channel. Half rate Fast Associated Control Channel. Frequency correction Burst (see Frequency correction burst). Frequency Correction Channel. A GSM broadcast control channel which carries information for frequency correction of the mobile (MS). Fault Collection Process (in BTS). Frame Check Sequence. Frequency Division Multiple Access. Forward Error Correction. Front End Processor. Frame Erasure Ratio. For Further Study.

FACCH/F FACCH/H FB FCCH

FCP FCS FDMA FEC FEP FER FFS, FS


G12

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

FH FIR FK FM FM FMUX FN FOA FOX FR

Frequency Hopping. Finite Impulse Response (filter type). Foreign Key. A database column attribute; the foreign key indicates an index into another table. Fault Management (at OMC). Frequency Modulation. Fibre MUltipleXer. Frame Number. Identifies the position of a particular TDMA frame within a hyperframe. First Office Application. Fibre Optic eXtender. Full Rate. Refers to the current capacity of a data channel on the GSM air interface, that is, 8 simultaneous calls per carrier (see also HR Half Rate). Period of RF carrier less than one timeslot whose modulation bit stream allows frequency correction to be performed easily within an MS burst Frequency Synchronization. Free Space Loss. The decrease in the strength of a radio signal as it travels between a transmitter and receiver. The FSL is a function of the frequency of the radio signal and the distance the radio signal has travelled from the point source. File Transfer, Access, and Management. An ASE which provides a means to transfer information from file to file (OMC). Fault Translation Process (in BTS). File Transfer Program

Frequency correction

FS FSL

FTAM FTP FTP

G
Gateway MSC An MSC that provides an entry point into the GSM PLMN from another network or service. A gateway MSC is also an interrogating node for incoming PLMN calls. Generic Clock board. System clock source, one per site (p/o BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF, RXCDR). Giga-Hertz (109). GSM Multiplexer Board (p/o BSC). GSM Manual Revision. Gateway Mobile services Switching Centre (see Gateway MSC). Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying. The modulation technique used in GSM. GrouND. Grade of Service. GSM PLMN Area. General Protocol Converter.

GCLK GHz GMB GMR GMSC GMSK GND GOS GPA GPC

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

G13

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

GPROC

Generic Processor board. GSM generic processor board: a 68030 with 4 to 16 Mb RAM (p/o BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF, RXCDR). Global Positioning by Satellite. GSM Service Area. The area in which an MS can be reached by a fixed subscriber, without the subscribers knowledge of the location of the MS. A GSA may include the areas served by several GSM PLMNs. GSM System Area. The group of GSM PLMN areas accessible by GSM MSs. Groupe Spcial Mobile (the committee). Global System for Mobile communications (the system). Global Title. Period at the beginning and end of timeslot during which MS transmission is attenuated. Graphical User Interface. GateWaY (MSC/LR) interface to PSTN.

GPS GSA

GSA GSM GSM GT Guard period GUI GWY

H
H-M HAD, HAP Handover Human-Machine Terminals. HLR Authentication Distributor. The action of switching a call in progress from one radio channel to another radio channel. Handover allows established calls to continue by switching them to another radio resource, as when an MS moves from one BTS area to another. Handovers may take place between the following GSM entities: timeslot, RF carrier, cell, BTS, BSS and MSC. High level Data Link Controller. High Layer Compatibility. The HLC can carry information defining the higher layer characteristics of a teleservice active on the terminal. Home Location Register. The LR where the current location and all subscriber parameters of an MS are permanently stored. Heat Management System. The system that provides environmental control of the components inside the ExCell cabinet. HandOver. The action of switching a call in progress from one radio channel to another radio channel. Handover allows established calls to continue by switching them to another radio resource, for example, when MSs move from one base station area to another. Hand Portable Unit. Half Rate. Refers to a type of data channel that will double the current GSM air interface capacity to 16 simultaneous calls per carrier (see also FR Full Rate). HandSet.

HDLC HLC

HLR HMS

HO

HPU HR

HS
G14

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

HSM HSN HW Hyperframe

HLR Subscriber Management. Hopping Sequence Number. Hardware. 2048 superframes. The longest recurrent time period of the frame structure.

I
I IA5 IADU IAM IAS IC IC ICB ICM ICMP ID, id IDN IE IEEE IEI IF IFAM IM IMACS IMEI Information (frames). International Alphanumeric 5. Integrated Antenna Distribution Unit. (The IADU is the equivalent to the Receive Matrix used on pre-M-Cell BTSs). Initial Address Message. Internal Alarm System. Integrated Circuit. Interlock Code (closed user group supplementary service). Incoming Calls Barred. In-Call Modification. Internet Control Message Protocol. Identification/Identity. Integrated Digital Network. Signalling Information Element. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. Information Element Identifier. Intermediate Frequency. Initial and Final Address Message. InterModulation. Intelligent Monitor And Control System. International Mobile station Equipment Identity. Electronic serial number that uniquely identifies the MS as a piece or assembly of equipment. The IMEI is sent by the MS along with request for service. IMMediate assignment message. International Mobile Subscriber Identity. Published mobile number (prior to ISDN) (see also MSISDN) that uniquely identifies the subscription. It can serve as a key to derive subscriber information such as directory number(s) from the HLR. Intelligent Network. Interrogating Node. A switching node that interrogates an HLR, to route a call for an MS to the visited MSC. IN Service.

IMM IMSI

IN IN INS

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

G15

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

INS Interworking

Intelligent Network Service. The general term used to describe the inter-operation of networks, services, supplementary services and so on. See also IWF. Input/Output. Initialisation Process. Internet Protocol. Inter-Process Communication. INtermodulation Products. Intellectual PRoperty. Integrated Power Supply Module (48 V). International Switching Centre. Integrated Services Digital Network. An integrated services network that provides digital connections between user-network interfaces. International Standards Organisation. Informix Structured Query Language. ISDN User Part (of signalling system No. 7). Information Transfer Capability. International Telecommunications Union International Telecommunications Union Telecommunications Sector InterWorking Function. A network functional entity which provides network interworking, service interworking, supplementary service interworking or signalling interworking. It may be a part of one or more logical or physical entities in a GSM PLMN. InterWorking MSC. InterWorking Unit. kilo (103). Constraint length of the convolutional code. kilo-bit. kilo-bit per second. Ciphering key. A sequence of symbols that controls the operation of encipherment and decipherment. kilo-Hertz (103). Individual subscriber authentication Key (p/o authentication process of AUC). Kiloport SWitch board. TDM timeslot interchanger to connect calls (p/o BSS).

I/O IP IP IPC IP, INP IPR IPSM ISC ISDN

ISO ISQL ISUP ITC ITU ITUTSS IWF

IWMSC IWU

K
k K kb kbit/s, kbps Kc kHz Ki KSW

G16

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

KSWX kW

KSW Expander half size board. Fibre optic distribution of TDM bus (p/o BSS). kilo-Watt.

L
L1 L2ML L2R Layer 1. Layer 2 Management Link. Layer 2 Relay function. A function of an MS and IWF that adapts a users known layer2 protocol LAPB onto RLP for transmission between the MT and IWF. L2R Bit Orientated Protocol. L2R Character Orientated Protocol. Layer 3. Location Area. An area in which an MS may move freely without updating the location register. An LA may comprise one or several base station areas. Location Area Code. Location Area Identification (identity). The information indicating the location area in which a cell is located. Local Area Network. LAN Extender half size board. Fibre optic distribution of LAN to/from other cabinets (p/o BSS etc). Link Access Procedure B (balanced) channel (of ITUTSS Rec. X.25). Link Access Procedure D (data) channel. Link Access Procedure Dm (mobile D) channel. Inductor Capacitor (type of filter). Link Control Function. Link Control Processor. Local Exchange. Light Emitting Diode. Line Feed. Length Indicator. Line Identity. Lower Layer Compatibility. The LLC can carry information defining the lower layer characteristics of the terminal. Traffic channel (half rate). Least Mean Square. Local Mobile Station Identity. A unique identity temporarily allocated to visiting mobile subscribers in order to speed up the search for subscriber data in the VLR, when the MSRN allocation is done on a per cell basis.

L2R BOP L2R COP L3 LA

LAC LAI LAN LANX LAPB LAPD LAPDm LC LCF LCP LE LED LF LI LI LLC Lm LMS LMSI

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

G17

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

LNA Location area

Low Noise Amplifier. An area in which a mobile station may move freely without updating the location register. A location area may comprise one or several base station areas. Linear Predictive Code. Location Register. The GSM functional unit where MS location information is stored. The HLR and VLR are location registers. Long Term Average. The value required in a BTSs GCLK frequency register to produce a 16.384 MHz clock. Local Terminal Emulator. Long Term Predictive. Line Terminating Unit. Length and Value. Mega (106). Maintenance and Troubleshooting. Functional area of Network Management software which (1) collects and displays alarms, (2) collects and displays Software/Hardware errors, and (3) activates test diagnostics at the NEs (OMC). Mobile Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated to an MS for use in its frequency hopping sequence. Medium Access Control. Mobile Allocation Channel Number. Mobile Additional Function. Mobile Allocation Index. Mean Accumulated Intrinsic Down Time. MAINTenance. Mobile Allocation Index Offset. Mobile Application Part (of signalling system No. 7). The inter-networking signalling between MSCs and LRs and EIRs. Mobile Application Part Processor. Motorola Cellular Advanced Processor. Mobile Country Code. Micro Control Unit. (mobile) Management (entity) - Data Link (layer). Maintenance Entity (GSM Rec. 12.00). Mobile Equipment. Equipment intended to access a set of GSM PLMN and/or DCS telecommunication services, but which does not contain subscriber related information. Services may be accessed while the equipment, capable of surface movement within the GSM system area, is in motion or during halts at unspecified points.

LPC LR LTA LTE LTP LTU LV

M
M M&TS

MA MAC MACN MAF MAI MAIDT MAINT MAIO MAP MAPP MCAP MCC MCU MDL ME ME

G18

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

MEF MF MF MF MGMT MGR MHS MHS MHz MI MIB MIC Microcell

Maintenance Entity Function (GSM Rec. 12.00). MultiFrame. Multi-Frequency (tone signalling type) MultiFunction block. Management. Manager. Message Handling System. Mobile Handling Service. Mega-Hertz (106). Maintenance Information. Management Information Base. A Motorola OMC-R database. There is a CM MIB and an EM MIB. Mobile Interface Controller. A cell in which the base station antenna is generally mounted below rooftop level. Radio wave propagation is by diffraction and scattering around buildings, the main propagation is within street canyons. micro-second (106). Micro Base Control Unit Management Information Tree. Name of a file on the Motorola OMC-R. Mobility Management. Mobile Management Entity. Man Machine Interface. The method in which the user interfaces with the software to request a function or change parameters. Man Machine Language. The tool of MMI. Multiple Serial Interface Link. Mobile Network Code. MaiNTenance. Mobile Originated. Mobile Originated Point-to-Point messages. Motorola OMAP. Memorandum of Understanding. Multi Personal Computer (was p/o OMC). (mobile) Management (entity) - PHysical (layer) [primitive]. MultiPleXed. Mobile Roaming Number. Mobile Station. The GSM subscriber unit.

ms
mBCU MIT MM MME MMI

MML MMS MNC MNT MO MO/PP MOMAP MoU MPC MPH MPX MRN MS

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

G19

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

MSC MSCM MSCU msec MSI MSIN MSISDN

Mobile services Switching Centre. Mobile Station Class Mark. Mobile Station Control Unit. millisecond (.001 second). Multiple Serial Interface board. Intelligent interface to two 2 Mbit/s digital links (see 2 Mbit/s link and DS-2) (p/o BSS). Mobile Station Identification Number. Mobile Station International ISDN Number. Published mobile number (see also IMSI ). Uniquely defines the mobile station as an ISDN terminal. It consists of three parts: the Country Code (CC), the National Destination Code (NDC) and the Subscriber Number (SN). Mobile Station Roaming Number. A number assigned by the MSC to service and track a visiting subscriber. Message Signal Unit. A signal unit containing a service information octet and a signalling information field which is retransmitted by the signalling link control, if it is received in error. Mobile Terminated. Describes a call or short message destined for an MS. Mobile Termination. The part of the MS which terminates the radio transmission to and from the network and adapts terminal equipment (TE) capabilities to those of the radio transmission. MT0 is mobile termination with no support for terminal, MT1 is mobile termination with support for an S-type interface and MT2 is mobile termination with support for an R-type interface. Mobile-To-Mobile (call). Message Transfer Part. Mobile Terminated Point-to-Point messages. Mean Time Between Failures. Message Transfer Link. MTP Transport Layer Link (A interface). Message Transfer Part. Mean Time To Repair. Two types of multiframe are defined in the system: a 26-frame multiframe with a period of 120ms and a 51-frame multiframe with a period of 3060/13ms. Multi User Mobile Station. Multiplexer.

MSRN MSU

MT MT (0,1,2)

MTM MTP MT/PP MTBF MTK MTL MTP MTTR Multiframe

MUMS MUX

G20

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

N
NB NCC NCELL ND Normal Burst (see Normal burst). Network (PLMN) Colour Code. Neighbouring (or current serving) Cell. No Duplicates. A database column attribute meaning the column contains unique values (used only with indexed columns). National Destination Code. Network Determined User Busy. Network Element (Network Entity). Network Element Function block. Network Function. Network Independent Clocking. Network Interface Unit. Network LinK processor(s). Newton metres. Network Management (manager). NM is all activities which control, monitor and record the use and the performance of resources of a telecommunications network in order to provide telecommunication services to customers/users at a certain level of quality. Network Management Centre. The NMC node of the GSM TMN provides global and centralised GSM PLMN monitoring and control, by being at the top of the TMN hierarchy and linked to subordinate OMC nodes. National Mobile Station Identification number. Nordic Mobile Telephone system. No Nulls. A database column attribute meaning the column must contain a value in all rows. A period of modulated carrier less than a timeslot. Number Plan Identifier. Non Return to Zero. Network Service Access Point. Network Service Provider. Network Termination. Non Transparent. Network User Access. Network User Identification. National User Part (of signalling system No. 7). Non-Volatile Random Access Memory.

NDC NDUB NE NEF NF NIC NIU NLK Nm NM

NMC

NMSI NMT NN Normal burst NPI NRZ NSAP NSP NT NT NUA NUI NUP NVRAM

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

G21

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

nW N/W

Nano-Watt (109). NetWork.

O
O&M OACSU Operations and Maintenance. Off-Air Call SetUp. The procedure in which a telecommunication connection is being established whilst the RF link between the MS and the BTS is not occupied. Outgoing Calls Barred within the closed user group. % OverFlow. Operations and Maintenance Application Part (of signalling system No. 7) (was OAMP). Operations and Maintenance Centre. The OMC node of the GSM TMN provides dynamic O&M monitoring and control of the PLMN nodes operating in the geographical area controlled by the specific OMC. Operations and Maintenance Centre Radio Part. Operations and Maintenance Centre Switch Part. Operations and Maintenance Link. Operation and Maintenance Processor. Operation and Maintenance System (BSCOMC). Operation and Maintenance SubSystem. Out Of Service. Originating Point Code. A part of the label in a signalling message that uniquely identifies, in a signalling network, the (signalling) origination point of the message. Operating System. Open Systems Interconnection Operation Systems Function block. Open Software Foundation Motif. The basis of the GUI used for the Motorola OMC-R MMI. Operator Services System. Overlap sending means that digits are sent from one system to another as soon as they are received by the sending system. A system using ~ will not wait until it has received all digits of a call before it starts to send the digits to the next system. This is the opposite of en bloc sending where all digits for a given call are sent at one time.

OCB OFL OMAP OMC

OMCR OMCS OML OMP OMS OMSS OOS OPC

OS OSI OSF OSF/MOTIF OSS Overlap

G22

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

P
PA PAB PABX PAD Paging Power Amplifier. Power Alarm Board. Private Automatic Branch eXchange. Packet Assembler/Disassembler facility. The procedure by which a GSM PLMN fixed infrastructure attempts to reach an MS within its location area, before any other network-initiated procedure can take place. CEPT 2 Mbit/s route through the BSS network. Private Branch eXchange. Personal Computer. Paging CHannel. A GSM common control channel used to send paging messages to the MSs. Pulse Code Modulation (see also 2 Mbit/s link which is the physical bearer of PCM). Personal Communications Network. Preventative Cyclic Retransmission. A form of error correction suitable for use on links with long transmission delays, such as satellite links. Potential difference. Protocol Discriminator. Public Data. Power Distribution Board. Power Distribution Frame (MSC/LR). Packet Data Network. Power Distribution Unit Protected Data Unit. Pan European Digital Cellular. Packet Handler. PHysical (layer). Packet Handler Interface. Process IDentifier. Presentation Indicator. PCM Interface Module (MSC). Personal Identification Number. Parallel Interface Extender half size board. Customer alarm interface (p/o BSS). Primary Key. A database column attribute, the primary key is a not-null, non-duplicate index.

PATH PBX PC PCH PCM PCN PCR

pd PD PD PDB PDF PDN PDU PDU PEDC PH PH PHI PID PI PIM PIN PIX PK

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

G23

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Plaintext PLL PLMN PM PM-UI PMA PMS PMUX PN POTS p/o pp, pp PP ppb ppm PROM PSAP PSPDN

Unciphered data Phase Lock Loop (refers to phase locking the GCLK in the BTS). Public Land Mobile Network. The mobile communications network. Performance Management. An OMC application. Performance Management User Interface. Prompt Maintenance Alarm. An alarm report level; immediate action is necessary (see also DMA). Pseudo MMS. PCM MUltipleXer. Permanent Nucleus (of GSM). Plain Old Telephone Service (basic telephone services). Part of. Peak-to-peak. Point-to-Point. Parts per billion. Parts per million (x 106). Programmable Read Only Memory. Presentation Services Access Point. Public Switched Packet Data Network. Public data communications network. X.25 links required for NE to OMC communications will probably be carried by PSPDN. Public Switched Telephone Network. The UK landline telephone network. Pure Sine Wave. Public Telecommunications Operator. Permanent Virtual Circuit. Power. Private eXchange Packet Data Network.

PSTN PSW PTO PVC PWR PXPDN

Q
Q-adapter QAF QEI QOS Used to connect MEs and SEs to TMN (GSM Rec. 12.00). Q-Adapter Function Block. Quad European Interface. Interfaces four 2 Mbit/s circuits to TDM switch highway (see MSI). Quality Of Service.

G24

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

R
RAB RACCH RACH RAM RAND RAx RBDS RBER RBTS RCB RCP RCU RCVR RDN Random Access Burst. Random Access Control CHannel. A GSM common control channel used to originate a call or respond to a page. Random Access CHannel. Random Access Memory. RANDom number. Rate Adaptation. Remote BSS Diagnostic System (a discontinued Motorola diagnostic facility). Residual Bit Error Ratio. Remote Base Transceiver Station Radio Control Board (p/o DRCU). Radio Control Processor. Radio Channel Unit. Contains transceiver, digital control circuits, and power supply (p/o BSS) (see DRCU). Receiver. Relative Distinguished Name. A series of RDN form a unique identifier, the distinguished name, for a particular network element. RECommendation. RELease. Residual Excited Linear Predictive. RELP Long Term Prediction. A name for GSM full rate (see full rate). REQuest. Radio Frequency. Radio Frequency Channel. A partition of the system RF spectrum allocation with a defined bandwidth and centre frequency. Receiver Front End (shelf). Receiver Front End Board (p/o DRCU II). Radio Frequency Interference. Reduced TDMA Frame Number. Reduced Instruction Set Computer. Radio Link Protocol. An ARQ protocol used to transfer user data between an MT and IWF. See GSM 04.22. Root Mean Square (value). Remote Mobile Switching Unit.

REC, Rec. REL RELP RELP-LTP REQ RF RFC, RFCH

RFE RFEB RFI RFN RISC RLP rms RMSU

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

G25

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

ROM ROSE

Read Only Memory. Remote Operations Service Element. An ASE which carries a message between devices over an association established by ASCE (a CCITT specification for O & M) (OMC). Time period between transmit and receive instant of a timeslot in the BTS, propagation determined by the response behaviour of the MS and the MS to BTS delay distance. Regular Pulse Excited. Regular Pulse Excitation - Long Term Prediction. The GSM digital speech coding scheme. Read Privilege Required. Access to the column is allowed only for privileged accounts. Radio Resource management. Receive Ready (frame). Radio Resource State Machine. Radio System Entity. Radio Signalling Link. Radio System Link Function. Radio SubSystem (replaced by BSS). Received Signal Strength Indication. Remotely Tuneable Channel Combiner. Remote Terminal Emulator. Rack Unit. Receive(r). Remote Transcoder. Received signal level downlink. Received signal level uplink. Received signal quality downlink. Received signal quality uplink. Remote Transcoder Unit. The shelf which houses the remote transcoder modules in a BSSC cabinet at a remote transcoder site.

Roundtrip

RPE RPE-LTP RPR RR RR RRSM RSE RSL RSLF RSS RSSI RTC RTE RU Rx RXCDR RXLEV-D RXLEV-U RXQUAL-D RXQUAL-U RXU

S
SABM SACCH SAGE SAP Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode. A message which establishes the signalling link over the air interface. Slow Associated Control CHannel. A GSM control channel used by the MS for reporting RSSI and signal quality measurements. A brand of trunk test equipment. Service Access Point. In the reference model for OSI, SAPs of a layer are defined as gates through which services are offered to an adjacent higher layer.

G26

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

SAP SAPI SAW SB SC SC SCCA SCCP SCEG SCH

System Audits Process. Service Access Point Indicator (identifier). Surface Acoustic Wave. Synchronization Burst (see Synchronization burst). Service Centre (used for Short Message Service). Service Code. System Change Control Administration. Software module which allows full or partial software download to the NE (OMC). Signalling Connection Control Part. Speech Coding Experts Group (of GSM). Synchronization CHannel. A GSM broadcast control channel used to carry information for frame synchronization of MSs and identification of base stations. Status Control Interface. Serial Communication Interface Processor. Status Control Manager. Sub-Channel Number. One of the parameters defining a particular physical channel in a BS. Service Control Point (an intelligent network entity). Slim Channel Unit. Slim Channel Unit for GSM900. Stand-alone Dedicated Control CHannel. A GSM control channel where the majority of call setup occurs. Used for MS to BTS communications before MS assigned to TCH. Special Drawing Rights (an international basket currency for billing). Support Entity (GSM Rec. 12.00). Support Entity Function (GSM Rec.12.00). Slow Frequency Hopping. Screening Indicator. Service Interworking. SIlence Descriptor. Signal Information Field. The bits of a message signal unit that carry information for a certain user transaction; the SIF always contains a label. Subscriber Identity Module. Removable module which is inserted into a mobile equipment; it is considered as part of the MS. It contains security related information (IMSI, Ki, PIN), other subscriber related information and the algorithms A3 and A8. Service Information Octet. Eight bits contained in a message signal unit, comprising the service indicator and sub-service field.

SCI SCIP SCM SCN SCP SCU SCU900 SDCCH

SDR SE SEF SFH SI SI SID SIF

SIM

SIO

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

G27

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

SITE SIX

BSC, BTS or collocated BSC-BTS site. Serial Interface eXtender. Converts interface levels to TTL levels. Used to extend 2 serial ports from GPROC to external devices (RS232, RS422, and fibre optics). Secondary Key. A database column attribute, the secondary key indicates an additional index and/or usage as a composite key. Serial Link. Signalling Link Test Message. Switch Manager. Summing Manager. System Management Application Entity (CCITT Q795, ISO 9596). Short Message Entity. Motorola Software Maintenance Program. Short Message Service. Short Message Service Cell Broadcast. Short Message Service - Service Centre. Short Message Service/Point-to-Point. Subscriber Number. SeND. SeNDeR. Serial Number. Suppress Outgoing Access. Service Provider. The organisation through which the subscriber obtains GSM telecommunications services. This may be a network operator or possibly a separate body. Signalling Point. Special Product. Signalling Point Code. Suppress Preferential (closed user group). Signalling Point Inaccessible. Single Path Preselector. Structured Query Language. Service Request Distributor. Signed RESponse (authentication). CCITT Signalling System No. 7 (alias C7). Supplementary Service. A modification of, or a supplement to, a basic telecommunication service. SCCP messages, Subsystem-allowed (see CCITT Q.712 para 1.15).

SK SLNK SLTM SM SM SMAE SME SMP SMS SMSCB SMS-SC SMS/PP SN SND SNDR SNR SOA SP

SP SP SPC SPC SPI SPP SQL SRD SRES SS7 SS SSA

G28

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

SSC SSF SSM SSP SSP SSS STAN STAT stats STC STP Superframe SVC SVM SW SWFM Synchronization burst

Supplementary Service Control string. Subservice Field. The level 3 field containing the network indicator and two spare bits. Signalling State Machine. Service Switching Point (an intelligent network element). SCCP messages, Subsystem-prohibited (see CCITT Q.712 para 1.18). Switching SubSystem (comprising the MSC and the LRs). Statistical ANalysis (processor). STATistics. Statistics. System Timing Controller. Signalling Transfer Point. 51 traffic/associated control multiframes or 26 broadcast/common control multiframes (period 6.12s). Switch Virtual Circuit. SerVice Manager. Software. SoftWare Fault Management. Period of RF carrier less than one timeslot whose modulation bit stream carries information for the MS to synchronize its frame to that of the received signal. SYStem. SYStem GENeration. the Motorola procedure for loading a configuration database into a BTS.

SYS SYSGEN

T
T43 Type 43 Interconnect Board. Provides interface to 12 unbalanced (6-pair) 75 ohm (T43 coax connectors) lines for 2 Mbit/s circuits (See BIB). Terminal Adaptor. A physical entity in the MS providing terminal adaptation functions (see GSM 04.02). Timing Advance. Type Approval Code. Total Access Communications System (European analogue cellular system). Terminal Adaptation Function. To Be Determined. Transaction Capabilities. Transaction Capabilities Application Part (of Signalling System No. 7).

TA TA TAC TACS TAF TBD TC TCAP

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

G29

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

TCH

Traffic CHannel. GSM logical channels which carry either encoded speech or user data. A Traffic channel can be one of the following: TCH/F (full rate TCH), TCH/F2.4 (full rate TCH at < 2.4 kbit/s), TCH/F4.8 (full rate TCH at 4.8 kbit/s), TCH/F9.6 (full rate TCH at 9.6 kbit/s), TCH/FS (full rate speech TCH), TCH/H (half rate TCH), TCH/H2.4 (half rate TCH at 2.4 kbit/s), TCH/H4.8 (half rate TCH at 4.8 kbit/s) or TCH/HS (half rate speech TCH). Transceiver Control Interface. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol Transceiver Control Unit Time Division Multiplexing. Time Division Multiple Access. Terminal Equipment. Equipment that provides the functions necessary for the operation of the access protocols by the user. Terminal endpoint identifier. Terminal Equipment Identity. TEMPorary. TEST control processor. Transfer Allowed. Transfer Prohibited. Trivial File Transfer Protocol. Transaction Identifier. The multiplex subdivision in which voice and signalling bits are sent over the air. Each RF carrier is divided into 8 timeslots. A signal sent by the BTS to the MS. It enables the MS to advance the timing of its transmission to the BTS so as to compensate for propagation delay. Traffic Manager. TDM Modem Interface board. Provides analogue interface from IWF to modems for 16 circuits (p/o IWF). Traffic Metering and Measuring. Telecommunications Management Network. The implementation of the Network Management functionality required for the PLMN is in terms of physical entities which together constitute the TMN. Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity. A unique identity temporarily allocated by the MSC to a visiting mobile subscriber to process a call. May be changed between calls and even during a call, to preserve subscriber confidentiality. Timeslot Number. Channels which carry users speech or data (see also TCH). Equivalent to an erlang. Sequence of modulating bits employed to facilitate timing recovery and channel equalization in the receiver.

TCI TCP/IP TCU TDM TDMA TE Tei TEI TEMP TEST TFA TFP TFTP TI Timeslot Timing advance

TM TMI TMM TMN

TMSI

TN Traffic channels Traffic unit Training sequence

G30

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

TRAU TRX

Transcoder Rate Adaption Unit. TRansceiver(s). A network component which can serve full duplex communication on 8 full-rate traffic channels according to specification GSM 05.02. If Slow Frequency Hopping (SFH) is not used, then the TRX serves the communication on one RF carrier. Teleservice. TimeSlot (see Timeslot). TimeSlot Acquisition. Transceiver Speech & Data Interface. Training Sequence Code. TimeSlot Interchange. Transceiver Station Manager. Timeslot SWitch. Transistor to Transistor Logic. TeleTYpe (refers to any terminal). Traffic Unit. Telephone User Part (of signalling system No. 7). Transmit(ter). Transmit Bandpass Filter.

TS TS TSA TSDA TSC TSI TSM TSW TTL TTY TU TUP Tx TxBPF

U
UA Unnumbered Acknowledgment. A message sent from the MS to the BSS to acknowledge release of radio resources when a call is being cleared. User Datagram Protocol. User Determined User Busy. Ultra High Frequency. Unnumbered Information frame. Air interface. Universal Mobile Telecommunication System. Up to Date. Physical link from the MS towards the BTS (MS transmits, BTS receives). That part of the burst used by the demodulator; differs from the full burst because of the bit shift of the I and Q parts of the GMSK signal. Unstructured SS Data.

UDP UDUB UHF UI Um UMTS UPD Uplink Useful part of burst

USSD

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

G31

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

V
VA VAD VCO VLR Vitirbi Algorithm (used in channel equalizers). Voice Activity Detection. A process used to identify presence or absence of speech data bits. VAD is used with DTX. Voltage Controlled Oscillator. Visitor Location Register. A GSM network element which provides a temporary register for subscriber information for a visiting subscriber. Often a part of the MSC. Very Large Scale Integration (in ICs). Voice Operated Transmission. Vehicular Speaker Phone. Voltage Standing Wave Ratio.

VLSI VOX VSP VSWR

W
WPA WS Wrong Password Attempts (counter). Work Station. The remote device via which O&M personnel execute input and output transactions for network management purposes. Work Station Function block.

WSF

X
X.25 X.25 link XBL XCB XCDR XID CCITT specification and protocols for public packet-switched networks (see PSPDN). A communications link which conforms to X.25 specifications and uses X.25 protocol (NE to OMC links). Transcoder to BSS Link. The communications link between the Transcoder (XCDR) and the BSS. Transceiver Control Board (p/o Transceiver). Full-rate Transcoder. Provides speech transcoding and 4:1 submultiplexing (p/o BSS, BSC or XCDR). Exchange Identifier.

Z
ZC Zone Code

G32

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

G33

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

G34

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Answers

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

ii

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

C2 Reselection Exercise
The parameters and levels specified on the facing page are typical values experienced by a mobile in the reselection process. Use these values to determine whether the mobile will reselect to the neighbour cell. The mobile has been in the server well over one hour, and the best neighbour has been in the top six measured cells for exactly 4 minutes.

WORKING AREA
SERVING (working out C1 first) A= A= B= B= Rxlev Av (-70) - P1 (-90) (P1= rxlev_access_min= (-90) dBm) = 20 dBm dBm)

P2 - Max RF Power of MS(P2=ms_txpwr_max_cch= 33 + 39 0 6 = (-6) dBm = = 20 dBm 26 dBm

C1= 20 C2= 20

NEIGHBOUR A= A= B= B= Rxlev Av (-63) - P1 (-90) (P1= rxlev_access_min= (-90) dBm) = 27 dBm (P2=ms_txpwr_max_cch= 2 dBm 25 dBm 19 dBm dBm)

P2 - Max RF Power of MS 41 + 39 2 = = =

C1= 27 C2= 25

4 - 10

FOR RESELECTION C2 (server) < C2 (neighbour) - cell_reselect_hysteresis C2 server= 26 C2 Neighbour= 19 C2 Neighbour - cell_reselect_hysterisis= 15 No reselection
EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems 6i

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

6ii

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Idle Mobile Control Exercise answers


Using C1 (given the macro C1 value in the microcell area) make the MS remain on the macro cell for as long as possible in idle mode. If C1 of the micro is a positive value then the additional coverage that is provided by the microcell is available to idle MS's.

Note: These are not the only set of values that work. The micro C1 value is low but remains positive. The macro C1 value is high. This makes reselection to the micro difficult but possible.

macro
micro

Powerclass 4 MS

MACRO
C1(s)= 25 dBm

MICRO
A= Rxlev_dl Avg - P1 A= -70 - (-75 dBm)= 5dBm B= P2 - Max RF power of MS B= 23 dBm - 33 dBm= -10dBm C1(n)=5 dBm - 0 dBm= C1(s)> C1(n) =25dBm> 5 dBm The value of P2 has no effect unless it is greater than the mobiles power class.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

6iii

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

6iv

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Power Budget Exercise part 1


The figures specified on the facing page can be used by the HDPC to calculate the Power budget assessment. Use the working area to calculate PBBT (n).

SERVING (macro) serving= serving= serving= min (ms_txpwr_max,P) -Rxlev_DL -PWR_C_D 33 112 - (-90) - 11

NEIGHBOUR (micro) neighbour= min (ms_txpwr_max(n),P) -RXLEV_NCELL (n) neighbour= neighbour= 33 108 - (-75)

PBGT (n)= serving - Neighbour PBGT (n)= 112 PBGT (n)= 4 - 108

Power Budget Exercise part 2


If ms_twpwr_max_cell in add_neigh of the server was set to 29 dBm then the outcome of the calculation for PBGT(n) would be 8. It could be lowered to 25 dBm to get an even greater effect. This has helped make the microcell neighbor look more attractive.

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

6v

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

6vi

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Answers (theoretical solution)


add_neighbor srccell_id xxx xx xxx xx0 neighbor_cell_id xxx xx xxx xx1 Placement External list type Both NA 1124 (GSM900) Layers 0 to 63 39 dBm 0 (-110dBm) 10 4 2 ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____ Not prompted as type 2 alg used Remember to keep at least one gard band between All sites could have a separate BSIC Class 2 8w mobiles Not restricting (note on streeet level) criteria 1 Set low for easy emergency qualification but prevent ping ponging Reasonably quick and accurate for emergency handup Macrocell (no PBGT(n)) qualification

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

6vii

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Answers (theoretical solution)


add_neighbor srccell_id xxx xx xxx xx0 neighbor_cell_id xxx xx xxx xx2 Placement Internal Same BSC as SRC cell list type BASACCH Discourages idle selection or reselection 0 1124 (GSM900) 0 to 63 30 dBm 30 (80 dBm) 10 6 6, 5 or 4 NA NA No synchronised handovers (separate BTSs) Keep at least one guard band between layers and Neighbors All sites could have a separate BSIC Class 4 (2w) or lower On street level plus a margin Low for easy qualification but prevent ping ponging Fast handin incouraged Alg type for line of sight neighbor Type 3 only Type 3 only 31 SACCH multiframes is approximately 15 seconds forces fast mobiles upto the macro layer. 15 seconds as timer starts prior to handin qualification (60db) timer starts as you approach microcell coverage area 10 second delay timer (20 SACCH multiframes) Applied for 10 seconds then cancel out by dynamic offset Not applied until after timer 10 seconds (attracts MS when it expires)

(For type 4) 31 (For type 5) 31 (For type 5) 50 (For type 6) 20 (For type 6) 50 db (For type 6) 70 db

6viii

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Answers (theoretical solution)


add_neighbor srccell_id xxx xx xxx xx0 neighbor_cell_id xxx xx xxx xx3 Placement Internal Same BSC as SRCELL list type BASACCH Discourages idle selection or reselection 0 1124 (GSM900) 0 to 63 30 dBm 30 (80dBm) 6 6 6, 5 or 4 NA NA No synchronised handovers (separate BTSs) Keep at least one guard band between layers and neighbors All sites should have a separate BSIC due to their proximity Class 4 (2w) or lower On street level plus a margin Low ho_margin used as handin encouraged for slow MS but prevents ping ponging Fast handin encouraged Alg type for line of sight neighbor Type 3 only Type 3 only 31 SACCH multiframes is approximately 15 seconds forces fast mobiles upto the macro layer 15 seconds as timeer starts prior to handon qualification (60db) Timer starts as you approach microcell coverage area 10 second delay timer (20 SACCH multiframes) Applied for 10 seconds then cancelled out by the Dynamic Offset Not applied until after 10 second timer expires (attracts MS when it expires

(For type 4) 31 (For type 5) 31 (For type 5) 50 (For type 6) 20 (For type 6) 50 db (For type 6) 100 db

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

6ix

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Answers (theoretical solution)


add_neighbor srccell_id xxx xx xxx xx0 neighbor_cell_id xxx xx xxx xx4 Placement Internal list type BASACCH Discourages idle selection or reselection 0 1124 (GSM900) 0 to 63 30 dBm 30 (80db) 6 6 3 No synchronised handovers (separate BTSs) Keep at least one guard band between layers and neighbors All sites should have a separate BSIC due to their proximity Class 4 (2w) or lower On street level plus a margin Low ho_margin as handin encouraged for slow MS and prevents ping ponging Fast handin required Alg type (round the corner neighbour) (80db) levels drop by typically 20db (80db) levels drop by typically 20db

(For type 3) 30 (For type 3) 30


____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

Not prompted as type 3 algorithm

6x

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

Answers (theoretical solution)


add_neighbor srccell_id xxx xx xxx xx0 neighbor_cell_id xxx xx xxx xx5 Placement Internal Same BSC as source cell list type BASACCH Discourages idle selection or reselection 0 1124 (GSM900) 0 to 63 proximity 30 dBm 25 3 3 3 No synchronised handovers (separate BTSs) Keep at least one guard band between layers and neighbours All sites should have a separate BSIC due to their Class 4 (2w) or lower (85db) Should stop external handing in (25db) Low ho_margin as handover would have to be quick going into the building also prevents ping ponging Fast handin required Round the corner neighbor (80db) Levels drop by typically 20db to 25db (80db) Levels drop by typically 20db to 25db

(For type 3) 30 (For type 3) 30


____ ____ ____ ____ ____ ____

Not prompted as type 3 algorithm

EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems

6xi

FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

ISSUE 1 REVISION 2

6xii

SYS12: Capacity Enhancing Techniques and Multilayer Systems EMOTOROLA LTD. 2000 FOR TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY

Anda mungkin juga menyukai